Navis Ex - Ome - 19702 P902 N9

IMAGE FILING SOFTWARE
NAVIS-EX
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Original instructions
NIDEK CO., LTD. : 34-14, Maehama, Hiroishi Gamagori, Aichi 443-0038, JAPAN
(Manufacturer) Telephone: +81-533-67-6611
Facsimile: +81-533-67-6610
NIDEK CO., LTD. : 3F Sumitomo Fudosan Hongo Bldg., 3-22-5 Hongo,
(Tokyo Office) Bunkyo-Ku, Tokyo 113-0033, JAPAN
Telephone: +81-3-5844-2641
Facsimile: +81-3-5844-2642
NIDEK INC. : 47651 Westinghouse Drive, Fremont, CA 94539, U.S.A.
(United States Agent) Telephone: +1-510-226-5700
Facsimile: +1-510-226-5750
NIDEK S.A. : Europarc, 13 rue Auguste Perret, 94042 Créteil, FRANCE
(EU Authorized Representative) Telephone: +33-1-49 80 97 97
Facsimile: +33-1-49 80 32 08
2019-02
19702-P902-N9
Printed in Japan
C 2009 NIDEK CO., LTD.
Before using this product, be sure to read “SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT” at the end of
this manual.The “SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT” contains the terms for use of the
software and related materials included for this product.
Use this device properly and safely.
BEFORE USE, READ THIS MANUAL.
This operator's manual contains information necessary for operation and safety
precautions of the NIDEK NAVIS-EX IMAGE FILING SOFTWARE.
For correct use, this manual is needed. Especially, the cautions for safety and operating
procedures must be thoroughly understood before using the device.
Keep this manual handy to verify use whenever necessary.
If you encounter any problems or have questions about the software, please contact your
authorized distributor.
Safety precautions
In this manual, a signal word is used to designate the degree or level of safety alerting. The definition
is as follows:
CAUTION • Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury or property damage accident.
Even situations indicated by “ CAUTION” may result in serious injury under certain conditions.
Safety precautions must be strictly followed at all times.
19702-P902-N9 I
Usage precautions
Before Use
CAUTION • Do not use the unit for any use other than its intended purpose.
NIDEK will not be responsible for accidents or malfunctions caused by such misuse.
• The following environment conditions must be maintained during use.

Use environment
Use NAVIS-EX under the condition specified for the computer on which NAVIS-EX is
installed or the device connected.
Or follow the conditions below.
Use conditions Temperature: 10 to 35ºC (50 to 95ºF)
Humidity: 30 to 75% (non-condensing)
Pressure: 800 to 1060 hPa
No hazardous dust or smoke
Additionally maintain the environmental conditions described on the manual of the com-
puter during use.
• For connection, configuration, and installation of NAVIS-EX, see the NAVIS-EX

Installation Manual.
• When applying the power to the terminal from an electrical supply separate from that
of other medical electrical equipment, connect a protective grounding terminal to the
common protective grounding conductor of the medical system.
• When connecting cables to the port of the medical electric equipment, shut down all
devices. In addition, do not touch a patient while touching any conductive terminal at
the same time.
• Connect all cables to the interface connector securely, maintaining correct orientation
of cable connectors.
Data transmission may not be performed properly.
II
During Use
CAUTION • For correct use, this manual is needed. Especially, the cautions for safety and
operating procedures must be thoroughly understood before using the software.
Using the software in a manner not described by the Operator’s Manual may result in
unexpected failure or adverse events.
• A license is necessary for use of this software. Purchase the number of licenses
needed.
• If no communication or communication failure occurs on a network, check the

network condition.
• If the network is connected with equipment other than NAVIS-EX, virus infection or data
corruption may occur. Ensure that it is proper operation condition under an administrator.
• If improper network settings are made, network failure may occur. Ensure that proper
settings are made under an administrator.
• The measurement function of this software offers reference information of the

distance conversion based on pixel measurement.
• Read the instruction manuals for your computer or Windows, and observe the general rules.
• Be aware that some operating procedures differ from those of Windows.
• If the USB license key is not detected, take measures such as checking the USB flash drive
connection or changing the port so that it is detected.
• Change patients with a device other than the capture terminal.

If the patient is changed with the image capture terminal, unexpected results may occur.
• Do not change patients or exit NAVIS-EX while acquiring images, reading files or
processing images.
It may cause unexpected errors or corrupt the image data.
• Adjust the brightness and contrast of the display monitor for comfortable viewing.
Printing color tones may vary according to the monitor or printer used.
• Do not disconnect communication cables while the device is turned on.

A connection error occurs and a restart is necessary to continue use.
• Do not set the computer to go into standby mode (screen saver and power off).
In standby mode, capturing by the connected device is not possible. After recovering
from standby mode, data transmission cannot be performed properly.
However, if the computer is to be left idle for a period of time, for security, use the screen
saver auto lock function.
• Do not change the set language.
• When using multiple terminals, upgrade all terminals to the same version.
If different versions are used, the database file may be corrupted.
• Data exchange is not possible with later NAVIS-EX versions. Make sure the same
version is being used.
III
CAUTION • If the same examination data is opened on multiple terminals, the image data may not
be displayed.
In such a case, return to the Image List screen and retry display of the examination
data.
• When a USB device is added, drive assignment is changed and backup or restoration
may not be performed correctly. Check the location for storage or restoration before
performing the operation.
• Even if backup is set to be performed, if the power is not turned on or if the backup
location cannot be found, backup is not performed.
• When using NAVIS-EX, the NAVIS-EX folder automatically created on the drive where
NAVIS-EX is installed must have write authority.
Confirm the user is logged in with authority to use NAVIS-EX.
• Equipment connected to the analog or digital interfaces must be certified according to

the applicable international standards for safety (such as EN 60601-1 and IEC 60601-
1). Furthermore, all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-
1. Anyone who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output
part configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system
complies with the requirements of the system standard IEC 60601-1. If in doubt,
consult the technical service department of your local representative.
• To use NAVIS-EX, Server Manager tool, and Backup Tool, be sure to execute them with
Windows OS administrator rights.
IV
 Patient environment
• The figure below shows the volume of space (patient environment) in which contact can occur between the patient and
any part of the device (including connected ones) or between the patient and any other person(s) touching the device
(including connected ones).
Use devices that comply with IEC 60601-1 in the patient environment. If any device that does not comply with IEC
60601-1 is to be used, install the device outside the patient environment and use the computer and its peripherals with a
power supply complaint with IEC 60950 or use an isolation transformer that complies with IEC 60601-1.
Radius 1.5 m
Patient
2.5 m
1.5 m 1.5 m
V
After Use
CAUTION • Maintain the surrounding temperature and humidity at the following ranges during
transport and storage of the device.
Environmental conditions
Temperature: -10 to 55ºC (14 to 131ºF)
Humidity: 10 to 95% (Non-condensing)
Pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa
A place with low dust
A place not exposed to direct sunlight
• Be sure to back up data to an external memory such as a USB hard disk.

If the NAVIS-EX software or the hard disk drive is corrupted, the stored data will be
unusable.
• Operators should be responsible for managing their data.

NIDEK assumes no responsibility for a loss of data.
• Never shut off the personal computer before shutting down Windows.
The programs or data in the computer may be corrupted.
• Store the installation disc in the disc case in a secure place.

In an environment with high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, or a sudden
change in temperature, the physical lifetime of the disc may be reduced. If the disc can-
not be read, ask NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
• Continued use of operating systems that are no longer supported may result in
vulnerability to information security risks. It is recommended to use operating
systems that are supported.
Maintenance and Check

CAUTION • Before using this software, perform the following checks.
Normal activation and shutdown
Check monitor cleanliness and clean as necessary
Check that the communication with the connected device is normal
• For data protection, to make a backup to USB hard disk etc. on a daily basis is
recommended.
Disposal
CAUTION • Follow the local ordinances and recycling regulations regarding disposal or recycling
of the components.
It is recommended to commission the disposal to a designated industrial waste disposal
contractor. Inappropriate disposal may contaminate the environment.
• When disposing of packing materials, sort them by material and follow local
ordinances and recycling regulations.
Inappropriate disposal may contaminate the environment.
VI
Connection to Network
CAUTION • If any improper settings are in the network, partial or complete network failure may be
caused. Check that proper network setting is performed with the network
administrator.
• If no communication or impeded communication occurs, check the network

condition. In addition, consult the network administrator as necessary.
• When connecting the network with a device or a computer other than the NAVIS-EX
terminal, virus infection or data corruption may occur. Check that the operation status
is proper with the network administrator.
• If the medical system is configured with a network, insert or connect an isolation

transformer (network isolation transformer) between the medical electrical equipment
and network device such as HUB, and network device and other electric devices.
According to the other electric device type and number connected to the network, elec-
tric shock, malfunction, or failure of the electric device may occur.
For the installation of a network isolation transformer, contact NIDEK or authorized dis-
tributor.
• If the medical system is configured with a network, do not connect the network to a
wide area network such as the Internet.
Only use NAVIS-EX in a local network comprised of devices configuring a medical sys-
tem. When a device is infected or compromised by connection to the Internet, NIDEK
will not compensate for the damage.
• When connecting to other devices via a networked medical system, confirm that no
hazard affects patients, operators, or third parties. In addition, when a device is added
or removed from the network, or the device is updated or upgraded, confirm that no
hazard affects patients, operators, and third parties in the same manner.
VII
VIII
Table of Contents
1. ACQUIRING IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Software Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.2 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1.3 Intended Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1.4 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1.5 Starting and Exiting NAVIS-EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1.5.1 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-230/AFC-210). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
1.5.2 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-330) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
1.5.3 Starting NAVIS-EX (F-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
1.5.4 Starting NAVIS-EX (RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330) . . . . . . . .12
1.5.5 Starting NAVIS-EX (when no imaging device is connected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.5.6 Exiting NAVIS-EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
1.5.7 Displaying messages at the time of start-up/exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.6 Setting and Executing Automatic Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
1.6.1 Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1.6.2 Manual backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
1.6.3 Restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
1.6.4 Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
1.6.5 Required initial settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
1.7 Patient List Screen Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
1.7.1 Menu bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
1.7.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
1.7.3 Tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
1.7.4 Patient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
1.8 Patient List Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
1.8.1 Registering new patients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
1.8.2 Editing patient information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
1.8.3 Deleting patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
1.8.4 Searching patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
1.8.5 When patient data being accessed by another computer is selected. . . . . . . . . . .44
1.9 Acquiring Images (AFC-230/210) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
1.9.1 Image Capture screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
1.9.2 Acquiring with patient selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
1.9.3 Acquiring images in communication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
1.9.4 Checking settings of afcCapture Monitor Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
1.10 Acquiring Images (AFC-330) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
1.11 Acquiring Images (F-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
1.11.1 Explanation of DVR screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
1.11.2 Acquiring with patient selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
1.11.3 Entering comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
1.11.4 DVR screen settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
1.12 Acquiring Images (RS-3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
IX
1.13 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Lite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.14 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Advance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.15 Acquiring Images (RS-330) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.16 Acquiring Images (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.16.1 Image Capture screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.16.2 Importing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.16.3 Checking settings of Importing Monitor Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.17 Acquiring Images (DCIM Import: DS-10 / DS-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.17.1 DCIM Import screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.17.2 DCIM import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.17.3 DCIM Import settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.18 Importing/Exporting Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.18.1 Patient import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.18.2 Multiple patient import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1.18.3 Patient export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.18.4 Multiple patient export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.18.5 Patient list export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.19 Recycle Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.19.1 Recycle Manager screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.19.2 Saving images or examination data to patient's data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.19.3 Deleting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.20 Patient List Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1.20.1 System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1.20.2 Common tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
1.20.3 Language tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.20.4 Patient List tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.20.5 Tree tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.20.6 License tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.20.7 Image Select tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1.20.8 Image Caption tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1.20.9 Thumbnail tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
1.20.10Export tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.20.11Samples tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.20.12Link tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.20.13Patient Change tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
1.20.14Image Tool tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
1.20.15Image Display tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.21 AFC/F-10/RS-330 Image Follow-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.21.1 Follow-Up screen description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1.21.2 Registering and removing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.21.3 Specifying Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.21.4 Specifying Follow-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.21.5 Releasing Baseline and Follow-Up images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
1.21.6 Switching the graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
X
1.21.7 Displaying the right and left eye images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1.21.8 Setting the Follow-Up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
1.22 Patient Change Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
1.22.1 Using command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
1.22.2 Using an observation folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.23 Data Compatibility Depending on Security Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
2. DISPLAYING IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

2.1 Image List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2.1.1 Select image mode / Single display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
2.1.2 Scope display /Simple image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.1.3 Selecting or deselecting all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.1.4 Displaying detailed information on images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.1.6 Comment of image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.1.7 Deleting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.1.8 Selecting the patient’s eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.1.9 Classifying images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2.1.10 Registering to Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2.1.11 Transferring images with the Communication function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.2 Displaying Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.2.1 Displaying the image list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.2.2 Displaying images with caption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2.2.3 Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2.2.4 Displaying analyzed results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.2.5 Capturing Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.3 Image Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.3.1 Starting up the image wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.3.2 Setting of image wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.4 Playing Back Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
2.5 Editing Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.5.1 Creating clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.5.2 Selecting clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.5.3 Deleting clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.5.4 Editing clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
2.5.5 Cutting out clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2.6 Printing Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.6.1 Printing selected images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.6.2 Print from preview screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
2.6.3 Print setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.7 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.7.1 Exporting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.7.2 Exporting movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
XI
2.8 E-mail Sending Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2.8.1 Setting e-mail sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2.8.2 Sending e-mails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2.8.3 Registering addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
2.8.4 Registering templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3. CUSTOM REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

3.1 Custom Report Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3.1.1 Explanation on report display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3.1.2 Displaying report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
3.1.3 Printing and link transfer of report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3.1.4 Exporting Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3.1.5 Custom Report screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3.1.6 New registration of template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3.1.7 Editing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
3.1.8 Editing shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
3.1.9 Arranging images and shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
3.1.10 Editing of registration image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
3.1.11 Other operations on template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.1.12 Importing / Exporting template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
3.2 Editing Registration Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.2.1 Explanation on registration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.2.2 Editing registration image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4. COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM STANDARD . . . . . . . 235

4.1 NAVIS-EX DICOM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.2 Worklist Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.3 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.3.1 Order Query with patient specified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.3.2 Deleting order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.4 Setting in DICOM Communication Detail Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5. DRAWING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

5.1 Image Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.2 Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.3 Functions of Each Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.3.1 Editing drawn lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5.4 Shape Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.4.1 Drawing using pattern image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.4.2 New addition of the reference shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.4.3 Editing pattern images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
XII
5.4.4 Deleting reference shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.5 Entering and Setting Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.1 Entering comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.5.2 Adding comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.5.3 Editing comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.5.4 Deleting items and comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.6 Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.6.1 Display or non-display of layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.6.2 Creating layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
5.6.3 Editing the layer name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.6.4 Deleting layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.6.5 Changing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.7 Displaying Analyzed Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
6. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

6.1 Image Processing Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
6.2 Image Processing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
6.3 Editing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.3.1 Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.3.2 Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.3.3 Changing the image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.3.4 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.3.5 Changing the color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
6.4 Saving Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7. IMAGE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

7.1 Image Measurement Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.2 Image Measurement Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7.3 Measuring Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.3.1 Specifying tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.3.2 Selection tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
7.3.3 Disc tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.3.4 Cup tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.3.5 GLD measurement tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.3.6 Line tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.3.7 Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7.3.8 Shape tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
7.3.9 Free tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8. PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
XIII
8.1 Outline of Panorama Image Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.2.1 Selecting images to move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.2.2 Specifying the area to be stored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
8.3 Tool Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.3.1 Thumbnail area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.3.2 Navigator window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.3.3 Color window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.3.4 History window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.3.5 Layer window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.4.1 Panorama tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
8.4.2 Lens calibration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
8.4.3 Mask tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
8.4.4 Work space tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.5 Automatic Panorama Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
9. STEREO VIEWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

9.1 Outline of the Stereo Viewing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
9.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
9.3 Stereo Image Creation and Observation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10.AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

10.1 Outline of AF Composite Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
10.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10.3 AF Composite Image Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
10.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
11.COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

11.1 Outline of Color Composite Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
11.3 Color Composite Image Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
12.VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

12.1 Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
12.2 Setting Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
12.3 Analytic Value Export Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
XIV
12.3.1 Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
12.3.2 Capture mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
12.3.3 Capture information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
12.3.4 Analytic Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
12.4 Image Display Menu (Macula Line, Macula Cross) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
12.4.1 Display / non-display of layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
12.4.2 Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
12.4.3 Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
12.4.4 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
12.4.5 Digital Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.4.6 Editing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.4.7 Displaying images in full size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
12.4.8 Saving image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
12.4.9 Setting the graph display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
12.4.10Changing the fundus image display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
12.5 Image Display Menu (Macula Multi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.6 Image Display Menu (Macula Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
12.7 Image Display Menu (Macula Map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.7.1 Overall Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
12.7.2 3D tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
12.7.3 Macula Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
12.7.4 Glaucoma Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.7.5 Image tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
12.7.6 En face tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
12.7.7 AngioScan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
12.7.8 Right and Left eyes in pair are selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.8 Image Display Menu (Disc Circle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12.9 Image Display Menu (Disc Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
12.10Image Display Menu (Disc Map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
12.10.1Overall tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
12.10.23D tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
12.10.3Image tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
12.10.4En face tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
12.10.5AngioScan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
12.10.6Editing optic disc shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
12.10.7Right and Left eyes in pair are selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
12.11Image Display Menu (Cornea Line and Cornea Cross) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
12.11.1Editing the border of the anterior segment layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
12.11.2Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
12.12Image Display Menu (Cornea Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
12.13Image Display Menu (ACA Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
12.14Printing / Printing Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
12.15Exporting OCT Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
12.16Sending OCT Images by E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
XV
12.17Error Messages and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
13.OCT IMAGE Follow-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

13.1 Displaying Follow-Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
13.2 Registering and Clearing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
13.3 Follow-Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13.3.1 Progression display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
13.3.2 Comparison display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
13.3.3 Inputting data to a custom graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
13.3.4 Registering a new custom graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
13.3.5 Inputting an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
13.3.6 Time Lapse Video Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
13.3.7 Follow-Up screen setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
13.4 Macula Line, Macula Cross Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
13.5 Macula Multi Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
13.6 Macula Map Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
13.7 Disc Circle Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
13.8 Disc Map Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
13.9 Macula Radial Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
13.10Disc Radial Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
13.11Registration editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
13.11.1Registration editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
13.11.2Editing registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
13.12 Printing / Printing Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
13.13Exporting Follow-Up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
13.14Sending Follow-Up screen by e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
13.15Error Messages and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
14.EMC (ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY) . . . . . . 527
15.MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
15.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
15.2 Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
XVI
1. ACQUIRING IMAGES
1.1 Software Outline

1
The NAVIS-EX image filing software is software that acquires data from the following NIDEK fundus
photography devices and files it for easy transfer to external systems.
Connectable devices:
NON-MYDRIATIC AUTO FUNDUS CAMERA AFC-230, AFC-210, AFC-330

OPHTHALMOSCOPE F-10
OPTICAL COHERENCE TOMOGRAPHY RS-3000, RS-3000 Advance, RS-3000 Lite, RS-330
DS-10 series
DIGITAL MEDICAL SCOPE (DS-10F, DS-10E, DS-10D, DS-10G, DS-10EA)
DS-20 (DS-20F)
To display image data from the devices shown below, optional add-in software is required.
Selecting an image from the image list screen activates the Viewer specified for that image.
For details, refer to the operator's manual of each Viewer software.
Microperimeter MP-3
Optical biometer AL-Scan
Specular microscope CEM-530
NAVIS-EX is equipped with functions for image acquiring, image display, image drawing, image pro-
cessing, image measurement, panorama image creation, stereo image observation, composite image
creation, and Follow-Up. (According to the image, available functions are limited.) Image data can be
transferred by network or e-mail.
NAVIS-EX can construct a network among multiple terminals and refers to and edits data from the cli-
ent computer.
• NAVIS-EX alone cannot acquire the data directly from the fundus photography device.
• Capture text information can be added to images acquired from the following NIDEK
fundus photography devices. However, the images must be saved with the XML
information added.
• For devices other than NIDEK fundus photography devices, jpeg and bitmap files can be
acquired. However, capture text information cannot be acquired.
The server computer stores and manages data. Be sure the server is activated when
referring to the data with client computers. When using a computer in stand-alone mode,
set the computer as server. When connecting the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000
Server
Lite/RS-330 to other devices, prepare other server computer.
However, for the AFC-330, the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 can be
connected as server.
1
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Software Outline
Acquires (Captures) the data by connecting the fundus capturing devices.

The client computer refers to and edits data.
Client Four computers at the maximum can be connected to the network at the same time.
* The connecting devices can be increased by adding the license.
When viewing the F-10 movie, the movie can be viewed for only the connected device.
• For changing and adding method of the connecting devices, see the Installation manual.
NAVIS-EX runs on computers using the following Windows *1 OS.

• When connecting to the RS-3000, RS-3000 Advance, RS-3000 Lite, or RS-330, use the
computer specified by the device.
• NAVIS-EX is intended to be used by an operator with general experience with software
operating on a Windows OS.
System requirements
English version: Windows 7 Professional (32 bit/64 bit) (SP1)
English version: Windows 8.1 Pro (32 bit/64 bit)
OS English version: Windows 10 Pro (32 bit/64 bit)
English version: Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2016 LTSB (64 bit)
English version: Windows Server 2016 Standard (64 bit)
Client: Core 2 Duo 2.13 GHz or higher
CPU Server: Pentium 4 3.0 GHz or higher
Client:
Windows 7, 8.1, Server 2016: 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
RAM
Windows 10: 2 GB or more
Server: approximately 3 GB
Client: 80 GB or more
HDD
Server: 160 GB or more
SXGA (1280x1024 pixels) or higher
Display UXGA (when OCT images are displayed in the Viewer screen.)
* Not compatible with dual-display (multi-monitor)
Graphic board
(When OCT images are Equivalent of FireMV2260 or more (manufactured by BUFFALO INC.)
displayed in the Viewer screen)
Drive CD/DVD drive

Analog-DV converter ADVC-300 (manufactured by Canopus Co., Ltd.) (Optional)
(when the F-10 is connected)
USB 2.0 port x 3 or more (except that for a mouse/keyboard/external HDD)

IEEE 1394 (6pin) x 1 or more (only the client computer connected to the F-10)
PCI-Express (x16) x 1 or more (when OCT images are displayed in the Viewer
screen.)
Others Ethernet port:
Windows 7, 8.1, 10: One or more 100Base-T or higher
Server 2016: One or more 1000Base-T or higher
Keyboard, mouse
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
*1. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other coun-
tries.
The corporate names and product names described in this Operator's Manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of each
manufacturer.
2
• Operate NAVIS-EX by pressing the button.

• For NAVIS-EX, icons displayed in the toolbar can be changed with the “Customize
Toolbar”. Functions of shortcut button that is not displayed can be executed from the menu.
When an image is displayed, some functions can be executed from the pop-up file menu.
• When using the PDF file, use the Acrobat Reader accompanied to the NAVIS-EX. For the
other version, the PDF file may not be started normally.
1
• A license key must be purchased for each computer to be connected.
• The terminal running the acquisition software must have computer specifications that
satisfy the system requirements.
• When operating NAVIS-EX connecting with AFC-230/210, afcCapture is necessary.
Ensure that the system requirements of afcCapture are satisfied.
• When operating NAVIS-EX connecting with AFC-330, license setting is not necessary.
However, the number of computers connected simultaneously is counted. Confirm that the proper
number of licenses is provided before use.
• To operate NAVIS-EX connecting with F-10, F-10 Capture and Video Driver are necessary.
Ensure that the F-10 Capture and Video Driver system requirements are satisfied.
Note for date setting

Before using, make sure that the date is correct.
When the date is different depending on the terminal connected, “History” may be deleted.
Note for date format

For the numeric computer date format, select a format that consists of numbers (0 to 9), slashes (/),
periods (.), or hyphens (-).
Be sure to select four-digit display of the year.
The date of birth input format for patient registration is the same as the computer date format.
In the following tables, usable and unusable date formats (numeric format) for each language setting
are indicated.
English (British)
Usable format Unusable format

Date format Input example Date format Input example
dd/MM/yyyy 01/01/1950 dd/MM/yy 01/01/50
yyyy-MM-dd 1950-01-01 d/M/yy 1/1/50
d.m.yy 1.1.50
3
English (American)
Usable format Unusable format

Date format Input example Date format Input example
M/d/yyyy 1/1/1950 M/d/yy 1/1/50
M/d/yyyy 10/10/1950 MM/dd/yy 01/01/50
MM/dd/yyyy 01/01/1950 yy/MM/dd 50/01/01
yyyy-MM-dd 1950-01-01 dd-MMM-yy 07-Jul-09
Note for decimal point

For the OS using comma instead of period for decimal point (ex. French OS), NAVIS-EX does not
operate properly. Use the English OS.
Note for font size

Do not change the font size from Medium in the OS display setting.
Network setting
If the server is specified with the computer name, operation may become slow.
If the server is specified with the IP address, operation speed may become improved.
Various functions
Availability of function differ depending on the type of image (capturing device).
RS-3000/
AFC-330/ RS-3000
230/210/ Advance/
F-10 RS-3000
RS-330*1/
Lite/
DS-10/20
RS-330*2
"1.9 Acquiring Images (AFC-230/210)" (page 45)
 × ×
"1.10 Acquiring Images (AFC-330)" (page 51)
"1.11 Acquiring Images (F-10)" (page 52) ×  ×
"1.12 Acquiring Images (RS-3000)" (page 65) × × 
Acquiring images "1.13 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Lite)" (page 66) × × 
"1.14 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Advance)" (page
× × 
67)
"1.15 Acquiring Images (RS-330)" (page 68)  × 
"1.16 Acquiring Images (Import)" (page 69)   
"2.1 Image List Screen" (page 139)   ×
Image reference
"12 VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE" (page 365) × × 
Printing image data "2.6 Printing Image Data" (page 181)   
"2.7 Export" (page 190)   ×
Exporting image data
"12.15 Exporting OCT Images" (page 460) × × 
Sending image data by e- "2.8 E-mail Sending Function" (page 194)   ×
mail "12.16 Sending OCT Images by E-mail" (page 463) × × 
Drawing to image "5 DRAWING FUNCTION" (page 251)   ×
Processing images "6 IMAGE PROCESSING" (page 283)   ×
Measuring image distance
"7 IMAGE MEASUREMENT" (page 295)   ×
and dimension
4
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Classification
Creating panorama
"8 PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION" (page 311)   ×
composite images
Stereo image creation and
"9 STEREO VIEWING" (page 347)   ×
observation
Creating AF composite
"10 AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION" (page 353) ×  ×
images (F-10)
Creating color composite
1
"11 COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION" (page 359) ×  ×
images (F-10)
"1.21 AFC/F-10/RS-330 Image Follow-Up" (page
  ×
Follow-Up 118)
"13 OCT IMAGE Follow-Up" (page 467) × × 
: Only still images can be captured

*1: RS-330 fundus image
*2: RS-330 OCT image
1.2 Classification
Classification under the provision of 93/42/EEC (MDD): Class IIa
As long as NAVIS-EX is connected to AFC-330/AFC-210/AFC-230, F-10, RS-3000, RS-
3000 Advance, RS-3000 Lite, DS-10 series, or DS-20 to comprise a system, this system is
classified as Class IIa.
1.3 Intended Use

The NAVIS-EX software is intended to store, manage, display, process, measure, and analyze patient
data, clinical data, image data, and measurement results sent from NIDEK diagnostic devices via net-
work.
The NAVIS-EX software is also intended to interact with the related software.
5
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Labels
1.4 Labels
,0$*(),/,1*62)7:$5(
/2*,&,(/'(*(67,21'(),&+,(56
62)7:$5(',$5&+,9,$=,21(,00$*,1,
%,/''2.80(17$7,21662)7:$5(
62)7:$5(3$5$5(//(12'(,0*(1(6
0$
,0$*(),/,1*62)7:$5(
/2*,&,(/'(*(67,21'(),&+,(56
62)7:$5(',$5&+,9,$=,21(,00$*,1,
%,/''2.80(17$7,21662)7:$5(
62)7:$5(3$5$5(//(12'(,0*(1(6
0$
yyyy-mm-dd
The displayed CE mark applies only to NAVIS-EX. The CE mark that applies to the AFC-330, AFC-
210, AFC-230, F-10, RS-3000, RS-3000 Advance, RS-3000 Lite, RS-330, NIDEK Digital Medical
Scope DS-10F, DS-10E, DS-10D, DS-10G, DS-10EA, or DS-20 main body is the CE mark displayed
on the main body. Therefore, CE mark that applies to the system is the combination of the NAVIS-EX
CE mark and the CE mark displayed on the main body.
• The NAVIS-EX Video Driver is necessary to capture F-10 and video images. (Optional)
6
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Starting and Exiting NAVIS-EX
1.5 Starting and Exiting NAVIS-EX
1.5.1 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-230/AFC-210)

Use the following procedures to start NAVIS-EX and AFC-230/210. If the procedures are not per-
1
formed properly, the equipment may not be recognized or performed correctly.
• When connecting the multiple computers, start the computer to be the server in advance.
1 Check that computer and the AFC-230/210 or digital camera is properly connected with
the USB cable.
• Make sure that power to the computer, AFC-210\230, and digital camera is turned OFF.
2 Turn on power to the computer.
3 When the computer is started up, afcCapture is activated as well and the AFC Initialize
dialog box appears.
• Do not click any button in the AFC Initialize dialog box yet.
4 Turn on the digital camera power.
• When using NAVIS-EX, make sure that no storage media is inserted in the digital camera
in use.
5 When the AutoPlay dialog box is displayed, click the

close button . (Windows 7)
6 Turn on the AFC-230/210 power.
• For the AFC-230/210 starting procedure, refer to the AFC-230/210 Operator’s Manual.
7
7 When the AFC-230/210 start-up is completed, click “OK” in the initialization dialog box.
computer-to-AFC-230/210 connection processing takes place.
8 On the Windows desktop, double-click the

NAVIS-EX icon .
The NAVIS-EX Login dialog box appears.
9 Enter a user name and a password.

The login name entered previously is dis-
played in the Login Name field.
8
10 Click the Login button to start NAVIS-EX.

The Patient List screen appears.
1.5.2 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-330)
• When connecting multiple computers, start the computer to be a server at first.

• Turn on the AFC-330 power when capturing. Be sure to confirm that NAVIS-EX is activated
before performing capture.
1 Check that computer and the AFC-330 are properly connected with the LAN cable.
2 On the Windows desktop, double-click the

NAVIS-EX icon .
9


1.5.3 Starting NAVIS-EX (F-10)

Use the following procedures to start NAVIS-EX and F-10. If the procedures are not performed prop-
erly, the equipment may not be recognized or perform correctly.
• When connecting multiple computers, start the computer to be the server in advance.
1 Check that computer and the F-10 or peripheral devices are properly connected.
2 Turn on the power of peripheral devices.

• Turn on the Advanced DV Converter (ADVC-300) power before starting-up the computer.
3 Turn on the computer power to display the desktop screen.
10
4 Turn on the F-10 power.
• For the F-10 starting procedure, refer to the F-10 Operator’s Manual.
5 Double-click the NAVIS-EX icon on 1

the Windows desktop.


11
1.5.4 Starting NAVIS-EX (RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330)

Use the following procedures to start NAVIS-EX and RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-
330. If the procedures are not performed properly, the equipment may not be recognized or perform
correctly.
1 Check that computer, RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330, and peripheral

devices are correctly connected.
2 Turn on the isolation transformer power.
3 Turn on the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 power.

• For the starting procedure of the connected devices, refer to the operator’s manual of each
device.
6 Double-click the NAVIS-EX icon on


12

When the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite is set to activate automatically when

NAVIS-EX is activated (RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite Autostart is ON), the
Patient Search window is displayed in the background of RS-3000 Capture/RS-3000
Advance Capture/RS-3000 Lite Capture.
1.5.5 Starting NAVIS-EX (when no imaging device is connected)

Use the following procedures to start NAVIS-EX alone (for Import license, DCIM Import license, and
viewing exclusive use). If the procedures are not performed properly, the equipment may not be rec-
ognized or perform correctly.
13
3 Double-click the NAVIS-EX icon on



• When NAVIS-EX is for viewing exclusive use, “Grab” is used instead of “Import” (or “DCIM
Import).
14
When NAVIS-EX is not started

Nothing happens even though NAVIS-EX is executed.
NAVIS-EX may be waiting to connect to the database. A possible cause is that the firewall of
the server blocks the connection. Turn the firewall off.
1
“It is not possible to connect it with the server” is displayed.
It is possible that the server does not start or sharing is not set up correctly. Should the
wrong computer name of the server have been entered at installation, register the correct
server name and port No. in the Input Server Name dialog box displayed after the Error dia-
log box.
When manually setting the shared folder, make sure the NAVIS-EX server setting to the
administrator to set the shared name.
1.5.6 Exiting NAVIS-EX
1 From the File menu, select the Close menu item.

Or click the close button on the upper right of the screen.
A confirmation message is displayed.
2 Click the OK button to shut down NAVIS-EX.
• When connecting to the F-10, turn off the Advanced DV Converter (ADVC-300) power after
shutting-down the computer.
• When connecting to the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330, turn off the
isolation transformer after shutting-down the computer and connecting device.
• When logging in as administrator, select logout in the file menu temporarily to display Login
dialog to login as administrator.
15
1.5.7 Displaying messages at the time of start-up/exit

Whether to display the login screen at the time of NAVIS-EX start-up or to display a confirmation mes-
sage at the time of exit can be set.
This can be set only when logged in as administrator.
1 Select [Setup] - [Administrator Setting] from the menu.

The Administrator Setting dialog box appears.
• When logged in as other than administrator, the Administrator Setting option is not
displayed in the Setting menu. Select Logout from the File menu to log in as administrator.
2 Change the setting and click the Save button.

The Administrator Setting dialog box closes and this setting becomes enabled.
Set whether to display the login screen at the time of start-up.

Login Screen Display Setting When “Hide” is selected, the computer is logged in as user administrator
with the login name of “No body”.
Close Message Display Set whether to display the message “Exit NAVIS-EX?” at the time of
Setting exit.
16
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Setting and Executing Automatic Backup
1.6 Setting and Executing Automatic Backup
Manage backup on user’s responsibility.
• When using backup, restore, and archive, connecting NAVIS-EX must be exited. Before
using, confirm that NAVIS-EX is exited. 1
• Only the image data added or updated after automatic backup is set and executed.
Therefore, before setting and executing automatic backup, be sure to synchronize the data
folder and backup folder.
• When a USB device is added, drive assignment is changed and backup or restoration may
not be performed correctly. Check the location for storage or restoration before performing
the operation.
• Even if backup is set to be performed, if the power is not turned on or if the backup location
cannot be found, backup is not performed.
• Backup capacity is set based on the available free space.
• Backup, restore, and archive are the dedicated functions of the server.
• Separate backup is required for movies captured by the F-10.
• Create a folder in the backup location and backup the data in the folder.
• Even if the automatic backup is enabled, it may fail in case the computer is forcibly shut
down. In such a case, execute the backup using the backup tool.
1 Connect an external hard disk drive to the server computer.
2 Start the server computer and double-click the Server Manager icon on the desktop.
3 The Login dialog box appears.
4 Enter Login Name and Password and click the Login button.
5 The Maintenance dialog box appears.
17
6 Select the checked ID in the Data Folder List.
7 Click the Change button in the Data Folder Backup field.
8 The Backup target setting dialog box appears.
9 Set the Folder Path and Capacity Limitation.
CAUTION • The backup location cannot be set to the same drive of the Folder Path.
• When a file is existed in the backup location, a confirmation dialog box is

displayed for the several times.
• For the Capacity Limitation, high limit setting of the data space to be used is
necessary.
When setting the Capacity Limitation, the capacity can be selected from among %,
TB, GB, and MB.
10 Click the OK button.

11 The Maintenance screen is displayed.
12 Check Automatic Backup in the Data Folder Backup.
13 Click the Close button.
14 A message prompting synchronization of the data folder and backup folder is displayed.
Press the Yes button.
• If the data folder and backup folder synchronization processing has already been
executed, press the No button.
• Even if synchronization processing is not executed, automatic backup is processed.
However, it is not guaranteed that all the data before starting automatic backup will be
backed up.
18
15 Synchronization processing is executed.
16 When synchronization is finished, the “The

backup processing succeeded.” message is dis-
played. Press the OK button.
• When the capacity of the specified folder exceeds

the limitation of the % value, a warning message
is displayed when backing up. However, when a
warning message is displayed, backup
processing is continued. o
• If the error message is displayed even the
sufficient free space exists, set the Capacity
Limitation again.
• When no backup folder is found, a warning message is displayed.
In this case, check the connection and settings of the backup destination. In addition, perform
backup using the backup tool because some image data may not have been backed up.
If no backup folder is found after the server computer starts up, the confirmation of backup con-
nection stops displaying the warning message. (Automatic backup is enabled.)
If no backup folder is found after the server computer starts up, the warning message is displayed
until the computer is rebooted. (Automatic backup is disabled.)
When the confirmation dialog box is displayed

When Automatic Backup is not checked, the following confirmation dialog box is displayed.
When not setting the automatic backup, select the Yes button.
When setting the automatic backup, select the No button and set again.
19
1.6.1 Archive
1 Double-click the Server Manager icon on the desktop of the server computer.
2 Log in to display the Maintenance dialog box.
3 Click the Archive button.
4 Backup starts and the Data path setting dialog box appears.
5 Set the location to be saved in the folder path and click the OK button.
6 The Share folder setting dialog box appears.
7 Enter Share Name and click the OK button.
CAUTION • The same name cannot be entered for the shared folder name.
When the same name shared folder is existed, change the name.
8 The Backup target setting dialog box appears.
9 Set the folder specified in Step 5 as the backup location and click the OK button.
20
CAUTION • When the archive location and backup

location are the same drive, an error as
shown to the right is displayed.
Click the OK button.
1
10 Check that a folder is added to the data folder list on the Maintenance screen.
CAUTION • The newly added data folder path cannot be reset.
1.6.2 Manual backup
• When the automatic backup is set, a message prompting the synchronization processing of
the data folder and backup folder is displayed when the backup tool is finished. Perform
synchronization processing as necessary.
1 Exit NAVIS-EX and start the Backup tool with the server computer.
Select [Start] - [All Programs] - [NIDEK] - [NAVIS-EX] - [Backup tool].
2 Click the DB Backup tab.
21
3 Set the DataBase Backup destination folder and click the Execute button.
4 When the backup is completed, the Success dialog box appears.
6 Click the Data Backup tab.
7 Set the Data Folder Backup destination folder and click the Execute button.
Check “Auto Shutdown after Data Backup” to automatically shutdown the computer when
backup is complete.
8 Backup is executed and when the backup is successful, the Success dialog box
appears.
　　　　
When the backup is completed, “Success” dialog

box is displayed. Press the OK button to close the
dialog box.
When “Auto Shutdown after Data Backup” is

checked, the Auto ShutDown dialog box is dis-
played.
After 60 seconds countdown, the computer shuts
down.
22
CAUTION • Clicking the Termination button during backup displays the confirmation dialog
box. Clicking the Yes button terminates backup and the backup data cannot be
used.
Perform backup again. Restoration cannot be performed until data is completely
backed up.
1
If restoration is performed with incomplete backup data, the NAVIS-EX data cannot
be used.
1.6.3 Restoration
• When the automatic backup is set, a message prompting synchronization of the data folder
and backup folder may be displayed. Perform synchronization processing as necessary.
• When restoring the data, a license key may be requested again. Be sure not to lost the
license key.
* When the license key is lost, it is necessary to buy again.
• Do not put another file into the license key.
The file may be deleted.
• When connecting the license key, connect it with the key unlocked.
• For details of the license key, refer to the Installation Manual.
• When restoring the same version data, data update is not necessary.
• NAVIS-EX data backed up by a later version cannot be used for restoration.
• The database in the restoration destination is backed up on the desktop.
1 Exit NAVIS-EX and start the Backup tool with the server computer.
Select [Start] - [All Programs] - [NIDEK] - [NAVIS-EX] - [Backup tool].
2 Update the data.

See "1.6.4 Update" (page 26) for details.
3 Click the DB Restore tab.
23
4 Set the DataBase Restore source folder and click the Execute button.
5 When restoration is completed, the Success dialog box appears.
7 Click the Data Restore tab.
8 Set the DataBase Restore destination folder and click the Execute button.
9 A confirmation dialog box whether or not to delete the data in the restoration location is
displayed.
10 Click the Yes button to perform restoration and when the restoration is completed, the
Success dialog box appears.
CAUTION • When the working environment is changed according to the computer replacement
or such, changes such as DB reading location is necessary.
In this case, perform the following procedure.
24
1) Start the Server computer and double-click the Server Manager tool on the desktop.
2) The Login dialog box appears.
3) Enter Login name and Password and click the Login
button.
4) The Maintenance dialog box appears.
When the shared folder name and the folder path is different, 1
it is displayed in the data folder list in red.
5) Select the checked ID in the Data Folder List.

6) Click the Change button in the Data Folder information.
7) The Data path setting dialog box appears.
25
8) Reset the folder path and click the OK button.
9) The Data Folder List in the Maintenance dialog box is changed to the new value.
10) Click the License button to change the License.
• When the computer is replaced, the license is registered for the previous computer.
Change the license to the new computer (See the Installation Manual).
11) Set the data folder backup location to the new saving location.
12) Click the Close button.
When the folder not existed in the backup is set, a confirmation dialog box appears.
13) Start NAVIS-EX and confirm that the data is restored.
1.6.4 Update
Update the database of the NAVIS-EX previous version to the latest format before restoring data from
the previous version.
1 Exit NAVIS-EX and start the Backup Tool with the server computer.
Select [Start] - [All programs] - [NIDEK] - [NAVIS-EX] - [Backup Tool].
26
2 Click the Data Update tab.
3 Set Data Folder Destination Path and click the Execute button.
The specified data is updated to the latest format.
4 When the update is completed, the Success dialog box appears.
1.6.5 Required initial settings

Before first use of NAVIS-EX, perform the required settings.
Common settings
Either English or Japanese is available for NAVIS-EX.

When connecting the multiple computers, set the OS and NAVIS-EX to the same
Language
language.
For details, see "1.20.3 Language tab" (page 95).
Note for use language Set the Windows Control Panel “Regional and Language Options”.
For the setting of the Windows date display format, set by referring “ Note for
Note for date display
date format (page 3)”.
Screen Saver Turn off the screen saver in the Screen setting of the Windows Control Panel.
Set the Windows Control Panel “Display Properties”, set the Color Quality to
Display setting
“Highest (32 bit)” in the Settings tab.
Power setting Set the Windows Control Panel “Power Options”, set Standby to None.
Set the Windows Control Panel “Security Center“, remove the settings for
Firewall.
Security
To use NAVIS-EX with Windows Firewall enabled, set the firewall to allow
communication of the NAVIS-EX program.
Automatic backup Set whether to perform automatic backup of NAVIS-EX.

Data save location Set the destinations to save or export the NAVIS-EX images and Video images.
Enhanced security Set whether to encrypt data for protection of personal information (anonymization)
mode or such.
27
• Perform various settings according to the status of use.

• For details, see the Installation Manual.
Settings when the AFC-230/210 is connected

When connecting to the AFC-230/210, afcCapture is necessary.
For the afcCapture, the following setting is necessary.
Setting of the data

Set the data saving location and exporting location.
saving location
Set the data saving format to Jpeg + XML format.
Data format
Distance conversion can be performed only when in Jpeg + XML format.
• Operate afcCapture in the environment that satisfy the system requirements.
Settings when the AFC-330 is connected

When connecting to the AFC-330, external device parameters must be set with the AFC-
330.
Set the parameter to “LAN”.

Transfer to
Set the “Auto transfer” parameter (ON/OFF) as necessary.
Connect LAN to
Press the EX button to set the IP address and Port No.
(NAVIS. File)
• For the AFC-330 settings, refer to the AFC-330 operator’s manual.
Settings when the F-10 is connected

When connecting to the F-10, F-10 Capture and NAVIS-EX Video Driver are necessary.
After installing the NAVIS-EX Video Driver, the driver update is necessary.
For the F-10 Capture, the following setting is necessary.
Setting of the data

Set the destinations to save or export Still images and Movie.
saving location
Data format Set the data saving format to Jpeg + XML format.
• Operate F-10 Capture and Video Driver in the environment that satisfy the system
requirements.
28
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Patient List Screen Description
1.7 Patient List Screen Description
The Patient List screen is the initial screen providing a menu for acquiring images by selecting patient,
image reference, registering/editing patient information, or system setting.
1
Menu bar Toolbar
Tree view Patient search form Patient list
29
1.7.1 Menu bar

The menu bar includes the File, Edit, View, Setup and Help menus.
Clicking a menu displays a pull-down menu.
Logout Logouts from NAVIS-EX and display the Login dialog box.
Exits NAVIS-EX.
Close The confirmation dialog to exit the application appears. Clicking the Yes button
exits NAVIS-EX.
Export *1 Outputs the selected image as the specified format.
Patient Import Imports the patient information and image data.
Patient Export Exports the patient information and image data of the specified patient.
Multiple Patient Import Imports the patient information and image data at the same time.
Multiple Patient Export Exports the patient information and image data at the same time.
File Exports the patient information list of all patients in the database as a CSV
file.
Patient list export
If specific patients have been searched, a list of the extracted patients is
exported.
Preview *1 Displays the preview of the image print result.
Print *1 Prints the image.
Queries EMR for patient information using case No.
A dialog for entering the ID is displayed. By entering the case No. and clicking the
Retrieve button, the specified patient information is queried to EMR.
EMR patient query
This option is displayed when “Query of patient information with case number” is
selected on the System Setting dialog box (EMR link tab) of Server Manager. For
details, refer to the NAVIS-EX installation manual.
New Displays the Patient information dialog box registering new patient.
Edit Displays the Patient information dialog box editing patient information.
Restore Restores the patient moved to Recycle Bin to Patient List.
Edit Delete Deletes the selected patient from the Patient List and Recycle Bin.
Selects or deselects all the images displayed as thumbnails by one
All/Deselect operation.
When performing all select, an image desired to be selected must be selected.
Screen Capture Saves the displaying image as Screen Capture.
Renewal Refreshes the patient information and the image data.
Displays the Patient Search form.
Search
Enabled when the Patient Search form is closed.
AFC Capture Displays the Image Capture screen.
(AFC-230/210) Displayed when the AFC Capture (AFC-230/210) is set for the license setting.
Displays the DVR screen performing the fundus capturing.
SLO Capture
Displayed when the SLO Capture is set for the license setting.
OCT Capture Starts the RS-3000 Capture screen performing fundus capturing.
(RS-3000) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000) is set for the license setting.
OCT Capture Starts the RS-3000 Advance Capture screen performing fundus capturing.
Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Advance) is set for the license
(RS-3000 Advance) setting.
OCT Capture Starts the RS-3000 Lite Capture screen performing fundus capturing.
View
(RS-3000 Lite) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Lite) is set for the license setting.
OCT Capture Starts the RS-330 Capture screen performing fundus capturing.
(RS-330) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-330) is set for the license setting.
Displays the Image Capture screen performing importing (When the device
Import
is not connected).
30
Displays the DCIM Import screen to import the saved digital still images to
DCIM Import
the DCIM folder.
Grab The Capture screen cannot be opened as the license is set for Viewing only.
Recycle Displays the Recycle Manager screen.
Performs Follow-Up compared to the Baseline image.
New Exam: Captures a Follow-Up image. 1
Follow-Up Follow-Up: Performs Follow-Up by comparing images with the Baseline image.
Follow-Up Exam: Displays the Follow-Up screen after the Follow-Up image
capture
ImageWizard *2 Starts the image wizard.
Worklist Displays the worklist screen performing DICOM communication.
Back Displays the previous screen.
Forward Displays the next screen.
Detail/Normal Displays/undisplays the detail information with the thumbnail.
View FullScreen *2 Displays the selected image with full screen.
Size Switches the image display size between large/middle/small.
Displays the Image Comment dialog box for the selected image to enter/edit
Comment
the comment to be attached to the image.
Switches the image between multiple display and single display.
Multi/Single Double-clicking the image or clicking the Forward button displayed the
image in the currently displayed status.
Setting Displays the Configuration dialog box for performing NAVIS-EX setting.
Displays the Setting dialog box for setting OCT image viewer.
RSViewer property
A menu displayed when the OCT image is displayed in Viewer screen.
Toggles display of the confirmation dialog box at the time of starting or
Setup
Administrator Setting exiting.
To not display the login screen, log in as user administrator.
Template Setting Displays the Template Setting screen for performing print template setting.
Customize Toolbar Displays the setting dialog box performing the toolbar button display setting.
Displays the version information of NAVIS-EX.
Help About
The menus with “*1” are executed with the Viewer screen in the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000
Lite/RS-330 image. (It cannot be executed in the Image List screen).
The menus with “*2” cannot be used when the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330
image is selected.
31
1.7.2 Toolbar
The toolbar includes shortcut buttons to which frequently-used functions are assigned.
Buttons to be displayed can be changed with the Customize Toolbar.
The functions that is not displayed can be executed from the menu. When an image is displayed,
some functions can be executed from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking.
Close Exits NAVIS-EX.
Setting Displays the Configuration dialog box.
Renewal Refreshes the patient information and the image data.
New Displays Patient information dialog box registering new patient.
Edit Displays Patient information dialog box editing patient information.
Restore Restores the patient moved to Recycle Bin to Patient List.
Delete Deletes the selected patient.
Search Displays the Patient Search form.
Displays the Image Capture screen performing the fundus capture.

AFC Capture This is displayed when the AFC Capture (AFC-230/210) is set in the license
(AFC-230/210) setting.
Displays the DVR screen performing the fundus capture.
Recorder This is displayed when the SLO movie is set in the license setting.
Starts the RS-3000 Capture screen performing the fundus capturing.
OCT Capture (RS-3000) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000) is set for the license setting.
Starts the RS-3000 Lite Capture screen performing the fundus capturing.
OCT Capture
(RS-3000 Lite) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Lite) is set for the license setting.
Starts the RS-3000 Advance Capture screen that performs the Fundus
capturing.
OCT Capture
(RS-3000 Advance) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Advance) is set for the license
setting.
Starts the RS-330 Capture screen performing the fundus capturing.
OCT Capture (RS-330) Displayed when the OCT Capture (RS-330) is set for the license setting.
Displays the acquiring screen performing the importing (Image Capture).
Import This is displayed when the Import is set in the license setting.
Displays the screen to import data from DCIM folder.
DCIM Import This is displayed when the DCIM Import is set in the license setting.
Grab This button is displayed when the license is not set for Viewing only.
Recycle Displays the Recycle Manager screen.
Performs Follow-Up compared to the Baseline image.

New Exam: Captures a Follow-Up image.
Follow-Up Follow-Up: Performs Follow-Up by comparing an image with the Baseline image.
Follow-Up Exam: Displays the Follow-Up screen after the Follow-Up image
capture
ImageWizard*2 Starts the image wizard.
Back Displays the previous image.
32
Forward Displays the next image.
Detail/ Normal Displays/undisplays the detail information with the thumbnail.
Displays the selected image with full screen.

FullScreen *2 "2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size" (page 154)
1
Size Switches the image display size between large/middle/small.
Selects or deselects all the images displayed as thumbnails by one

All/ Deselect operation.
Export*1 Exports the selected image as a file.
Displays the preview of the image print result.

Preview *1 "2.6.2 Print from preview screen" (page 182)
Print *1 Prints the image.
Displays the Image Comment dialog box to enter/edit the comment to be

Comment attached to the image.
"2.1.6 Comment of image" (page 156)
Single/ Multi Switches the image display between multiple display and single display.
Screen Capture Saves the displaying image as screen capture.
Worklist Displays the worklist that conducts DICOM communication.
Queries EMR for patient information using case No.

A dialog for entering the ID is displayed. By entering the case No. and clicking
the Retrieve button, the specified patient information is queried to EMR.
EMR patient query This option is displayed when “Query of patient information with case number””
is selected on the System Setting dialog box (EMR link tab) of Server Manager.
For details, refer to the NAVIS-EX installation manual.
The menu with “*1” mark is executed with the Viewer screen in the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/
RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 image. (It cannot be executed in the Image List screen).
The menu with “*2” cannot be used when the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-
330 image is selected.
Setting the Toolbar Button

Buttons to be displayed in the toolbar can be customized.
1) Select Setup and select Customize Toolbar.
The Customize dialog box appears.
2) Change the settings of the toolbar buttons.
33
Displays the hidden toolbar buttons.

a. Select the button to be added from the “Available toolbar buttons” field.
b. Select the position of the button to be added with the “Current toolbar buttons”
Add button field.
c. Click the “Add->” button.
d. The selected button moves from “Available toolbar buttons” field to “Current tool-
bar buttons” field.
Hides the displayed toolbar buttons.
a. Select the button to be deleted from the “Current toolbar buttons” field.
Delete button b. Click the “<-Remove” button.
c. The selected button moves from “Current toolbar buttons” field to “Available tool-
bar buttons” field.
Move the button display Selects the button to be moved in the “Current toolbar buttons” field.
position Click the Move Up button and Move Down button to move the button.
Display / non display of Sets display or non display of the button name displayed under the button icon.
Select “No text labels” or ”Show text labels” from the drop-down list of the “Text
the button name options”.
Select “Large icons” or “Small icons” from the drop-down list of the “Icon options”.
Icon size
When “Small icons” is selected, “Text options” becomes disabled.
When the Reset button is clicked, the display returns to the default display.
Reset display Be careful that resetting cannot be canceled. However, when the × button is clicked,
the input settings in the Customize dialog box are all canceled.
1.7.3 Tree view

The displayed data can be changed by the tree view in the left side of the screen. And the display can
be switched among “List”, “Draw”, “Process”, and “Measure” by tabs.
Display / non display button Changes the tree view display between close and open.
List tab
In tree view, the selected patient data is sorted by Display / non display button
item, date, and time. To change the sort option, press
the tree view display change button ( / ).
By clicking + and - at the left side of each item in the
tree view, each item can be extended and closed.
The list is displayed in the order of patient, date, item, and Follow-Up
Sort by Date group.
Image thumbnail is sorted by item and date.
34
The list is displayed in the order of patient, item, and Follow-Up group.
Sort by Item
Image thumbnail is sorted by item.
Sort by Time group.
Image thumbnail is sorted by acquisition order.
1
Expand Expands all the tree contents.
Collapse Collapses all the expanded tree contents into their header.
Draw tab
Displays the Drawing tool. For details of the Drawing function, see "5 DRAWING FUNC-
TION" (page 251).
Process tab
Displays the Image Processing tool. For details of the Image Processing function, see "6
IMAGE PROCESSING" (page 283).
Measure tab
Displays the Image Measurement tool. For details of the Image Measurement tool, see "7
IMAGE MEASUREMENT" (page 295).
• With the Draw, Process, or Measure tabs are selected, when the Back button in the
Toolbar is clicked to return to the Image List screen, the List tab (normal tree view) is
displayed.
1.7.4 Patient List

Displays the patient list of Patient List/Recycle Bin/Search Results selected from the tree view.
The display sequence of the item can be set by the Patient List tab in the setting dialog box.
For the setting method, see "1.20.4 Patient List tab" (page 96).
Expand display of the patient information

Clicking the Expand button displays the history and comment of the patient information.
35
Expand button
• Expand display of the patient information can be performed in the patient information
displayed screen.
• In the Patient list screen, the patient information field is displayed with the patient
undefined.
Sorting of the patient list

Clicking each item of Patient ID, Name, Age, Sex, Comment, History, and Race sorts the
order between ascending order and descending order alternately.
• When sorting by Race, the patient list is sorted in the order registered in the Server
Manager.
Change of the item field display width

The display size of each item is changed by dragging the border of item name.
36
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Patient List Screen Operation
1.8 Patient List Screen Operation
1.8.1 Registering new patients 1

• Patients can be registered by command line or file.
1 Click the New button in the toolbar on

the Patient List screen.
The Patient Information - New dialog box
appears.
2 Enter the required data of the patient.

Patient ID is a required input item. The duplicate patient IDs cannot be registered.
• Patient ID may be input as follows:
Alphanumeric characters and ! , ‘ , ( , ) , - , ~.
Maximum of 20 characters
Upper and Lower case defined
Retrieves and displays the saved patient information corresponding to the

Retrieve button input patient ID.
Enter patient ID to enable the Retrieve button.
When Patient ID input mode is “Date + Input”,

the date information is added to the head of
the patient ID in the Patient information dialog
box.
37
In addition, when “Optional + Date + ID num-

ber” or “Serial number” is selected, the auto-
matically set patient ID is displayed as patient
ID.
• Race default setting is possible in the Server Manager.
Input name
When inputting the Last name, Middle name,
and First name, a space can be used. When
inputting multiple names, the space can be
used as delimiter.
• The name with a space may not be displayed properly when the patient information is
exported to the external application software.
Check the specification of the application to be used.
Input date of birth

Clicking the drop down button of the date of birth column
displays a calender.
Direct input is possible in the entry field.
Input with the increase and decrease buttons

displayed on the right and left of the year column.
Year / :1 year step, / :10 years step
It can be input directly to the column.
Select from the drop down list displayed by clicking

the month column button.
Month
38
After inputting the year and the month, click the

date of the calender to input.
The blue marked date is a selected date.
Day
Clears the date of birth.

Clear button
It can be deleted the value in the date of birth column directly to clear.
Entering history
After entering, click the Add button to add the his-
tory entered in the History dialog box.
Select the history to be registered in the patient
information. Click the OK button to display the his-
tory in the History field of the Patient List.
When the Cancel button is clicked, the History dia-
log box closes without entering the history to the
patient information. However, changes performed
for the History dialog box become enabled.
Click to select the history to be specified from the history list.

Select
Multiple histories can be selected.
Enter a history in the text box and click the Add button.
Add
The entered history is added to the history list.
Select the history to be deleted from the history list and click the Delete button.
Delete
A confirmation message is displayed. Click the OK button to delete from the list.
Select the history whose name is changed from the history list. Change the name
displayed in the text box and click the Update button.
Update
The history displayed in the history list is overwrote.
When the multiple histories are selected, the Update button becomes disabled.
Select the history whose display order is changed. Change the position by clicking
Change of display
order the ▲ and ▼ buttons.
The history displayed in the history list is overwrote.
3 Select race.
Select from the drop-down menu.
• Race default setting is possible in the Server Manager.
4 Click the Save button to save the patient information.

Close the Patient information dialog box and return to the Patient List screen.
When the AFC Capture (AFC-230/210) button is clicked, the Image Capture screen is dis-
played and performs image capturing.
39
When the OCT Capture (RS-3000) button is clicked, the RS-3000 Capture screen is dis-
When the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Advance) button is clicked, the RS-3000 Advance Cap-
ture screen is displayed and image capture is executed.
When the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Lite) button is clicked, the RS-3000 Capture screen is dis-
When the OCT Capture (RS-330) button is clicked, the RS-330 Capture screen is displayed
and performs image capturing.
When the Import button is clicked, Import (Image Capture) screen is displayed and performs
image capturing.
When the DCIM Import button is clicked, DCIM Import screen is displayed and performs
image capturing.
CAUTION • When the F-10 is connected, before clicking the SLO Capture button , be sure to
click the Save button and close the “Patient Information - New” dialog box.
• Omission of input information can be prevented by specifying the item of patient

information required to be input.
Refer to "1.20.2 Common tab" (page 94) for the setting method.
1.8.2 Editing patient information

Edit the registered patient information (Name, Sex, Date of Birth, History, Race, and Comment).
• The patient data being referred to on the other computer cannot be edited and deleted.
Do not change the patient ID as it may cause an error to the data.

When prompting to change the patient ID, a
warning message appears.
1 Select the patient to be edited on the Patient

List screen.
40
2 Click the Edit button .

The Patient information dialog box appears.
When Patient ID input mode is “Date +

Input”, the date information is added to the
head of the patient ID in the Patient informa-
tion dialog box.
Refer to "1.20.2 Common tab" (page 94) for
the setting method.
3 Edit the patient information.

Edit in the same manner as with New registration.
4 Clicking the Save button saves the edited contents.
1.8.3 Deleting patients

Delete unnecessary patient from the patient list.
• The patient data being referred to on the other computer cannot be edited and deleted.
• In the Configuration dialog box, if “Delete images from the disc when they are deleted from
Recycle Manager or Recycle Bin.” is selected, the data is deleted from the disc and the disc
space may be freed up. If not checked, the data remains recognized as deleted data and
disk space may not be freed up.
1 Select the patient to be deleted on the Patient List screen.
41
2 Select [Edit] - [Delete] from the menu.


From the Patient List screen, the selected patient is deleted.
At this time, the deleted patient is only moved to the Recycle Bin and not completely deleted
from the system.
The patient moved to the Recycle Bin cannot be a target for patient search.
To delete the patient from the system completely, perform the following procedure.
4 Select the Recycle Bin from the tree to display the Recycle Bin screen.
The patient deleted from the patient list is displayed.
5 To delete from the system completely, select the

patient and select [Edit] - [Delete] from the menu.

The patient is deleted from the system. The patient data and the image data are deleted.
By performing this operation, the patient data cannot be restored.
Restoring from the Recycle Bin

The patient saved on the Recycle Bin screen can be moved to the Patient List screen.
1 Select the patient to be restored from the Recycle Bin screen.
2 Select [Edit] - [Restore] from the menu to move the selected patient from the Recycle Bin
to the Patient List.
1.8.4 Searching patients

When the number of patients saved in the Patient List becomes large, it is possible to search the
intended patient.
42
1 On the Patient List screen, when the Patient Search form is

not displayed, select [View] - [Search] from the menu.
The Patient Search form appears.
2 Input conditions to search the target patient.

Specify any items such as Patient ID, Name, Comment and 1
History. While entering conditions, real-time searching is per-
formed and the tree view moves to the Search Result screen to
display patients that meet the conditions in the list.
Specify any items of Race, Sex, Age, Registered Date, and
Examination Date.
Patient ID and Name are searched by prefix search.
Comment and History may be searched by including the relevant

search characters.
As the searching method uses the AND search, the more items
input, the narrower the search becomes.
The previous search conditions are displayed as search conditions.

When the Clear button is clicked, Patient ID, Name, Comment, History, and Race fields are
cleared and Sex, Age, Registration Date, and Examination Date becomes “Not Specified”.
• When the examination date is specified, patients including the examination date and the
examination time are displayed.
• When a space is used for the Name, enclose the information in quotations ( " ).
3 Clicking the Execute button performs searching.

Search results are displayed on the Search Results screen.
4 Select a patient on the Search Results screen and perform the desired operation.
When the patient selected on the Search Result screen is double-clicked, the Image List
screen appears.
• The Patient Search form can be displayed in any position by dragging. When the Patient
Search form in floating status is dragged under the tree view, the form is integrated.
However, the form cannot be integrated other than on the Patient List screen and Image
List screen.
43
1.8.5 When patient data being accessed by another computer is

selected
When patient data is selected that is being accessed by another computer, a warning dialog box
appears and data cannot be added or edited. The warning dialog box displays the computer name
and IP address of the computer that accesses patient data at the moment.
The title bars of all open NAVIS-EX software turn yellow if use is continued. The data cannot be added
or edited under such condition.
• Images can be added to the patient data but the F-10 movie cannot be added.
• When patient data is selected that is being accessed by another computer, the
communication function may not be used.
44
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (AFC-230/210)
1.9 Acquiring Images (AFC-230/210)
• When the image is acquired before starting [AFC Capture (AFC-230/210)], a confirmation
dialog box is displayed and the acquired images are moved to the CapMoveData folder.
1
• The image is registered in the saved order.
• When the Monitor Folder is not specified, the setting dialog box for setting the monitor
location is displayed.
For the setting procedures of Monitor Folder, see "1.9.4 Checking settings of afcCapture Monitor
Folder" (page 49).
• When the screen moves to the Patient List unexpectedly during operation, click the AFC
Capture (AFC-230/210) button again to display the Image Capture screen.
1.9.1 Image Capture screen
Image control bar
Display switching tool
45
Image control bar
Used to return to the previous screen.

Return When there is an unsaved image, the image is saved in the patient data.
Save Saves the selected images.
Save All Saves all images in the Image Capture screen.
To Recycle Moves the selected images to Recycle Manager.
Deletes the selected image.

Delete A confirmation message is displayed and clicking the OK button deletes the image.
Comment Displays the Image Comment dialog box and adds comments on the image.
Displays the Print Manager screen.

Preview For details of the Print Manager screen, see "2.6 Printing Image Data" (page 181).
Print Executes printing.
Setting Displays the setting dialog box for setting the Monitor Folder of the afcCapture.
Display switching tool
[View] button Switches image display between Single display and List display.
In Single display mode, displays thumbnail button on the lower part of the
[Select] button
screen.
[Detail] button In List display mode, displays the detail information on the image.
[All] button In List display mode, selects all images.
[Deselect] button In List display mode, clears selection of all images.
In List display mode, displays the image with full-screen.
[Full SCR] button For the operation with full-screen, see "2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size"
(page 154).
First image Displays first image when acquiring multiple images.
Last image Displays last image when acquiring multiple images.
Previous image Displays previous image when acquiring multiple images.
Next image Displays next image when acquiring multiple images.
Magnifies the image.

Zoom in Clicking the left mouse button magnifies the image and clicking the right mouse
button reduces the image.
Reduces the image.

Zoom out Clicking the left mouse button reduces the image and clicking the right mouse
button magnifies the image.
Magnification drop-down
Selects display magnification from the drop-down list.
list
46
1.9.2 Acquiring with patient selected

Capturing by AFC-230/210 after selecting a patient with NAVIS-EX acquires the image automatically.
1 Select patient on the Patient List screen.

When the patient is new, register the patient.
For the new patient registering procedure, see "1.8.1 Registering new patients" (page 37). 1
2 Click the AFC Capture (AFC-230/210) but-
ton to display the Image Capture
screen.
3 Capture with the AFC-230/210.

After capturing, the image is displayed in
the data area of the Image Capture screen.
4 After capturing is finished, click the Save All
button to save the image.
In addition, the following operations can be

performed.
Save Saves the displayed or selected image.
To Recycle Moves the displayed image to Recycle Manager.

Deletes the displayed image.
Delete A confirmation message is displayed and clicking the OK button deletes the
image.
Displays the Image Comment dialog box and adds comments on the
Comment image.
Preview This button is enabled when the printer is set.
Executes printing.
Print This button is enabled when the printer is set.
5 Click the Return button to return to the previous screen.

When the unsaved image is in the Image Capture screen, the image is saved in the patient
data.
47
1.9.3 Acquiring images in communication mode

With the image acquiring, export the image data and save in the specified folder.
In the Link tab of the setting dialog box, “Link up with he external system” must be enabled.
For the setting method, see "1.20.12 Link tab" (page 107).

Click the Patient List to display in orange.
For the new patient, perform patient registration.
2 Click the AFC Capture button to display

Image Capture screen.
3 Capture with the AFC-230/210.

When capturing is performed, the image is
displayed on the data area of the Image
Capture screen.
4 After capturing is finished, click the Save button to save and export the displayed
image to Patient Data.
With the data saving, image data exportation according to the communication setting is per-
formed.
Click the Save All button to save and export all image data in the Image Capture screen.
5 After capturing is finished, click the Return button to return to the previous screen.
When there is an unsaved image on the Image Capture screen, exportation of the image
data and saving to the Patient data are performed at the same time according to the commu-
nication setting.
6 After confirming that the patient is selected, click the Forward button to display the
Image List screen.
48
Confirm that the captured image is displayed.

For the thumbnail image exported in communi-
cation mode, the Exported icon is displayed.
Exported icon
• When there is an unnecessary image, record the captured date displayed on the thumbnail
image.
The exported image cannot be deleted from NAVIS-EX. Delete the image from the destination
folder to be saved in reference to the file name named according to the captured date.
• The communication function can be selected from the menu displayed by right-clicking the
selected image on the Image List screen.
The saved image is output as a file using the communication function.
1.9.4 Checking settings of afcCapture Monitor Folder

Set the Monitor Folder of the afcCapture (AFC-230/210 image output software) with the setting dialog
box displayed by clicking Setting in the Setting menu.
• When the image is acquired before starting [AFC Capture (AFC-230/210)], a confirmation
dialog box is displayed and the acquired images are moved to [CapMoveData] folder.
location is displayed automatically after moving to AFC Capture (AFC-230/210).
• When the Cancel button is pressed without specifying the Monitor Folder, Image Capture is
exited.
49
Specify the afcCapture folder as the Monitor Folder with the Choose Folder dialog box dis-
played by clicking the Folder Reference button.
The default save location is “C:\afcCapture”.
If the afcCapture folder does not exist on the C drive, the folder must be created manually.
The afcCapture folder is the default saving location of the afcCapture. When the saving location is
changed, specify the changed saving location.
If the folder is not set properly, the image cannot be acquired normally.
50
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (AFC-330)
1.10 Acquiring Images (AFC-330)
When the image is captured with the AFC-330, the image automatically acquired to NAVIS-EX.
• The AFC-330 can be used without setting the NAVIS-EX license. 1

However, the number of computers connected simultaneously is counted. Confirm that the proper
number of licenses is provided before use.
The AFC-330 images can be acquired for all license settings (SLO movie, OCT capture (RS-
3000), OCT capture (RS-3000 Advance), OCT capture (RS-3000 Lite), OCT capture (RS-330),
AFC capture (AFC-230/210), Import, DCIM Import).
• The images are registered in the order of transferred from the AFC-330.
1 When the image is captured with NAVIS-EX is started, the image is acquired to NAVIS-
EX automatically.
When any patient is selected with NAVIS-EX, the image can be acquired with any screen is
displayed.
The patient ID must be specified before capturing with the AFC-330. New patient can be
registered with the AFC-330 while the registered patient information cannot be edited.
• The patient list registered in NAVIS-EX is displayed in the AFC-330 Patient Selection
screen.
• For details of AFC-330 new patient registration, refer to the AFC-330 operator’s manual.
2 When checking the acquired image, select the patient in the Patient List screen to dis-
play the Image List screen.
When the Image List screen of the patient to be captured is displayed, the NAVIS-EX screen
is not updated even when captured with the AFC-330. Click the Update button to renew the
screen.
51
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (F-10)
1.11 Acquiring Images (F-10)
• When the image is acquired before starting [Recorder], a confirmation dialog box is
displayed and the acquired images are moved to the [CapMoveData] folder.
• To acquire the F-10 images and recording, the separately sold NAVIS-EX Video Driver is
necessary.
• When the Monitor Folder is not specified, the setting dialog box is displayed.
For the setting procedures of Monitor Folder, see "1.11.4 DVR screen settings" (page 61).
• Only one F-10 can be connected in the network.
• When capturing with the F-10, start capturing after confirming that [Recorder] is started.
If the starting procedure is wrong, the image may not be acquired properly.
• When movie is stopped, an unexpected error may occur and the DVR screen may be
close.
In this case, start the DVR screen again.
• During recording of the still image or video image, do not return to the Patient List screen.
The image and video image may not be acquired properly.
• When moving among screens, be sure to move by using the buttons in the NAVIS-EX.
Moving by the task bar or other Windows operation may result in unstable operation.
52
1.11.1 Explanation of DVR screen

The DVR screen performs image acquisition, Movie recording, Movie playback and editing. A Normal
display and Magnify display are available on the DVR screen.
<Normal display> 1
7) Image information 8) Date selection box
1) Image display
2) Magnify display/ 9) Still image display

Normal display button
3) Status display
4) Play position bar
5) Clip control area
6) Record/playback
controls 10) Movie display
14) Live button
11) Return button 13) Set button

12) Image List button
53
<Magnified display>
1)Image display 5)Clip control area
2)Magnify display/ 6)Record/playback

Normal display button controls
3)Status display part
4)Playback position bar
7)Image information
13)Setting button 14)Live button
1) Image display
Displays Live, Movie, and Still images.
2) Magnify display /Normal display button

Switches between normal display and magnified display.
When in normal display Switches the live image to magnified display.
When in magnified
Switches the live image to normal display.
display
3) Status display
Displays recording/playback status as well as Still image or Movie status.
Live image
Record
Playback
Still image
4) Playback position bar

Displays the playback position of the Movie. Clicking the playback position bar moves the playback position
to the clicked position. When clips have been created, the clips are displayed in light blue.
Without clip
With clip
When a clip is selected
54
5) Clip control area

Perform clip creation, deletion, and editing. A maximum of nine clips can be created.
When selecting the original

Thumbnail 1
Clip selection Clip creation Clip cut
Clip selection In point
In point time display
When selecting/editing clips
Title Out point display

Clip deletion Out point Set
Changes the thumbnail image of the Movie being selected.

Thumbnail button Clicking the Thumbnail button with the Movie paused changes the thumbnail
image.
Selects Clip or Original.
Clip selection button
Selected from a drop-down menu.
Clip creation button Starts clip creation.
Clip cut button Cuts out the created clip from the Movie.
Changes the title of the selected clip.
Clicking the Title button displays the Clip Title Selection dialog box. When a title
Title button
is selected from the drop-down list, the title displayed in thumbnail changes
accordingly.
Clip delete button Deletes the selected clip.
In point time of the selected clip is displayed. Clicking the button moves the
In point time display button
playback point to that time.
In point button Sets the current playback point to the In point position.
The Out point time of the selected clip is displayed. When clicking the
Out point display button
button, the playback position moves to that time.
Out point button Sets the current playback point to Out point.
Set button Completes the clip creation.
• The definition of a clip is from the starting point (In point) and ending point (Out point) of the
necessary section extracted from the recorded Movie data. A clip is created by cutting out
the selected section from the Movie data. Clip operation is to create a clip and to cut out
Movie using the created clip.
55
6) Record/playback controls
Records or plays back the Movie.
<Normal display>
Record Stop Playback Track forward/backward
High-speed playback
Scene forward/backward
Pause
Time backward (-) Frame forward/backward Time forward (+)
<Magnified display>
Record Stop Play Track forward/backward
Record button Starts recording. During recording, live image is displayed.

Stop button Stops recording or playing back. When stopped, live image is displayed.
Playback button Plays back Movie.
Track forward/backward button When multiple Movies are recorded, changes track (Movie).
High-speed playback button Plays back forward or reverse in high-speed.
Moves the playback position forward or backward one scene. The scene
forward/backward button is enabled only when paused.
Scene forward/backward button
Scene backward can be used only when the file format of Movie is set to DV-
AVI.
Pause button Pauses playing back.
Moves the playback position forward or backward one frame. The frame
Frame forward/backward button
Moves the playback position forward or backward in time intervals. The
Time forward/backward button
specificable times are 1 second, 5 seconds, and 30 seconds.
7) Image information
Displays the selected patient and Movie information.
56
Patient ID Patient ID is displayed.

Name The entered name is displayed in the patient ID.
Sex The entered sex is displayed in the patient ID.
Birthday The entered date of birth is displayed in the patient ID.
Object Fixed as Movie. 1
Eye Settable by entering the examination information.
Settable by entering the examination information.
Comment * The contents entered in Movie is displayed only on the DVR screen.
* The contents entered in other screen is not reflected.
Remarks Only when a still image is selected, the capture information is displayed.
Displays the Exam Info dialog box entering the examination information.
Exam Info button
8) Date selection box

Select the date of the displaying data on the DVR screen from the drop-down list.
When the screen is switched, the date of today is displayed.
9) Still image display

Thumbnail and time of the acquired Still image are displayed.
Right-clicking the thumbnail displays the property of the selected image.
Cursor
Scroll bar
Cursor Displays the thumbnail of the image in the Image display.

Scroll bar Scrolls the Still image display.
57
Types of the still images are displayed under the thumbnails. For Timer Capture images, elapsed time is also
displayed.
IR Capture using IR laser beam in manual image capture mode

R Capture using Red laser beam in manual image capture mode
On the Image List screen,
G Capture using Green laser beam in manual image capture mode
classified as IR.
B Capture using Blue laser beam in manual image capture mode
(No indication) Laser beam is shutoff in manual image capture mode
FA FA mode (fluorescence in angiography in FA mode)
classified as FA.
FAF FAF mode (fundus autofluorescence in FAF mode)
classified as AF.
IA IA mode (indocyanine green angiography)
classified as IA.
• To classify FAF to AF, the software version must be correspond to the F-10 Capture.
• When the software version of the F-10 Capture is old, AF is classified as FA.
10) Movie display

Thumbnail and recording time of the recorded Movie is displayed. When cutting out the clip, the thumbnail
background is displayed in blue.
Right-clicking the thumbnail displays the property of the selected Movie.
All Select All Cancel Export Delete
Cursor
Select
Scroll bar
Cursor Indicates the thumbnail of the Movie in the image display.

Select The background of selected thumbnail is displayed in light gray.
All Select button Selects all thumbnails.
All Cancel button Cancels all selections of thumbnails.
Export button Exports selected Movie.
Delete button Deletes selected Movie.
Scroll bar Scrolls the thumbnail display.
11) Return button

Exits the DVR screen and switches to the Image List screen.
58
12) Image List button

Switches to the Image List screen with the DVR screen running.
13) Setting button

Displays the setting dialog box.
14) Live button 1

Displays the live image in the Image display.
1.11.2 Acquiring with patient selected

Capturing by the F-10 after selecting a patient with NAVIS-EX acquires the image automatically.
When recording a movie, perform recording with the button operation on the DVR screen.

Click the Patient List to display in gray.
When the patient is new, register the patient.
For the new patient registering procedure, see "1.8.1 Registering new patients" (page 37).
2 Click the Recorder button to display the

DVR screen.
3 Capture with the F-10.

After capturing, the image is displayed in
the Still image display data area of the DVR
screen.
4 Click the Record button to record the Movie with the Live image is displayed.
When a image is displayed in the Movie display, click the Live button.
To stop recording, click the Stop button.
• The maximum recording time of the Movie is one minute.
59
5 Click the Return button to return to the Patient List screen.

When checking the captured image, click the Image List button to display the Image List
screen.
When capturing the other patient, click the Return button to display the Patient List screen.
Change the patient in the Patient List screen.
1.11.3 Entering comments

Comments can be entered into Movie.
1 Display or select the Movie in which comments are entered.
2 Click the Exam Info button.

Exam Info dialog box is displayed.
3 Enter directory into the entry field below.

Select the comment to be entered from the Com-
ment field as necessary.
Object is fixed as Video.

The Exam Info dialog box closes and the comment is added to the Image information.
• The comments entered in the Exam Info dialog box is available for Movie only.
When entering patient’s eye or comments into Still images, enter them on the Image List screen.
• The contents entered with the Movie is only displayed on the DVR screen.
• The comments for the Movie can be entered only before recording.
60
1.11.4 DVR screen settings

Perform various settings of the DVR screen in the setting dialog box displayed by clicking the Setting
button.
Movie tab 1
Sets Movie file format and saving location.
Select the file format of the Movie from DV-AVI and MPEG-2.
Select MPEG-2.
When selecting “MPEG-2”, the Detail button becomes enabled and perform
image quality and bit rate setting in the Detail Setting (MPEG-2) dialog box.
Movie Format
Max Rec Time (Min) The maximum recording time is fixed as 1 minute and cannot be changed.
Specifies the Movie saving directory.
Click the “...” button to display folder reference dialog box and specify the saving
Movie Directory
directory.
Select an external HDD.
• When MPEG-2 is selected, in addition to NAVIS-EX, the DIGITAL HANDS “MPEG-2

decoder DirectShow filter” can be used for Movie playback.
To use other DVD Player software (PowerDVD/CyberLink, WinDVD/InterMovie, etc.),
check on an individual basis as to operability.
• When the movie saving location and the monitor folder are not specified, the DVR screen is
automatically displayed after entering [SLO Movie].
• When the setting dialog box is closed without setting the movie saving location and the
monitor folder, the DVR screen is closed.
61
Still tab
Sets the monitor folder.
Sets the Monitor Folder of the F-10 Capture (Image output software).
Folder Monitor Setting Clicking the [...] button displays the Folder Reference dialog box and
specify the Monitor Folder.
Export tab
Sets the exporting location of Movie.
Specifies the Movie saving directory.

Click the “...” button to display folder reference dialog box and specify the
Movie Directory saving directory.
If no saving directory is specified, the Movie is saved in the My Documents
folder.
62
Clip Title tab

Sets the title name in the Clip Title selection window displayed when editing Movie.
Delete button Deletes the selected title from the list.
Adds new title to the list.

Add button
Enter title in the input box and click the Add button to add to the list.
Clip Cut tab

Selects whether to save or delete the original Movie when cutting out Movie with a clip.
Play tab
Selects the contents to be displayed in the playback counter when playing back the Movie
from between Playback time (Play Time) and Recording time (Rec Time).
63
Message tab
Sets the message display method
when the movie file cannot be recog-
nized.
The movie file dose not exit
The delete confirmation Checking this box causes the delete confirmation message not to be
message is not displayed. displayed when no corresponding movie file exists in the image list.
In addition, the Automatically deleted/Leave radio buttons set whether
or not to delete the thumbnail image.
The movie file is not found
Checking this box causes the saving location confirmation message not
The message to confirm
to be displayed when no corresponding movie file exists in the image
the destination for saving
list.
movie file is not displayed.
The list and movie file in the saving location are not deleted.
64
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (RS-3000)
1.12 Acquiring Images (RS-3000)
• The images are registered in the saved order.
1
For acquiring the RS-3000 images, use an optional dedicated software RS-3000 Capture started by
clicking the OCT Capture (RS-3000) button .
RS-3000 Capture screen
For operation of the RS-3000 Capture, see the RS-3000 operator’s manual.
When acquiring the images, NAVIS-EX only performs specification of the patient.
65
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Lite)
1.13 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Lite)
For acquiring the RS-3000 Lite images, use an optional dedicated software RS-3000 Lite Capture
started by clicking the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Lite) button .
RS-3000 Lite Capture screen
For operation of the RS-3000 Lite Capture, refer to the RS-3000 Lite operator’s manual.
66
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Advance)
1.14 Acquiring Images (RS-3000 Advance)
1
For acquiring the RS-3000 Advance images, use an optional dedicated software RS-3000 Advance
Capture started by clicking the OCT Capture (RS-3000 Advance) button .
RS-3000 Advance Capture screen
For operation of the RS-3000 Advance Capture, refer to the RS-3000 Advance operator’s
manual.
67
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (RS-330)
1.15 Acquiring Images (RS-330)
For acquiring the RS-330 images, use an optional dedicated software RS-330 Capture started by
clicking the OCT Capture (RS-330) button .
RS-330 Capture screen
For operation of the RS-330 Capture, refer to the RS-330 operator’s manual.
68
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (Import)
1.16 Acquiring Images (Import)
Acquires the external image data to NAVIS-EX. Acquisition of the image can be performed only when
the license setting is Import.
1
location is displayed.
For the setting procedures of Monitor Folder, see "1.16.3 Checking settings of Importing Monitor
Folder" (page 73).
• When images are acquired before starting the import function, the acquired images move
to the specified folder of the confirmation dialog box.
• When an image file with the same name is acquired for the same patient, the file is
overwritten.
1.16.1 Image Capture screen

Image control bar
Image information setting

field
Display switching tool

Used to return to the previous screen.
Return When there is an unsaved image, the image is saved in the patient data. When the
patient is deselected, saved in the Recycle Manager.
69
To Recycle Moves the selected image to Recycle Manager.

Delete A confirmation message is displayed and clicking the OK button deletes the image.
Comment Displays the Image Comment dialog box and adds comments on the image.

Preview For details of the Print Manager screen, see "2.6 Printing Image Data" (page 181).
Setting Displays the setting dialog box for setting the Monitor Folder of the afcCapture.
Display switching tool
[View] button Switches image display between Single display and List display.
In Single display mode, displays thumbnail button on the lower part of the
[Select] button
screen.
[Detail] button In List display mode, displays the detail information on the image.
[All] button In List display mode, selects all images.
[Deselect] button In List display mode, clears selection of all images.
In List display mode, displays the image with full-screen.

[Full SCR] button For the operation with full-screen, see "2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size"
(page 154).
First image Displays first image when acquiring multiple images.
Last image Displays last image when acquiring multiple images.
Previous image Displays previous image when acquiring multiple images.
Next image Displays next image when acquiring multiple images.
Magnifies the image.

Zoom in Clicking the left mouse button magnifies the image and clicking the right mouse
button reduces the image.
Reduces the image.

Zoom out Clicking the left mouse button reduces the image and clicking the right mouse
button magnifies the image.
Magnification drop-down
Selects display magnification from the drop-down list.
list
70
1.16.2 Importing images

After selecting the patient with NAVIS-EX, save the image in the Importing Monitor Folder to import the
image data.
When the patient is new, register the patient. 1
For the new patient registering procedure, see "1.8.1 Registering new patients" (page 37).
2 Click the Import button to display the

Image Capture screen.
3 Enter the image information in the image information setting

field.
Date
Select the date from the calender displayed by clicking the ▼ button.
Eye
Click the right eye or left eye button to select the patient eye. Right or
left eye is not set for default setting. When the data is imported with-
out specifying the eye, the image is acquired as “Not specified”.
Object
Select the types of the image data by clicking the list.
ScreenShot Data that the displayed image is captured

Report Report data
Image captured by the AFC-330/230/210, fundus image of the RS-
Fundus (Color) 330, fundus (color) or anterior segment image imported with DCIM
Import.
Fundus (FAF) Fundus image captured by the RS-330 FAF mode
Fundus (RedFree) Fundus image (redfree) of DCIM Import
Anterior segment image captured by the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-
Anterior OCT
3000 Advance/RS-330
Fundus image captured by the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000
Fundus OCT
Advance/RS-330
Fundus image captured with OCT-Angiography by the RS-3000
Fundus OCT A
Advance
Otoscope Otoscope image of DCIM Import
Dermatoscope Dermatoscope image of DCIM Import
Speculum Digital speculum image of DCIM Import
Endoscope Endoscope image of DCIM Import
VisualField Perimeter chart
71
GS Report Image of GS-1 report

Slitlamp Image captured with the slitlamp
IR Image captured with the F-10 manual capturing mode
FA Image captured with the F-10 FA mode (FAG)
IA Image captured with the F-10 IA mode (ICG)
AF Image captured with the F-10 FAF mode (fundus autofluorescence)
• Check the information of the image to be imported and set properly. After the image is
imported, the image information cannot be changed.
4 Save (or move) the image file to be imported to the Monitor Folder.
Save (or move) by operating the file on the Windows.
For the image jpeg file and XML file is in pair, save the files together.
• When the original data folder and Monitor Folder is in the same drive, if the file is moved by
dragging, the file is acquired to NAVIS-EX and deleted from the original data folder. To save
the original data, copy and paste the file to save in the Monitor Folder.
5 After import is finished, click the Save All button to save the image.
In addition, the following operations can be performed.
Save Saves the selected image.
To Recycle Moves the selected image to Recycle Manager.

Delete A confirmation message is displayed and clicking the OK button deletes the
image.
Displays the Image Comment dialog box and adds comments on the
Comment image.
Preview This button is enabled when the printer is set.
Executes printing.
Print This button is enabled when the printer is set.
6 Click the Return button to return to the previous screen.

When there is an unsaved image in the Image Capture screen, the image is saved in the
patient data.
• With the image acquiring in communication mode, export the image data and save in the
specified folder.
However, when the image type is ScreenShot, Report, Slitlamp, or Perimeter,
communication mode is disabled.
In the Link tab of the setting dialog box, “Link up with the external system” must be enabled.
For the setting method, see "1.20.12 Link tab" (page 107) on "1.20 Patient List Screen Settings"
(page 93).
72
1.16.3 Checking settings of Importing Monitor Folder

Set the Importing Monitor Folder with the setting dialog box displayed by clicking the Setting in the
Setting menu.
• When the Monitor Folder is not specified, the setting dialog box is automatically displayed 1
after moving to the Import.
• When the Cancel button is pressed without specifying the Monitor Folder, Image Capture is
exited.
Specify the Importing Monitor Folder with the Choose Folder dialog box displayed by clicking
the Folder Reference button.
For the default settings of the import, the saving location is set to “C:\NAVIS-EX\Import”.
If the importing folder does not exist in the installation location of the NAVIS-EX, the folder must be
created.
If the folder is not set properly, the image cannot be acquired normally.
73
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Acquiring Images (DCIM Import: DS-10 / DS-20)
1.17 Acquiring Images (DCIM Import: DS-10 / DS-20)
Acquires the data from DCIM (Digital Camera Images) compatible devices such as the DS-10 series
or DS-20. The image data saved in the DCIM folder is exported to NAVIS-EX. Acquisition of these
images can be performed only when the license setting is “DCIM Import”.
• When viewing the Otoscope, Dermatoscope, Speculum, or Endoscope examination data

captured by the DS-10, be aware that improper expression is displayed in a part.
1.17.1 DCIM Import screen
Patient list screen

Link the data (patient No.) saved in the DCIM folder and Patient ID in NAVIS-EX, then specify the des-
tination to save the acquired data. For a new patient, the patient data needs to be registered in
advance.
Image control bar Search box
DCIM folder tree view

NAVIS-EX Patient List
74
Image control bar
Returns to the Patient List screen.

Return When there is an unsaved image, the confirmation message is displayed.
1
Selected Item Saves images of the selected image type.
Save
Patient Save Saves all images of the selected patient.
Moves the selected images to Recycle Manager.

Images acquired from the DCIM folder is temporarily saved in Recycle Manager.
To Recycle When an image is desired to be saved to a different patient, temporarily save the
image in the Recycle Manager and select the patient.
Deletes the selected images from the image list.
Pressing the OK button on the confirmation message dialog box deletes the image.
Delete Although the image is deleted from the image list, the data in the DCIM folder is not
deleted. (When “Delete the image data saved in NAVIS-EX from DCIM folder.” is
selected in the Configuration dialog, the data is deleted from the DCIM folder.)
DCIM Folder Deletes all image files in the DCIM folder.

Delete
Imports images from the DCIM folder.
Import When any changes are made in the DCIM folder or the media is reconnected with
the DCIM Import screen displayed, press the Import button to update the data.
Displays the Configuration dialog box to specify the deletion of the imported
Setting DCIM and device information.
Search box
Any alphanumeric characters can be entered to narrow down the patient list.
Entry of any patient information other than age and sex displays all patients who match the
search character string.
DCIM folder tree view

The image files saved in the DCIM folder are displayed in the tree view.
The tree view is displayed in the order of date, patient No., then image type. Select the
patient No. to link the data to the patient ID in NAVIS-EX.
Selecting the image type changes the displayed patient list to the image list. Selecting date
or patient No. changes the displayed image list to the patient list.
75
Image list screen

The image list screen is displayed by selecting the image type in the DCIM folder tree view. Confirm
the image data and import it to NAVIS-EX.
Switch button Image list Eye selection button
Switch button
View Switches image display between thumbnail display and single display.
Detail Displays the detail information on thumbnail images.
All Selects all images.
Deselect Clears selection of all images.
Displays the image in full screen.

Full SCR For the operation with full-screen, see "2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size"
(page 154).
Eye selection button

Specifies whether the selected image is the right or left eye.
For the image captured with the DS-10, the default setting is “NONE”. When the fundus
image is acquired without specifying the eye, the confirmation message “There is the image
data without selecting subject’s eye. They will be registered as undefined. Do you want to
continue?” is displayed.
76
1.17.2 DCIM import
1 To perform DCIM import for a patient who has not been registered in NAVIS-EX, register
the patient.
For the new patient registration procedure, see "1.8.1 Registering new patients" (page 37).
1
2 Connect the USB device on which the DCIM folder is saved.
3 Click the DCIM Import button and dis-

play the DCIM Import screen.
The patient list and contents of the DCIM
folder are displayed.
When the DCIM folder cannot be recog-

nized, the confirmation message is dis-
played.
Clicking the OK button closes the message
dialog box and displays the DCIM Import
screen.
After confirming the DCIM folder, click the Import button and display the contents of the
folder.
4 Select the patient No. to be imported from the tree

view.
To check images before import, click the image type
for the patient in the tree view. The patient list dis-
play is changed to the image list.
After checking the images, click the patient No. to
display the patient list.
5 Double-click the patient to import to the patient list.

The confirmation message is displayed.
6 Confirm the patient No., and patient ID and

click the Yes button.
The message dialog box is closed and the patient
ID is displayed next to the patient No. in the tree
view.
77
7 Click the image type in the tree view.

The image list of the selected image type is
displayed.
8 Click the images to be imported.

Check the image in zoom or details of the
image as necessary.
9 Specify whether the selected images are the right eye or left eye with the eye selection
button.
The setting of all the selected images is changed.
10 Click the Save button .

The selected images are imported and deleted from the image list.
If there is any image whose eye is not specified, the confirmation message is displayed.
The following operations are also possible.
Selected Item Saves images of the selected image type.

Save
Patient Save Saves all images of the selected patient.
Moves the selected images to Recycle Manager.

Images acquired from the DCIM folder is temporarily saved in Recycle
To Recycle Manager. When an image is desired to be saved to a different patient,
temporarily save the image in the Recycle Manager and select the patient.
Deletes the selected image from the image list.
Pressing the OK button on the confirmation message dialog box deletes the
Delete image.
Although the image is deleted from the image list, the data in the DCIM
folder is not deleted.
11 To delete the data in the DCIM folder, click the DCIM Folder Delete button .
The confirmation message is displayed. Clicking
the Yes button deletes all the data saved in the
DCIM folder.
78
12 Click the Return button to return to the Patient List screen.

When there is any unsaved image in the Image
Capture screen, the confirmation message is
displayed. Clicking the Yes button displays the
Patient List screen.
1
1.17.3 DCIM Import settings

Perform DCIM Import settings in the Configuration dialog box displayed by clicking the Setting button.
Checking this box deletes the image data saved in NAVIS-EX from
DCIM folder.
Image data
If the data does not need to be retained in the DCIM folder device after
importing images, check the box.
Specify the DCIM folder device with Vendor ID and Product ID.
Enter the DCIM folder device information to select the correct DCIM folder
device even when multiple USB devices are connected.
When there is only one DCIM folder, the Vendor ID and Product ID are
automatically recognized.
When multiple DCIM folder devices are connected, click the search button
to display the DCIM folder selection dialog box and select the correct
DCIM folder device device.
information
79
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Importing/Exporting Patients
1.18 Importing/Exporting Patients
All image data can be imported or exported for each patient. This allows data to be passed between
NAVIS-EX in other facilities.
• Only patient data exported by NAVIS-EX can be imported.

• For the patient export, it can be selected whether to export all or only the specified patient
images.
• Patient import cannot be used with patient data exported from a later NAVIS-EX version.
1.18.1 Patient import

• For the patient import, only one patient can be imported.
1 Click Patient Import from the File menu.

The Choose Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the folder in which the patient data to be

imported is saved and click the OK button.
Data is saved in a folder for each patient
(patient ID_patient name).
3 The patient data in the folder is imported and displayed on the Patient List screen.
When patient ID is duplicated, a confirmation message to overwrite the data appears. Click-
ing the Yes button overwrites the data. Clicking the No button displays the Patient informa-
tion dialog box appears. Change the patient information and click the Save button to import
the data.
When patient ID is duplicated and the Follow-Up image is also duplicated, a confirmation
dialog to replace the Follow-Up image appears.
When patient ID is duplicated, a confirmation dialog to overwrite the examination data is dis-
played.
Pressing the Yes button to overwrites the same examination data and pressing No saves the
data as a different examination data.
• Patient data in a folder is not erased by importing. If necessary, erase the data manually.
80
1.18.2 Multiple patient import

Imports multiple patient information and all image data at the same time.
1 Click Multiple patient import from the File menu.

The Choose Folder dialog box appears. 1
2 Select the folder in which the patient data to be

imported is saved and click the OK button.
To import multiple patients, select the folder
one level above the individual patient folder.
3 The patient data in the folder is displayed in the Multiple patient import screen. Check the
patients to be imported and for any patients not to be imported, remove the check in the
patient ID field. Confirm the patients to be imported and click the Next button.
4 The Duplicate Patient list is displayed.
81
When there are no duplicated patients, the Duplicate Patient List is blank.
5 When there is a patient duplicated, select the patient and select the processing method.
Select the processing method from “Save” or “Save as”.
When aborting import, click the Abort button.
To remove a duplicated patient from import, click the Back button to return to the Step 3
screen and remove the check in the Patient ID field.
1) Select patient in the Duplicate Patient list and click the Edit button.
All Selects all patients in the Duplicate Patient list.

Deselect Selects and clears all patients in the Duplicate Patient list.
2) Select Save or Save as and click the OK button.

For Save as, input a new patient ID. When multiple patients are selected, Save as cannot be
selected.
Duplicate patient IDs are not allowed.
82
6 Click the Next button.

Duplicate Follow-Up list is displayed. When importing patients, patient duplicated the Fol-
low-Up Baseline setting is displayed.
7 When there is a duplicated Follow-Up, select the Processing method.

Select processing method from Save or Without saving. Set with the same procedure as
Step 5.
Save The existing Baseline image is abandoned and the Baseline image of the
data to be imported will be applied.
Without saving Abandons the Baseline and Follow-Up information of the data to be
imported and imports as normal image.
8 Click the Next button to start import.

When there is a duplicated patient, select the examination data overwrite processing
method.
Select processing method from Save or New registration. Set by the same procedure as
Step 5.
Save The imported data (for the same patient) overwrites the examination data.
New registration The imported data is registered as new data.
A window indicating progress is displayed. Wait until the screen is changed.
83
9 A message indicating completion of import is displayed. Click the OK button.
10 Click the OK button to close the Progress screen.
11 The imported patient is displayed in the Patient List screen.
• Though importing is complete, the patient data in the folder is not deleted. Delete the
patient data manually as necessary.
1.18.3 Patient export

1 Select a patient to be exported on the Patient List screen.
• In the Configuration dialog box, if “Export only selected images when the image list screen
is shown” is selected, only the examination data selected in the Image List screen is
exported.
• When exporting images captured with the RS-330, all examination data saved at the time
of capture is also exported.
2 Click Patient Export from the File menu.

The Choose Folder dialog box appears.
3 Select the folder to which the patient data to be

exported is saved and click the OK button.
Data is saved in a folder for each patient
(patient ID_patient name).
If data with the same patient ID or patient name
is in the folder, the data is overwritten.
84
1.18.4 Multiple patient export

Exports multiple patient information and all image data at the same time.
1 Click Multiple patient export from the File menu.

1
2 The patient information is loaded.
A progress bar is displayed, wait for a while until the screen
is switched.
3 All the patients registered to NAVIS-EX are dis-

played in the Multiple patient export screen.
Click the Target button. The Browse For Folder
dialog box is displayed.
Executing “Multiple patient export” after searching

specific patients displays only the extracted
patients on the Multiple patient export screen.
4 Select the export destination folder and click the OK button.
5 The Multiple patient export screen is displayed. For

patients to be exported, check the Patient ID field,
and for patients not to be exported, remove check
in the Patient ID field.
[All] button: Selects all patients.
[Deselect] button: Cancels all patients.
• Do not export multiple patients for which the only difference in patient ID or name is a
change in upper or lower case. If export is conducted, only the patient information
registered most recently is selected.
6 Click the Setting button as necessary.

If setting is not necessary, proceed to Step 8.
85
7 Set the export setting and click the OK button.
Folder Size Calculation

Sets the data size calculation method for images to be exported that are displayed in the
Multiple patient export screen.
Do not calculate The image data size is not calculated.
Estimate the folder
size from the image Estimate the approximate image data size from the image data type.
file types
Calculate by adding
up the sizes of all Sum the size of all the image files and calculate the image data size.
the image files
Changed export to destination folders

Exports only data that has been changed from the data that has been exported to the desti-
nation folder.
Changed data If checked, only the changed data is exported.
export to destination
If the check is removed, all the selected data is exported.
folders
Image Check each image whether it has been exported or not, and only
unexported ones are exported.
Patient When the previous export has been canceled before completion, only
unexported patient data is exported.
8 While the Multiple patient export screen is displayed,

make sure the patient data to be exported and its size,
then click the Execute button.
The Progress dialog box is displayed. Wait until the
screen switches.
• When the export size is larger than the disc capacity, the export size character becomes
red. In this case, export is not executed.
86
CAUTION • Clicking the Abort button during multiple patient export changes the button indication
to Termination. Clicking the Termination button suspends the export. If the
Termination button is not clicked, all patient data currently being processed is
exported and the export is suspended.
1
If export is forcibly terminated, do not import the data until complete data export has
been conducted by exporting the data again.
Incomplete data imported cannot be used with NAVIS-EX.
9 When the Completion dialog box is displayed, click the OK button.
10 Click the Close button to close the Progress dialog box.
1.18.5 Patient list export

The patient information list of all patients in the database is exported in a CSV file.
If specific patients have been searched, a list of the extracted patients is exported.
1 If necessary, execute searching so that only the patients to be exported in the list are
shown in the patient list screen.
2 From the File menu, click “Patient list export”.

The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3 Specify the save destination and the file name, then click the Save button.
The patient information displayed in the patient list screen is saved in the CSV file.
87
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Recycle Manager
1.19 Recycle Manager
1.19.1 Recycle Manager screen

The deleted image is saved in the Recycle Manager.
The image saved in the Recycle Manager is saved as the image for each patient.
The Recycle Manager screen is displayed by selecting View and selecting Recycle from the menu.
Recycle manager screen (image data)
Control bar Data checkbox
Data display area
• No inspection data is displayed in the Inspection Data tab.
88
Control bar
Return Returns to the Patient List screen.
Update Updates the data displayed on the Recycle Manager screen.
Sort Sorts the data order.
All select/ All deselect Selects or deselects all the data.
Switches the thumbnail image display size between Large/Middle/

Image size Small.
To patient Saves the selected (or displayed) data as selected patient data.
Delete Deletes the selected data.
Preview Displays the Print Manager screen.
Single/ List Selects Single display or Multiple display of data.
Normal/ Detail Switches the data display between Normal display and Detail display.
• When the title bar is displayed in yellow, To patient and Delete buttons are disabled.
Data checkbox
For the image data containing drawing data, analyzed result and caption, check and set
whether to display those data together with the image.
Two or more images can be selected.
• Caption is displayed only in Single display mode.
89
Data area
Clicking each image data selects the image. Click the selected image again to clear the
selection.
Single display
Select the thumbnail image and click the Single button to display the selected image.
Zooming in or out the displayed image
Changeover of the image Animation display
90
Zooms in the image

Zoom in Clicking the left mouse button zooms in the image and clicking the right
mouse button zooms out the image.
Zooms out the image
Zoom out Clicking the left mouse button zooms out the image and clicking the right
mouse button zooms in the image.
Reset Resets the image to the initial state. 1

Full image Displays the entire image in the Single view.
Original Size Displays the image in original size in Single display mode.
Magnification drop-down list Selects magnification from the drop-down list.
First image Displays the first image when multiple images are selected.
Last image Displays the last image when multiple images are selected.
Previous image Displays the previous image when multiple images are selected.
Next image Displays the next image when multiple images are selected.
Play Starts the slide show of the images when multiple images are selected.
Stop Stops the slide show of the images when multiple images are selected.
1.19.2 Saving images or examination data to patient's data

Save the Recycle Manager image to patient's data.
1 On the Patient List screen, select the destination patient to be saved.
2 Select View and select Recycle from the menu to display the Recycle Manager screen.
3 Select data to be saved.

Two or more images can be selected.
4 Click the To patient button .

5 After confirming that the data is the patient data to

be saved, click the Yes button.
The selected data is saved in the specified patient
and deleted from the Recycle Manager screen.
When changing the patient, click the No button to
delete the registration and change the patient
selected on the Patient List screen.
91
1.19.3 Deleting images

Delete an image data from the Recycle Manager. The deleted image cannot be restored.
• In the Setting dialog box, if “Delete images from the disc when they are deleted from
Recycle Manager or Recycle Bin.” is selected, the data is deleted from the disc and the
disc space is freed up. If not checked, the data is recognized as just a deleted data and the
data is not deleted from the disc, therefore the disc space is not freed up.
1 Select data to be deleted.

In single image display mode, display data to be deleted.
2 Click the Delete button on the control bar.

3 Click the Yes button.

The selected and displayed data is deleted
from the Recycle Manager.
92
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Patient List Screen Settings
1.20 Patient List Screen Settings
In the Configuration dialog box displayed by selecting “Setting” from the file menu and select “Setting”,
perform setting related to the Patient List screen and the software.
• The item to be displayed depends on the license setting. 1

• The License tab is displayed only when [OCT capture (RS-3000)], [OCT capture (RS-3000
Advance)], or [OCT capture (RS-3000 Lite)] is selected for the license setting.
• The Data delete setting in the System tab is common to all clients in the NAVIS-EX
network. Settings other than the Data delete setting are effective for each client.
1.20.1 System tab

For the System tab, Mode and Server Name are displayed as System Information. (The Mode is
always displayed as Client.) In addition, deletion of the image data is set in this tab.
• Setup button is displayed only when NAVIS-EX is logged in as administrator.

• For the terminal used as server, the server name is displayed as “localhost”.
• “Data delete” is displayed only when logged in as administrator.
Server setting
Display the Input Server Name dialog box to input Server name or IP
address.
Setup button
Sets whether or not to delete images from the disc when they are
Data delete
deleted from Recycle manager or Recycle bin.
CAUTION • The image data deleted with “Delete images from the disc when they are deleted
from Recycle Manager or Recycle Bin.” checked cannot be restored.
In addition, when backup is executed, the image data of backup destination is also
deleted.
93
1.20.2 Common tab
Patients Tree History
Set the number of Patient List lately accessed to be displayed when

clicking the Patient menu.
Patients Tree History
The number can be set from 10 to 200.
This number setting is reflected on the next day.
Clear button Clears the Patients Tree History setting and reset to 100 (default).
Window
The Last Size Starts with the same size of the main screen displayed last time.
Maximization Always starts the main screen with the maximum size.
Mandatory item of registration

Check and specify the required input items during Patient Registration and Editing.
When the specified input item is not input, an alert message is displayed and the patient
cannot be registered.
Viewer auto start
Select whether the OCT image (or SLO image) is automatically displayed in the Viewer
screen or not after capturing the image.
Patient Export
When executing the patient export while the image list screen is displayed, select whether
export all images of the selected patient or only selected images.
Input patient ID mode
• Patient ID input mode is not displayed on terminals connected to the RS-3000/RS-3000

Lite/RS-3000 Advance.
Input Only All patient ID is input from the key board.
94
The patient ID is automatically set by date with alphanumeric

characters input from the key board. (Accession No.)
Date + Input
This is convenient for when patients are organized by the order of
visitation for each day instead of by patient ID.
Optional + Date + The date and ID number can be set to be automatically attached to a
desired character string to form the patient ID.
identification number
1
The patient ID is automatically given by numerical sequence. The
Serial number number of digits is selectable. (Factory setting is 10 digits)
Unused digit field are filled by “0”.
When Patient ID input mode is “Date + Input”,

the date information is added to the head of the
patient ID in the Patient information dialog box.
1.20.3 Language tab
Language Switches the language between Japanese/English.
Format Selects the Last name/First name order to display.
Name Sort Sets whether to sort names as specified in the Format field.
• When the language setting is changed, restart NAVIS-EX.
95
1.20.4 Patient List tab
Specifies the order to display on the main screen from Patient ID,
Sorting Preference of Items Name, Age, Sex, Comment, History, and Race.
Highlight the item and transfer with the Up/Down button.
Display Patient List Setting Sets whether to always display search results in the patient list.
1.20.5 Tree tab

Perform setting related to the Tree display.
Order of Tree select item and Sort of item when switching a patient
Select displaying items and order in the tree to be displayed.
96
Tree Sorting of Startup

Select the tree sorting of startup from “Sort of Date”, “Sort of Item”, “Sort of Time”, and “Use
the previous setting”.
Display Mode of Image List

Select the image sorting of image list window from “The Latest Date” and “The Latest Image 1
Right/Left”.
Display Image List with selected date

Select whether to display images selected by date in either of the following orders: “Selected
date images at the front” or “Selected date images only”.
Expand/Collapse
Select whether to expand the tree from “Does not Expanded”, “All are Expanded” and “Only
Today (only the newest data)”.
1.20.6 License tab

Sets the automatic start of the RS-3000 Capture software (RS-3000 Capture), RS-3000 Lite Capture
software (RS-3000 Lite Capture), and the RS-3000 Advance software (RS-3000 Advance Capture).
• The License tab is displayed only when “OCT capture (RS-3000)”, “OCT capture (RS-3000
Lite)”, or “OCT capture (RS-3000 Advance)” is selected as the License setting.
97
1.20.7 Image Select tab

Set whether to enable the functions of “When the areas other than the image are clicked, all the image
selections are released.” and “The images will be multi-selected by clicking them with holding down
the Ctrl key”.
• This function is enabled only on the Image List screen.
1.20.8 Image Caption tab

Check the checkbox of the Caption tab and set the Item and Position when displaying the caption on
the image.
• The Image Caption is not set in the default. Perform settings as necessary.
1 Check the box on the left.

The captions cannot be set unless the box is checked.
98
2 Select the Item to be displayed from the drop down list.

Select the item from “Patient name”, “Code”, “Age (now)”, “Age (picture)”, “Eye”, “Date”,
“Elapsed time”, “Comment”, “Remarks”, and “Race”.
• “Elapsed time” is displayed only for the F-10.
3 Select the display position.

Select the display position from “Left-Top”, “Left-Bottom”, “Right-Top”, and “Right-Bottom”.
4 Set the caption color.

Select from the Color Setting dialog box displayed by clicking the  button.
Click the OK button on the setting dialog box.
5 Set the Font Size.

Select from Default and Custom.
6 Click the OK button in the Configuration dialog box.
• When the caption settings are changed, the change may not be reflected immediately. In
this case, restart NAVIS-EX.
99
1.20.9 Thumbnail tab

Sets the Background Color and Font Color of the thumbnail of the title bar to be displayed on the
Image List. Change the color in the date or item order of the image data to be easily recognized.
The color can be set for each of Normal display and Detail display.
Normal
Set the Background Color and Font Color of the Date and Sample title bar under the thumb-
nail. The color is displayed in the set color for each date or item.
Select the color with the Color Setting dialog box displayed by clicking the ▼ button
Add of Background Color and Font Color and click the Add button.
A new combination is added to the list.
Delete Select the combination to be deleted from the list and click the Delete button.
Select the combination to be changed and after selecting the new Background Color
Update and Font Color, click the Update button.
The selected combination is updated in the list.
Select the combination whose order is changed from the list and click the ▲ or ▼
Sort
button under the list to change the order.
Detail
Set the display method (Type1 to Type3) and display color. The color is displayed in the set
color for each date or item.
Background Color Font Color

Type1 Lower part of the thumbnail image Letters other than the object name
Type2 Letters of the object name Letters other than the object name
Type3 Background of the detail display part Letters other than the object name
The method of Add, Delete, Update, and Sort are the same as the Normal.
100
1.20.10 Export tab

Perform setting when exporting the image from NAVIS-EX in the specified format.
Creating export module

1 Click the New button.
The dialog box becomes registrable.
2 Enter the export module title in the Function name field.

3 Select the export module from the drop-down list.
The available export modules are as follows:

Start and display the application software whose data is specified as
Export Application(s)
Bitmap format or JPEG format.
Export bitmap file(s) Image data is exported in the Bitmap format.
Export ClipBoard(s) Save the image data in the computer clipboard.
Export jpeg file(s) Image data is exported in the JPEG format.
Export image file(s) Export the image data with the same file format saved in NAVIS-EX.
Output the Image data, Patient information, Capture information and
Export Report file(s) comment with the report format.
Before saving, preview is displayed and comment can be entered.
101
• For the Application and Clipboard, when the multiple images are selected, exporting may
not performed normally.
4 Click the Detail button to display the Report Export dialog box.
Set details for each output format.
When “Export Application(s)” is selected
Specify each of the “BMP” and “JPG” tabs.

External application The specified format data is not started with the external application
start failed software.
System related Start with the application software of the file format (extension) associated
application start with the computer.
Start with the specified application software.
Designated application
Specify the application software with the Open File dialog box displayed by
start
pressing the Open File button.
• For the Application started, select the exe format file.

• If the system-related application is Windows store application, it cannot be started by
selecting “System related application start”.
Detailed setting of the Bitmap format (Export bitmap file)
Folder box Specifies the output folder
Sets the rule in the file naming.

File name box
The exported file name becomes “(Set file name) + (No).bmp”.
Checking “Open save dialog when exporting a picture” displays the save dialog every time data is
exported.
Checking “Save patient data when exporting a picture” exports the patient information XML file with
the image file. (For image data with no image capture information, the XML file of patient informa-
tion is not exported.)
102
When “Export ClipBoard(s)” is selected

When “Export ClipBoard(s)” is selected, there is no detail setting.
The image data can be pasted with the external application software such as Paint during
saving to the ClipBoard.
Detailed settings of an image (Export image file(s)) 1

File name box
The exported file name becomes “(Set file name) + (No).extension”.
exported.
the image file (For image data with no image capture information, the XML file of patient informa-
tion is not output.).
Detailed setting of the JPEG format (Export jpeg file)

File name box
The exported file name becomes “(Set file name) + (No).jpg”.
exported.
the image file. (For image data with no image capture information, the XML file of patient informa-
tion is not output.)
Besides, the image quality of JPEG file can be specified in the 1 to 100 (%) range. Be aware that
increasing the image quality increases the file size.
103
Detailed settings of a Report file (Export Report file)

File name box
The exporting file name is “(Set file name) +(Date of creation). extension”.
Sends the file format data by e-mail.

Mail Setting Clicking the Mail button displays the Server Setting dialog box and perform
setting related to the e-mail sending.
Folder box
Click the Browse button to display Browse for Folder dialog box and specify the destination of the
exporting data to be saved.
After specifying the destination, click the OK button.
File name box

Enter the file name.
• When “Date”, “Name + Date”, or “Code + Date” is set for the File name, the date of the file
to be exported in the Follow-up screen of the OCT image becomes the exported date.
• The “(Set file name)” portion in the name of the file to be exported can be omitted.
104
5 Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

6 Set Output Caption and Output Title as necessary.
Multiple items can be selected.
1
Output Caption Outputs images with the image caption added.
Outputs images with the title added on the upper part

of the image.
Item of the title, font color, and background color can
Output Title
be set with the title setting dialog box displayed by
clicking the Config. button.
Title area when the title is

output
Setting in the Title Setting dialog box

Check the item to be output.
Select the Font Color and Background Color with the Title Set-
ting dialog box displayed by clicking the [ ▼ ] button.
7 Click the OK button on the Export tab box.

The new exporting module is added to the list.
8 Click the OK button on the setting dialog box.
105
Editing an export module
1 Select the module to edit from the Export module list.
2 Click the Edit button on the Export tab box.
3 Enter the export module title in the Function name field.
4 Click the Detail button and enter the output folder and file names.
5 Click the OK button in the dialog box in which the output folder name is entered.
6 Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
7 As necessary, perform the Output Caption settings.
8 Click the OK button in the Export tab box.
9 Click the OK button in the setting dialog box.
• The module name of the export module already set cannot be changed.
Deleting an export module
1 Select the module to delete from the Export module list.
2 Click the Delete button in the Export tab box.

The export module is deleted from the list.
3 Click the OK button in the setting dialog box.
106
1.20.11 Samples tab

Sets the title (item) to be displayed in the tree view sample.
Add Enter the title field and click the ADD button.
Delete Select the title to be deleted from the title list and click the Delete button.
Select the title to be changed from the title list and click the Update button
Update
after changing the title.
Select the title whose position is changed from the title list and click the ▲
Sort
or ▼ button to change the order.
1.20.12 Link tab

Perform setting that automatically save the image file to the folder other than those in NAVIS-EX
simultaneously with the image capturing.
Link up with the external

Enables the data automatic external saving function.
system
File transfer Automatically saves the data to the specified folder.
Obtain the data from the NAVIS-AZU and automatically saves the
NAVIS-AZU
data to the specified folder.
107
Obtain the data from the NAVIS-HP and automatically saves the data
NAVIS-HP
to the specified folder.
Obtain the data from the NAVIS-CL and automatically saves the data
NAVIS-CL
to the specified folder.
Sends and receives the data with the HIS/RIS according to the
DICOM standard.
DICOM
For the DICOM setting, see "4.4 Setting in DICOM Communication Detail
Setting Screens" (page 244).
Sends patient information and image data to or receives those from

EMR (electronic medical record).
Protocol - EMR
Communication with EMR is set with Server Manager. For details, refer to
the installation manual.
Output edited image / scope Outputs the edited image and scope image with communication
image function.
An edited image is output with the icon that indicates that the image
Add the edited icon to has been edited (pencil).
output images When the protocol is DICOM, this function is not applied (cannot be
selected).
Displays the Communication detail setting dialog box.
Setup button It is enabled only when the “Link up with the external system” box is
checked.
Allows selection of whether to display or not to display the unsent

Unsent data confirmation data confirmation message.
message Display: The unsent data confirmation message is displayed.
Do not display: The unsent data confirmation message is not displayed.
Sends all unsent data if any.

Transfer all unsent data This setting is available when “Do not display” is selected for the unsent
data confirmation message.
Displayed only when “OCT Capture (RS-330)” is specified in the

After fundus image capture, license setting.
automatically transfer the When any fundus (color) image or fundus (FAF) image captured with
image the RS-330 is saved, it is automatically output to the link transfer
folder.
• To use the communication function between multiple terminals, unify the saving location.
• When the output folder is changed, restart the computer.
• To perform the communication function with NAVIS-AZU, NAVIS-HP, or NAVIS-CL,
installation of additional specialized software for the NAVIS-AZU, NAVIS-HP, or NAVIS-CL
is necessary.
• The communication function can be selected from the menu displayed by right-clicking the
selected image on the Image List screen.
108
File transfer
Clicking the Setup button displays the Communication detail setting dialog box.
The Transferring Folder Specifies the folder to which data is transferred.
Selects the file format of output data.

“Jpeg Image file” transfers only image data and communication
The Transferring Data information.
“Jpeg Image and XML files” outputs image data, capturing information,
patient information, and communication information.
• Communication information of the output data is the data necessary for starting NAVIS-EX
to be used as a viewer from the host system.
• The examination data that has no XML file cannot be output by “Jpeg Image and XML
files”.
NAVIS-AZU
109
Specifies the folder to which data is transferred.

The Transferring Folder
When obtaining the data to NAVIS-AZU, specify this folder.
Fixes the transferring data to “Image and XML files”.
When “Image file” is selected, the capturing information cannot be
The Transferring Data obtained.
“Image and XML files” is used to transfer image database, capturing
information and patient information.
Enters the NAVIS-AZU Server access information (User, Password,
NAVIS Server
Database, IP Address, and Port).
Performs NAVIS-AZU Server connection test.
Connect button When the connection is successful, the message “Connection
succeeded.” appears.
• The examination data with no XML file cannot be output in “Image and XML file (*.xml)”.
NAVIS-HP

When obtaining the data to NAVIS-HP, specify this folder.
Fixes the transferring data to “Jpeg Image and XML files”.
“Jpeg Image and XML files” is used to transfer image data, capturing
Enters the NAVIS-HP Server access information (user, password, IP
NAVIS Server
address and port No.).
Performs NAVIS-HP Server connection test.
110
NAVIS-CL

When obtaining the data to NAVIS-CL, specify this folder.
Fixes the transferring data to “Jpeg Image and XML files”.
“Jpeg Image and XML files” is used to transfer image data, capturing
Enters the NAVIS-CL Server access information (user, password, IP
NAVIS Server
address and port No.).
Performs connection test of the NAVIS-CL Server.
111
1.20.13 Patient Change tab

Sets the Patient Change function to allow patient selection in NAVIS-EX from external devices.
The Patient Change function can select the patient using the Windows Command Prompt or by saving
the specified patient file to the observation folder.
Change the patient with a device other than the capture terminal.
If the patient is changed using the image capture terminal, an unexpected operation may
result.
Use patient change

Checked when using the Patient Change function.
Patient change setup
Performs settings in the Data tab in the setting dialog box displayed by
Patient Change Format
clicking the Setup button.
Sets the observation folder used for the file monitoring function.
Specify the observation folder with the Reference dialog box displayed by
Target
clicking the Reference button. Or input the path directly.
When a file in the observation folder is loaded, the file is deleted.
Sets the file name of the text file containing the patient information
specified in the Field tab to be saved in the observation folder.
The following wildcards can be used for a file name.
File Name *: Desired number of alphanumeric characters (0 character or more)
?: One desired alphanumeric character (0 character is acceptable)
For the contents of the text file, see "1.22.2 Using an observation folder" (page
135).
Sets whether to display a confirmation message when changing a patient.
Patient change message However, for the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 images,
Patient change message is not displayed.
Sets whether to display a confirmation message when saving the
Save confirmation changed file.
message However, for the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 images,
Save confirmation message is not displayed.
For making patient changes, whether to activate only upon registration
Patient change function (Only registration) or by selection as well as upon registration (Select /
Registration) is selectable.
112
Patient Change Format Setting
1 Check “Use patient change”.
2 Click the Setup button of the Patient change format.

The Setting dialog box appears. 1
3 Set the Sex code and Race in the General tab.
Specify Male and Female codes with single alphanumeric character.

Sex Code
Do not repeat the same character.
The date format of the computer is displayed.

Date
The date format cannot be changed in the Setting dialog box.
Sets the race code with alphanumeric character. Do not repeat the
Race same character.
If the incorrect value is set, default setting is registered.
4 Perform Data format setting in the Data tab.

1) Click the Data tab.
2) Select the type from the drop-down list.
3) Specify the field.
When there are items already input in the field,
be careful not to duplicate the field value.
4) Click the Add button.

A new item is added to the Field List.
5) Repeat Steps 2) to 4) to input items.
For the command line and patient change file for each item in the Field List, refer to the following list.
No. Type Input example
1 (No set) *1
2 Last Name*2 LAST
113
No. Type Input example

3 First Name*2 FIRST
4 Middle Name*2 MIDDLE
5 AutoName *3 “FIRST MIDDLE LAST”
6 reserve1 -
7 reserve2 -
8 reserve3 -
9 reserve4 -
10 reserve5 -
11 reserve6 -
12 reserve7 -
13 reserve8 -
14 reserve9 -
15 Patient ID 90001
16 reserve10 -
17 Birthday *4 1950/01/30
18 Sex 1
19 Comment *3 “This is a test patient“
20 History
21 Race Undefined
*1 Used when the blank field is desired to be blank.

*2 For the command line, do not input a space in the first name, middle name, or last name.
*3 Encloses the information in quotations ( " ). Input a space between the first name, middle name,
and last name. The order of first name / middle name / last name is according to the Format set-
ting in the Configuration dialog box (Language tab).
*4 When the short date format of computer is “yyyy/MM/dd” (varies with the date format of com-
puter)
• Be sure to include “Patient ID” in the Field List.

• The Reservation fields (1 to 10) cannot be used.
• Duplicated items cannot be set at the same time such as “last name and full name” or “first
name and full name”.
Editing items
1) Click the item to be edited from the Field List.
2) Input changes into the Type field and Field field.
3) Click the Edit button.
The item in the Field List is overwritten.
Deleting items
1) Click the item to be deleted from the Field List.
2) Click the Delete button.
The selected item is deleted from the list.
Changing the item order
1) Click the item whose order is to be changed from the Field List.
2) Click the [] or [] button.
The order of the item in the Field List moves.
114
1.20.14 Image Tool tab

Sets whether or not to display a confirmation message when operating the image tool.
All messages are

The confirmation dialog box is displayed.
displayed.
No messages are
The confirmation dialog box is not displayed.
displayed.
115
1.20.15 Image Display tab

Perform the setting for display and operation regarding Follow-Up on the Image List screen.
Display the Follow-Up image list

Displays the list of images registered as the Baseline image at the top of the Image List
screen.
Display normal image list

Thumbnails of the images that are not specified as Baseline images or Follow-Up images
are displayed in the Image List screen.
Regardless of the Follow-Up setting, all images are displayed in the

All images
thumbnail.
Only the image which
Only the images not registered as Baseline image or Follow-Up image
does not belong to a
are displayed in the thumbnail.
Follow-Up group
Double-click the thumbnail image

Specify the operation when the thumbnail of the Baseline image (displayed in the folder
icon) is double-clicked in the Image List screen.
Display Follow-Up
Displays the Follow-Up information.
information
Displays the Baseline image of a Follow-Up group is displayed in the
Display Viewer (Baseline)
Viewer screen.
Display Viewer (Latest The most recent image of a Follow-Up group is displayed in the Viewer
Follow-Up) screen.
Start Follow-Up The Follow-Up group is displayed in the Follow-Up screen.
116
Display example of Display Follow-Up information
Start Follow-Up Operation

Specify the operation when the Follow-Up button is clicked on the Image List screen.
Display Sub menu Displays the menu of New Exam, Follow-Up, and Follow-Up Exam.
Start New Exam Displays the New Exam screen and capture an image for Follow-Up.
Start Follow-Up Displays the Follow-Up screen.
Displays the New Exam screen. After an image for Follow-Up is
Start Follow-Up Exam
captured, the Follow-Up screen is displayed.
117
ACQUIRING IMAGES: AFC/F-10/RS-330 Image Follow-Up
1.21 AFC/F-10/RS-330 Image Follow-Up
Follows up the image by performing comparative display and differential display of the standard-regis-
tered image and time passed image.
For Follow-Up, the Baseline and Follow-Up image are required.
Baseline: Image as a base of Follow-Up
Follow-Up: Image being compared with the Baseline image
• For the RS-330 image, only fundus image can be followed up. For the OCT image, image
follow-up is conducted by OCT Image Follow-up.
• Follow-Up function cannot be used for the patient data being used (locked) in the other
terminal.
• Only images containing the information specified by NIDEK can be specified as the
Baseline or Follow-Up images.
If the information specified by NIDEK is not contained in the selected image, the error message as
shown below appears.
Images of an undefined eye cannot be specified as the Baseline or the Follow-Up images.
When the types of captured images differ (AFC, FA, or IA), Follow-Up can be specified
according to each type.
For each of the right and left eyes, one Baseline image can be specified.
If multiple Baseline images are specified for one eye, the previous Baseline and Follow-Up
images are released.
The dialog box as shown to the right appears to
call attention.
Up to three Follow-Up images of each type can be specified for each of the right and left
eyes.
The dialog box as shown to the right appears to
call attention.
When the F-10 main body does not support a wide-angle sensor, the specifications are lim-
ited.
When following up the images captured by the F-10, it is recommended to make the F-10 main
body support a wide-angle sensor.
118
1.21.1 Follow-Up screen description
Image control bar Toolbar Setting graph Setting analysis
Thumbnail list
Graph display
The thumbnails of the images specified as Baseline and Follow-
Up and selected images are displayed.
Using the tabs at the top, the display can be selected.
Return Returns to the Image List screen.
Setup Displays the Setup dialog box for the Follow-Up.
Diagram Changes the type of the graph that shows the Follow-Up result.
R/L Toggles between the L/R screen and the B/F screen.
B/F screen: Displays the Baseline and Follow-Up images for one eye.
B/F R/L screen: The right and left eye images are displayed at the same time.
Copies the disc of the Baseline.

Disc Copy This function is used when adding Follow-Up images.
119
Toolbar
Reload Reloads saved image.
Clear Clears the measurement data.
Undo Undoes the previous action.
Redo Cancels the previous Undo.
Move Moves the position to display.
Select Selects the object.
Disc Specifies a disc and calculates disc parameters.
Cup Specifies a cup and calculates cup parameters.
Erase Erases the selected object.
Original Size Displays the image in original size in Single display mode.
Full image Displays the image in original size in Single display mode.
Color Selects the color assigned to the measuring tool.
Pen style Selects the pen style assigned to the measuring tool.
Line width Selects the line width assigned to the measuring tool.
Next image Displays the next Follow-Up image when multiple images are selected.
Starts the slide show of the Follow-Up images when multiple images
Play
are selected.
Stops the slide show of the Follow-Up images when multiple images
Stop
are selected.
Changes the speed of the slide show of the Follow-Up images.

Slide show speed
120
1.21.2 Registering and removing images

Procedures to register and remove the images in the Image List screen are explained.
Registering a Baseline image

1) Right click the image to be registered as a 1
Baseline image in the Image List screen.
Select “Follow-Up” then “Register to Base-
line” from the pop-up menu.
The “Follow-Up Exam Register (Set as new
Baseline)” dialog box is displayed.
2) Check the data and change the Title if

necessary, then click the Set button.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels the Baseline
image registration and closes the “Follow-Up
Exam Register (Set as new Baseline)” dialog box.
3) The image is registered as the Baseline

image and the Baseline image icon is
displayed in the thumbnail.
Baseline image icon
121
The Baseline image is displayed as a thumbnail in a folder icon at the top of the Image List
screen. (When sample images are displayed, they are displayed above the Baseline image.)
The Baseline image can be registered by dragging a thumbnail image to the Baseline image
area but not onto an existing Baseline image.
Changing the title of the Baseline image
1) Right click the Baseline image icon and select “Follow-Up” then “Edit Follow-Up title”
from the pop-up menu.
The “Follow-Up Exam Register (Edit the title)” dialog box is displayed.
2) Edit the title in the “Follow-Up Exam Register (Edit the title)” dialog box and click the Change
button.
The title of the Baseline image is changed.
The title is displayed in the caption by moving the cur-

sor over the thumbnail image.
122
Removing Baseline images

Right click the Baseline image icon and select “Follow-Up”
then “Remove from Baseline” from the pop-up menu.
The confirmation message is displayed. Clicking the
Yes button clears the Baseline registration. 1
When the removed Baseline image has Follow-Up images registered to it, the Follow-Up
registrations are cleared and any settings performed on the Follow-Up screen are deleted.
(This operation cannot be undone.)
123
1.21.3 Specifying Baseline
1 Select an image to be followed up on the Image List screen. Click the Follow-Up button
to open the pop-up menu and select “Follow-Up”.
2 Select the desired image to be the Baseline used in the Follow-Up from the list.
The selected image can be enlarged by clicking.
Pan window
A pan window appears when the image is enlarged. Select the desired display position and
magnification. Dragging the image can also change the display position.
3 Click the Disc button to specify the disc area.

Click the left mouse button to enter four or more points
over an edge of disc.
The starting point is displayed with and the other
points are displayed with .
124
Clicking the starting point again finalizes the disc

edge and outlines a disc line with a spline curve
4 Click the Cup button to specify the cup area.

The starting point is displayed with and other points
are displayed with .
Clicking the starting point again finalizes the cup

edge and outlines a cup line with a spline curve.
5 Select the image selected as Baseline from

the list and open the pop-up menu by right-
clicking. Select “Set Baseline”.
It is possible to register the image to the

Baseline before specifying the disc and cup.
125
6 The “Follow-Up Exam Register” dialog box is

displayed. Enter the title and click the Set button.
7 The selected image becomes the Baseline, and the graph is displayed.
• The graph does not appear if the cup area is larger than the disc area.
• The graph does not appear, either, if the cup area does not contain the center of the TSNIT
axes.
126
1.21.4 Specifying Follow-Up

• During conducting the Follow-Up, the image may be distorted.
In this case, set Follow-Up again.
1
1 Select an image to be followed up from the thumbnail list.
When an image is selected from the list, the selected image is displayed on the right side of
the screen, and the Baseline is displayed on the left side of the screen.
Pan window
2 Click the selected image to enlarge it.

A pan window appears when the image is enlarged. Select the desired display position and
magnification. Dragging the image can also change the display position.
3 Click the Disc Copy button to select the Baseline, the selected image, and the disc area,
in that order.
Click the four points on the edge of the disc to specify them as a mark of the edge.
127
• For the disc copy, the disc area is specified by four points.
The measurement area and the order of the selection need to be consistent between the Baseline
and the Follow-Up images.
4 When the fourth point is clicked, the message

“Do you copy the disc?” appears. Click the
Yes button.
The disc area is displayed on the selected
image and the image becomes the Follow-
Up.
5 Click the Cup button to specify the cup area.

The graph of the selected image is added on the screen.
128
1.21.5 Releasing Baseline and Follow-Up images
1 Select the image to cancel its selection as the Baseline or the Follow-Up from the thumb-
nail list
2 Open the pop-up menu by right-clicking the 1

thumbnail. Select “Release Baseline”.
For the Follow-Up image, select “Release Follow-
Up”.
• When the Baseline setting is canceled, the related Follow-Up setting is also canceled.
• The Baseline or Follow-Up images can be canceled on the Image List screen as well.
1.21.6 Switching the graphs

The types of graph that shows the Follow-Up results can be changed.
Each time the Diagram button is clicked, the graph type can be changed in the following order:
TSNIT graph
The graph when the Follow-Up is compared with the Baseline is displayed.
129
Numeric values in the specified direction can be

displayed by moving the indication lines for vector
angle (VA).
Right-clicking the image or clicking the graph
moves the indication line to the cursor position.
Aligning the cursor to the circle on the indication
line of the graph displays the numeric value at that
position.
Display/non-display of the C/D, and RIM graphs,

and the cross line showing TSNIT of the image
can be selected with the checkbox at the top of
the image.
Indication lines for vector angle
Serial graph
The graph when all Follow-Ups (up to three images) are compared with the Baseline is dis-
played.
Display/non-display of the C/D and RIM graphs, and the cross line showing TSNIT of the
image can be selected with the checkbox at the top of the image.
Numeric table
The C/D, R/D, and RIM values of all images on the Follow-Up screen are indicated with the
T, S, N, I, T values and average value. Select the numeric value to be displayed with the
radio buttons to the upper left.
130
Graph colors
Graph colors can be changed with the Color Set-
ting dialog box that is displayed when the colored
area on the graph is clicked.
The colors of Line and RIM can be specified
respectively. 1
Clicking the Default button returns to the factory
setting.
1.21.7 Displaying the right and left eye images

The Follow-Up results of the left eye and that of the right eye can be displayed respectively.
Immediately after the screen is switched, the Baseline is displayed on the left side of the screen, and
the latest Follow-Up image is displayed on the right side of the screen.
Clicking the R/L button displays the right eye image on the left side of the screen, and the left
eye image on the right side of the screen.
For the TSNIT graph, the left and right eye graphs are displayed.
If the image data of both eyes captured on the same day is not in the thumbnail list, the image of
one eye is displayed.
Each time the R/L button or B/F button is clicked, the Follow-Up comparison display and the
left/right eye comparison display are switched.
131
Graph colors
Graph colors can be changed with the Color Set-
ting dialog box that is displayed when the colored
area on the graph is clicked.
The colors of Line and RIM can be specified
respectively.
Clicking the Default button returns to the factory
setting.
The graph colors for the right and left eyes can be
set with “Graph Color” in the Setting dialog box as
well.
1.21.8 Setting the Follow-Up screen

Set the Follow-Up screen in the Setting dialog box that is displayed when “Setup” is clicked in the
Setup menu.
Display Image as Follow-Up when starting

Select an image to be displayed first when the Follow-Up screen is displayed from among
“Follow-Up image”, “Acquired image”, and “Does not display”.
The order of image display
Select the order of the images displayed in the thumbnail list on the Follow-Up screen from
either “Ascending order of date” or “Descending order of date”.
Threshold
For “C/D (V)” and “C/D (H)”, set a threshold value in the information field on the lower part of
the image.
Numeric values which exceed the threshold are displayed in red.
For “R/D”, set a threshold value on the numeric display.
Numeric value under the threshold are displayed with the background in red.
Confirmation message box
132
Sets whether or not the confirmation message box is displayed.

Graph display when starting
Select the graph to be displayed first when the Follow-Up screen is displayed from among
“TSNIT graph”, “Serial graph”, and “Numeric table”.
Graph Color 1
Sets colors to be used for the TSNIT graph when the left and right eye images are displayed.
Clicking the Default button in the “Graph Color” field returns only the color setting to the fac-
tory setting.
Default setting
Clicking the Default button at the bottom of the setting dialog box returns all settings to the
factory settings.
133
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Patient Change Function
1.22 Patient Change Function
The Patient Change function allows patient selection in NAVIS-EX from external devices. Without
operating NAVIS-EX, selection of the patient information and registration of the new patient can be
performed.
The Patient Change function can select the patient using the Windows Command Prompt or by saving
the specified patient file to the observation folder.
For the setting method of the Patient Change function, see "1.20.13 Patient Change tab"
(page 112).
1.22.1 Using command line

Selects the patient using the Windows Command Prompt.
1 Open the Windows Command Prompt.
2 Change the NAVIS-EX installation destination NAVIS-EX/Navigator directory.

Open the Navigator.exe current folder.
3 Input the command line.

For the command description, use the “Patient change format” set in "1.20.13 Patient
Change tab" (page 112).
ex) Navigator.exe 90001,TEST,PATIENT,1,1950/01/30
• The input format of the command line is comma-deliminated.

• For the patient ID, only the alphabetic characters, A to Z (upper case), and numeric
characters, 0 to 9 can be used. Be sure not to use commas or spaces in the patient ID. This
may recognized as delimiters. If any other characters are used for the ID, the ID may be
registered to NAVIS-EX but might pose a problem for operations such as Retrieve function.
• A Field input in an improper format or values cannot be registered.
• Be sure not to include commas in the comment.
• Do not input a space between the last name and the first name. It may be recognized as a
delimiter.
4 Press the Enter key on the keyboard to select or newly register the patient in the Patient
List screen of NAVIS-EX.
The Patient List screen comes to the front.
When the input command line is for a new patient, the patient information is newly registered
and the Patient List screen is displayed.
134
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Patient Change Function
If NAVIS-EX is not started, the Login screen is displayed.
1.22.2 Using an observation folder

Selects the patient by saving the specified patient file to the observation folder. 1
• It is recommended to keep the number of patients contained in a single file 100 or less.
If an excessive number of patients are in a single file, registration takes a considerable amount of
time, and may interfere with the device operation.
1 Create the patient change file.

Use the file name set in “FileName” in "1.20.13 Patient Change tab" (page 112).
For the text description, use the “Patient change format” set in "1.20.13 Patient Change tab"
(page 112).
ex) 90001,TEST,PATIENT,01,1950/01/30
• The input format of the command line is comma-deliminated.

• For the patient ID, only the alphabetic characters, A to Z (upper case), and numeric
characters, 0 to 9 can be used. Be sure not to use commas or spaces in the patient ID. This
may recognized as delimiters. If any other characters are used for the ID, the ID may be
registered to NAVIS-EX but might pose a problem for operations such as Retrieve function.
• A Field input in an improper format or values cannot be registered.
• Be sure not to include commas in the comment.
2 If the created patient change file is stored in the observation folder set in "1.20.13 Patient
Change tab" (page 112), the patient is selected or newly registered in the NAVIS-EX
The Patient List screen comes to the front.
If the input patient information is for a new patient, newly register the patient information and
display the Patient List screen.
If NAVIS-EX is not started, the patient change file observation function is not operated.
• Do not set the observation folder to the same location of others.
3 The patient change file is deleted from the observation folder.
135
ACQUIRING IMAGES: Data Compatibility Depending on Security Setting
1.23 Data Compatibility Depending on Security Setting
When Enhanced security mode is used, data exchange is limited.
Restore
Data backed up with NAVIS-EX while Enhanced security mode is “on” cannot be restored to NAVIS-
EX with Enhanced security mode set to “off”.
The setting for Enhanced security mode can be changed with Server Manager tool. For
details, refer to the NAVIS-EX Installation Manual.
Enhanced
Software version Restore
security mode
Data can be restored regardless of “on” and “off” settings.
On Data with the “off” setting is converted to data with Enhanced
security mode set to “on”, and imported to the database.
Only data with the “off” setting can be restored.

Data with the “on” setting cannot be restored. Attempting
Ver. 1.7.0 restoration displays the message below.
(This software)
Off
• Data backed up with NAVIS-EX of Ver. 1.6.0 or earlier is treated as data with the “off”
setting.
• To provide data to NAVIS-EX of Ver. 1.6.0 or earlier, back up the data with Enhanced
security mode set to “off”.
• Enhanced security mode cannot be set with Windows XP.
136
Patient import/export
Patient export data from NAVIS-EX with Enhanced security mode set to “on” cannot be imported to
NAVIS-EX with Enhanced security mode set to “off”.
The setting for Enhanced security mode can be changed with Server Manager tool. For
details, refer to the NAVIS-EX Installation Manual. 1
Enhanced
Software version Import
security mode
Data can be imported regardless of “on” and “off” settings.
On Data with the “off” setting is converted to data of Enhanced security
mode, and imported to the database.
Only data with the “off” setting can be imported.

Data with the “on” setting can be imported. Attempting import
Ver. 1.7.0 displays the message below.
(This software)
Off
• Patient export data from NAVIS-EX of Ver. 1.6.0 or earlier is treated as data with the “off”
setting.
• To provide data to NAVIS-EX of Ver. 1.6.0 or earlier, import the data with Enhanced security
mode set to “off”.
• Enhanced security mode cannot be set with Windows XP.
137
138
2. DISPLAYING IMAGES
2.1 Image List Screen
On the Image List screen, image reference, image processing, image printing are performed.
Select patient on the Patient List screen and click the Forward button to display.
2
Menu bar Toolbar Patient information
Tree view Data area
• To display video images of the F-10, see “2.4 Playing Back Movie” (page 169).
 Menu bar
The menu bar includes the File, Edit, View, Setup and Help menus.
Clicking a menu displays a pull-down menu.
For details, see “1.7.1 Menu bar” (page 30).
139
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Image List Screen
 Toolbar
The toolbar includes shortcut buttons to which frequently-used functions are assigned.
The functions that are not displayed can be executed from the menu. When an image is displayed,
some functions can be executed from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking.
For details, see “1.7.2 Toolbar” (page 32).
• When the title bar is displayed in yellow, addition and editing of the patient data cannot be
performed and Comment and Image Wizard button cannot be used.
 Displaying Patient Information

Displays the selected patient ID, Name, Sex, and Age.
Clicking the Expand button displays the History and Comment of the patient information.
Expand button
• According to the Server Manager setting, Race can be displayed.
 Tree view
The data to be displayed can be changed in the tree view on the left
of the screen.
In tree view, the selected patient data is sorted by item, date, and
time. To change the sort option, press the tree view display change
button ( / ).
By clicking + and - at the left side of each item in the tree view, each
item can be extended and closed.
Sort by Date group.
Image thumbnail is sorted by item and date.
The list is displayed in the order of patient, item, and Follow-Up group.
Sort by Item
Image thumbnail is sorted by item.
Sort by Time group.
Image thumbnail is sorted by acquisition order.
Expand Expands the entire tree.
Collapse Collapses all the expanded tree contents into their header.
140
 Changing displaying data using the tree view

When switching to the Image List screen, items of the data are displayed as icons. When a tree view
item or icon is selected, the corresponding data are displayed.
When there are further items under the selected item in the tree view
The tree items under the selected tree items are shown as icons in the data display area.
When the selected item is on the bottom layer in the tree view
The data of the selected item in the tree view is displayed in the data display area. 2
• Settings for the data displayed in the tree view can be specified in the Tree tab of the
Configuration dialog box.
For details, see “1.20.5 Tree tab” (page 96).
When the Follow-Up data is selected.

When the Follow-Up data is selected in the tree view, the Follow-Up information is displayed.
The images of the selected Follow-Up group are displayed in the Image List.
Follow-Up information
When Today is selected in the tree view.

When “Today” is selected, the patients who have had data collected on that day are dis-
played in the Patient List screen.
 Data area
In the data display area, image thumbnail is displayed.
The display size of the thumbnail image can be switched between large/middle/small with the Size
button.
An icon indicating image type is displayed on the right bottom of the thumbnail image.
Edited image Image processed by image wizard
Scope image Image processed by scope simple processing or image processing
141
GLD measurement image Image measured by GLD
/ Stereo image Image captured in AFC-230/210 Stereo mode
Exported image Image export processed in communication mode
Baseline image Image set as Baseline
Follow-Up image Image set as Follow-Up
Image captured by the Follow-Up image capture function from the

earlier versions of RS series.
Image captured by Follow- Images with this icon are automatically displayed in the Follow-Up screen
without being selected from the Image List screen. To remove the icon
Up image capture function
from the image, check and uncheck the corresponding box in the image
registry field.
Images registered to the Follow-Up group used in the earlier versions
of the RS series.
The earlier versions of RS series can capture the OCT images for only one
Follow-Up group for each image type. This icon indicates that the image
Old version compatible belongs to the group. For details, see “ Change of Baseline image for
compatibility with earlier versions” (page 473) in “13.2 Registering and
image
Clearing Images” (page 470).
AFC series devices, F-10, and RS-330 can capture images for only one
Follow-Up group for each image type. Therefore, the icon is displayed in
all the thumbnail images.
• Images to be displayed on the same Viewer can be selected at the same time. Selecting an
image displayed on different Viewer cancels the previous selections.
Fundus images from AFC-330/230/210, F-10, or RS-330, and images from DS-10/20F
OCT images from RS-3000, RS-3000 Advance, RS-3000 Lite, or RS-330
 Selecting or Canceling selection of image
Click a thumbnail image.

Selecting an image The clicked thumbnails are selected and their frames turn green.
Clicking thumbnails while pressing the Shift key can select a series of thumbnails.
Canceling the selection of Click the selected thumbnail.
an image The frame of the clicked thumbnail turns black.
Selection of patient eye / classification

Patient eye / classification can be selected and displayed.
For details, see “2.1.9 Classifying images” (page 159).
142
Display of sample and template

Sample images and report templates are displayed in the data display area.
Clicking the expansion button shows or hides the thumbnails.
Expansion button (Template)

Sample image
Expansion button (Sample image) Report template
143
2.1.1 Select image mode / Single display mode

The Select Image mode displays only the selected images.
The RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 image is displayed only in Single dis-
play mode.
• To display data in Select Image mode, Multi must be selected from Multi/Single in the menu
bar.
1 Click a thumbnail image.

The clicked thumbnails are selected and
their frames turn green.
2 Click the Forward button in the image control bar.

The selected images are displayed in
select image mode.
• With the Select Image mode, caption and image list can be displayed.
3 Click the Forward button in the image control bar.
144
Selected images are displayed in Single

display mode.
Clicking the Back button in the image control bar returns the mode from Single display mode to
Select display mode, and List display mode.
• In List display mode, the thumbnail size can be changed from among large/middle/small by
clicking the Image size from the Display menu.
• In List display image mode, the thumbnail image size can be changed between large/
middle/small with the Size button.
In Select Image mode, icons are displayed in the upper part of the image.
Image type Switches the image editing Cancels the image selection
• Even if the image editing is disabled in Select Image mode, when the mode is moved to
Single display mode, image editing becomes possible.
145
2.1.2 Scope display /Simple image processing

In Single display mode, magnifying the selected image or referring image using simple image pro-
cessing can be performed. In addition, the image which is processed result can be saved.
For the simple image processing, RGB display and red free imaging can be performed.
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 image, simple image processing

and contrast function (R)(G)(B) cannot be used.
• In drawing, processing, and measurement, the simple image processing function cannot be
used.
• When using the Simple image processing tool, image display may require noticeable time.
• If the displayed image become white, refresh the display with the Renewal button.
1 Select the desired image.
2 Click the Forward button in the image control bar to display in Select display mode
or Single display mode.
Scope display tool and Simple image processing tool are displayed.
Display switching button
Simple image data

processing
Scope setting tool
146
3 If necessary, change the Brightness, Contrast, and Magnification in the Scope setting
tool.
Drag the slider or use the Up/Down
Brightness
button to change.
The image in the image display area Contrast
changes as the setting is changed.
Contrast (R)
The Navigator displays the range dis- Contrast (G)
played in the Image Display area and
dragging the Image Display area can 2
Contrast (B)
move the display of Image Display
area.
Navigator
Zoom
• Navigator of the Scope Setting tool can be displayed only when in Single display mode.
Control bar
The following operations can be performed with the Display Switching button.
When this box is checked, the same operations are performed for all images
Interlock checkbox selected and displayed. This is enabled in Select display mode.
When interlocking again, the unsaved edited image may be cleared.
Reset Resets the setting to the initial state.
Fit Fits and displays the image to the size of the display area.
Original size Displays the image in the original size.

Displays the slider for setting the animation image switching speed.
Speed
Saves the changed image in the image display area. The image is saved
Save
with the same date as the original image.
The following buttons are enabled only in Single display mode.
First image Displays the first image when multiple images are selected.
Previous image Displays the previous image when multiple images are selected.
Next image Displays the next image when multiple images are selected.
Last image Displays the last image when multiple images are selected.
Starts the slide show of the images when multiple images are selected.
Play During the animation display, simple image processing is released.
Stop Stops the slide show of the images when multiple images are selected.
147
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 images, functions that can be

used are different.
For details, see “12 VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE” (page 365).
4 If necessary, select “No process”, “RGB”, “Red free”,

“Emboss+”, or “Emboss-” from the drop-down list on the
image control bar.
The selected image processing is executed.
No process Displays the image as it is without executing image processing.

Displays the image separately according to the Red, Green, and Blue channels.
RGB
This is not enabled in the F-10 image (black and white).
Displays the image without red channel.
Red free
This is not enabled in the F-10 image (black and white).
Emboss+ Displays the image converted to those into relief.
Displays the image with concavity and convexity reversed from the image
Emboss-
converted with “Emboss+”.
To restore the processing after executing "RGB", "Red free", "Emboss+", and "Emboss-",
select "No process".
RGB
148
Red free
Emboss+
Emboss-
149
• The RGB processed image is saved as a single image.

When dividing the channel with the Image Processing function of the Image Wizard, the image is
saved with each image of R, G and B.
• Performing Scope Processing and Simple Image Processing to one image at the same time
is not possible.
Simple Image Processing is performed to the original image.
It is possible to perform Scope Processing or Simple Image Processing to saved scope images.
• Emboss imaging of exceptionally large image files may fail due to lack of memory space.
If emboss imaging fails, reduce the image size or lower the digital camera image quality setting.
5 When saving the image in the Image displaying area, click the Save button .
When saving the Scope processed image, a Scope
Image icon is displayed on the Image List thumb-
nail.
Scope image icon
• When saving the image in the Image display area, click the Save button.
When changing the patient without clicking the Save button or changing from Single display
mode, the displayed image is not saved.
150
 Enlarging, reducing, and moving the image

In Select display mode and Single display mode, an image can be enlarged, reduced, par-
tially enlarged, or moved using a mouse.
Enlarge/Reduce An image can be enlarged or reduced using a mouse wheel.

When an image is displayed at less than 100% magnification, clicking the
mouse left button displays the mouse pointer area with a loupe at 100%
Partially enlarge
magnification.
To move the loupe, drag it.
2
Pressing and dragging the mouse right button or pressing and dragging the
mouse left button while pressing the [Shift] key can move an image.
Move When an image is displayed at 100% or more magnification, dragging the
mouse left button moves the image.
An image is movable when it is displayed larger than the Zoom Fit size.
Partially enlarged area with a loupe
• An image can be enlarged, reduced, or moved while the drawing function, image
processing, or image measurement function is activated.
The above is not possible on the Image Wizard screen.
151
2.1.3 Selecting or deselecting all images

All the images displayed as thumbnails can be selected or deselected by one operation.
1 Display the thumbnails in List mode.
2 Click All from the Edit menu.

The thumbnails are selected.
3 Click Deselect from the Edit menu.

The thumbnails are deselected.
• When video images of the F-10 are selected, only the video images are selected. When
OCT images are selected, only the OCT images are selected. When AFC or F-10 (static
image) is selected, images other than the video images of the F-10 or OCT images are
selected.
• When no image is selected, All is disabled.
• Clicking thumbnails while pressing the Shift key can select a series of thumbnails.
2.1.4 Displaying detailed information on images

The detailed information of the images can be displayed along with the thumbnail.
1 Display the thumbnails in the List mode (or single mode).
2 Click the Detail item from the View menu.

The detailed information is displayed on the right of the thumbnail.
To not to display the detailed information, click the Normal item from the View menu.
152
• For the AFC or RS-330 fundus images, shutter speed, capture light intensity, and ISO
sensitivity are indicated in Remarks of the detailed information.
• For the F-10 images, Capture mode, AP, and Focus are indicated in Remarks of the
detailed information.
Display example of Single display mode
Dragging the triangle on the upper-right of the detailed information changes the display posi-
tion.
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 fundus images, there is no

detailed display setting and the image information is always displayed.
For details, see “12 VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE” (page 365).
153
2.1.5 Displaying images at full screen size

An image can be displayed at the full screen size.
Multiple images can be selected to see them simultaneously as thumbnail or alternately in the full-size
screen.
Full-screen display (Single view)
1 Select the thumbnails in the Image List screen.

The thumbnail can be selected in each mode of Thumbnail List display/Select display/Single
display.
2 Click the FullScreen item from the View menu.

The image is displayed at full screen.
When the image is displayed at full screen from Select display mode, the image can be dis-
played at full screen with the multiple images are displayed. (Multi View)
The control bar is displayed when the mouse cursor is aligned on the lower part of the
screen.
Control bar
The following displays can be performed with the control bar on the Full Screen display.
Return Displays the view previous to the full size screen.
Single view Displays only an image.
154
Multi view Displays multiple images.

Changes display and non-display of the drawing data.
Markup For details, see “2.2.3 Markup” (page 163)
Changes display and non-display of the analysis result.
Analysis For details, see “2.2.4 Displaying analyzed results” (page 164)
Changes display and non-display of the caption.
Caption For details, see “2.2.2 Displaying images with caption” (page 163)
Checking this box expands or collapses the all images as with the
Interlock
selected image.
First image Displays the first image in the Single view.

2
Previous image Displays the previous image in the Single view.
Next image Displays the next image in the Single view.
Last image Displays the last image in the Single view.

Starts the slide show of the images in the Single view.
Play During the animation display, simple image processing is released.
Stop Stops the slide show of the images in the Single view.
Reset Resets the image to the initial state.
Page size Displays the entire image in the Single view.

When the image is displayed in Single display mode, the image is
Original size
displayed in the original size.
Magnificat Selects the magnification from drop-down list.

ion drop-down list
Sets the animation image switching speed.

Speed slider
• The control bar display position can be changed by dragging.

• The RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 OCT image cannot be displayed in
the full-screen.
 Mouse operation in enlarging or reducing the image
Enlarge/Reduce An image can be enlarged or reduced using a mouse wheel.

When an image is displayed at less than 100% magnification, clicking the
mouse left button displays the mouse pointer area with a loupe at 100%
Partially enlarge
magnification.
To move the loupe, drag it.
Pressing and dragging the mouse right button or pressing and dragging the
Move mouse left button while pressing the [Shift] key can move an image.
An image is movable when it is displayed larger than the Zoom Fit size.
155
 Toolbar display when acquiring the image (when connecting the AFC-230/210,
importing, and DCIM importing)
When the image is displayed at full-screen, the following toolbar is always displayed.
The displaying button functions as with when displayed at full-screen on the Image List
screen.
2.1.6 Comment of image

The comment of the image selected in the image display area can be changed.
• For the property (patient eye) and comment of the F-10 video image, click the Exam Info
button in the DVR screen to enter.
1 Click the thumbnail to set the comment.

Multiple comments can be set at the same time by clicking the multiple thumbnail.
2 Click the Comment item from the View menu.

The Image Comment dialog box appears.
Edit button
3 Enter comments.
Enter comments directly into the Editing box. Or select the registered comment from the tree
of the drop-down list.
156
Registration of item and comment

Edit with the Image Comment dialog box displayed by
clicking the Edit button. Register in a tree format of
Classification-Item-Comment.
To add a new item or comment

a. Select an item (classification) to which a comment (item) is added and
click the Comment button (Item button).
When adding a comment, specify the class in advance.
New Addition b. Enter a comment directly in the editing
box in the displayed Comment dialog
box and click the OK button.
c. Click the Close button.
To delete an item or comment

a. Designate the comment (or item) from the list box and click the Delete but-
ton.
Deletion
When deleting the item, all the comments registered in the item are
deleted.
b. Click the Close button.
To modify an item or comment
a. Select a comment (item) to be changed and click the Update button.
Change b. Change the contents of editing box of the displayed Comment dialog box
and click the OK button.
c. Click the Close button.
• According to the item of the image, enter the comments for each.
4 Click the Update button.

The comment is saved.
157
2.1.7 Deleting images

Click the thumbnails to select them.
Multiple images can be deleted at a time by selecting multiple images.
• The Movie data cannot be deleted on the Image List screen. Delete the data with the Delete
button on the DVR screen.
1 Click the Delete button on the image control bar. Then the Confirmation dialog box
appears. Click the Yes button.
The selected image is deleted.

As the deleted image is saved in the Recycle Manager temporarily, the image can be
restored later.
For the details of the Recycle Manager, see “1.19 Recycle Manager” (page 88)
2.1.8 Selecting the patient’s eye
1 Display the thumbnails in List display mode.
2 Select the patient’s eye with the patient eye radio button
(All Eye/OD/OS) in the image control bar.
The images of the selected eye are displayed.
158
2.1.9 Classifying images
1 Displays the thumbnail in List display mode.
2 Select the thumbnail and select “Group1” to

“Group3” from the menu displayed by right-clicking.
A classification icon is displayed in the right bottom

of the thumbnail of the selected image.
When canceling the classification, select “No

Group” from the menu displayed by right-clicking.
Classification icon
 Sorting the classified image

Switches display and non-display of the image clas-
sified with the Toolbar classification icon.
When the icon is clicked and opened, only the
image thumbnail of the group is displayed.
When the multiple classification is displayed, the
group order can be sort in ascending order and
descending order with the Sorting icon.
Displays all groups. Sort in descending order.
Sort in ascending order.

Displays the Group 1 images.
Displays the No Group images.
Displays the Group 2 images. Displays the Group 3 images.
159
2.1.10 Registering to Sample
• For display or non display of the sample, see “Display of sample” in “2.1 Image List Screen”
(page 139).
 Adding the Sample title
1 On the Image List screen, click to select the thumbnail of the image to be added to the
sample.
2 From the menu displayed by right-clicking the thumbnail, select Add to Sample and
select New.
The Sample dialog box appears.
3 Enter the sample title name and click the OK button.

The entered title is added to the Sample of the tree view. The registered sample image
thumbnail is displayed in the Image Display area.
 Adding the Sample
1 On the Image List screen, click to select the image to be added to the sample.
2 From the menu displayed by right-clicking the thumbnail, select Add to Sample and
select [title].
The selected image is added to the selected title.
 Deleting the Sample
1 On the Sample List screen, click to select the thumbnail to be deleted from the Sample
List screen.
2 From the menu displayed by right-clicking the thumbnail, select Delete from Sample.
The selected image is added to the selected title.
• Settings of sample can be performed with the Sample tab in the Setting dialog box.
Sorting of the title can be performed in the Setting dialog.
• New creation, deletion, and updating of the Sample title can be also performed by right-
clicking the sample item in the tree view in the same way.
160
2.1.11 Transferring images with the Communication function

Specifying the Communication function enables transferring the images selected on the Image List
screen.
• For the specification of the communication function, see “1.20.12 Link tab” (page 107).
• For the OCT images, the link function cannot be used by clicking on the thumbnail.
 Image transfer with the communication function 2

1 On the Image List screen, click and select the desired thumbnail to be transferred with
the communication function.
2 Right-click the thumbnail to open the menu.

Select “Link”.
3 Select the output method which is specified in the communication function.

The number of successful outputs is indicated.
Output with the communication function is not possible according to the output form due to
inconsistency of the specified contents or such.
161
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Displaying Images
2.2 Displaying Images
2.2.1 Displaying the image list

The image to display can be selected from the image list.
1 Select a thumbnail from the image list and click the Forward button .
The image is displayed in Select image mode.
2 Check “Image List” in the image control bar.

The image list is created under the image display area.
Image list
3 The images can be selected or deselected by dragging and dropping the images
between the image display area and the image list.
• The image can be added to the displayed image by dragging to the free space of the image.
162
2.2.2 Displaying images with caption
2 Check “Caption” in the image control bar.

The set caption is displayed on the image.
For the setting of the Caption, see “1.20.8 Image Caption tab” (page 98)
2.2.3 Markup
2 Check “Markup” on the image control bar.

Drawn data is displayed on the image.
The drawn data must be created previously to be displayed by this operation. For details,
see “5 DRAWING FUNCTION” (page 251).
163
2.2.4 Displaying analyzed results

The analyzed data by the optional analysis tool is displayed over the thumbnails.
• Distance conversion is not performed when the saving format is other than Jpeg+XML.
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 OCT image, the analytic result is
not displayed.
The image is displayed in the Select image mode.
2 Check “Analysis” in the image control bar.

The result of the image analysis is displayed.
The analyzed result must be created previously to be displayed by this operation. For the
detail, see “7 IMAGE MEASUREMENT” (page 295).
2.2.5 Capturing Screen

Saves the images displayed in the Image Display area with the Select display mode and Single dis-
play mode as another data. The multiple images compared status can be saved.
1 Display the image to be saved and click Screen Capture from the Edit menu.
The message “Saving image has been nor-
mally completed.” is displayed.
The data is classified as “ScreenShot” of the

day and saved.
164
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Image Wizard
2.3 Image Wizard
For the selected and displayed image, Panorama image creation, Stereo image creation, AF Compos-
ite, and Color composite can be performed.
* For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 OCT images, the Image Wizard
does not function.
2
2.3.1 Starting up the image wizard
1 Select the image to be processed for Image Wizard on the Image List screen.
2 Click [ImageWizard] - [Normal] from the [View] menu.

Various Processing function buttons and tools corresponding to each processing function
are displayed in the image control bar.
The processing function initially displayed can be selected in the Setup dialog box.
For the setting method, see “2.3.2 Setting of image wizard” (page 168)
• Instead of normal startup, selecting Panorama, Stereo view, AF composition, or Color

composition can activate each of them respectively.
3 Click the destination Processing Function button.

Refer to “8 PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION” (page 311) for details of
Panorama
the operation.
Stereo view Refer to “9 STEREO VIEWING” (page 347) for details of the operation.
Refer to “10 AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION” (page 353) for details of the

AF composition
operation.
165
Refer to “11 COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION” (page 359) for details of

Color composition
the operation.
 Image Wizard screen

Image control bar
Thumbnail area Toolbar and workspace
 Image control bar

The following buttons are common to each processing function.
Return Exits the Image Wizard.
Save Saves the image data.
Removes the displayed image from the target to be processed in the

Remove Image Wizard.
Setup dialog is displayed and the message can be displayed and the start-
Setup up screen can be set.
The following are the buttons to select the Processing function.
Panorama Displays the tool and workspace of the panorama function.
Displays the tool and workspace of the Stereo Viewing function.

Stereo view The image captured by Stereo Viewing function of fundus camera is required.
And for the Stereo Viewing, optional stereo viewer is required.
166
AF composition Displays the tool and workspace of the AF Composite function.
Color composition Displays the tool and workspace of the Color composite function.
On the right side of the Processing function button, the button specialized corresponding to the
selected processing function is displayed.
Panorama Navigator/ Color/ History/ Layer
Stereo view Navigator 2

AF composition It is not an AF Composite function.
Color composition It is not an Color Composite function.
Icons in the image control bar can be customized.

Select Setup and select Customize toolbar
from the menu to display the Customize dialog
box.
For the setting procedure, see “ Setting the
Toolbar Button (page 33)”
Select the data to be displayed by overlaying on the image.
Draw Data
Displays the drawing data overlaid on the displayed data.
Check box
Result
Displays the analysis result overlaid on the displayed image.
Check box
 Thumbnail area
The thumbnail of image selected on the Image List screen is displayed and click to select the image to
be processed.
 Toolbar and workspace

The tool corresponding to the selected function is displayed.
167
2.3.2 Setting of image wizard

Perform setting of Image Wizard screen. It is a common setting for the Panorama function, Stereo
Viewing function, AF Composite function, and Color Composite function.
1 Click the Setting button in the image control bar.

The Setup dialog box appears.
2 Set the message and the function at the time of start-up.

Messages
All messages are displayed. The confirmation dialog is displayed.
No messages are displayed. The confirmation dialog is not displayed.
Start-up function
Set the screen displayed when the Image Wizard button is clicked.
The function selected at the end Displays the last displayed screen of Image Wizard function.
Displays the set functions every time starting up.

The selected function
Select the function from the drop down list.
3 Click the OK button to close the Setup dialog box.
168
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Playing Back Movie
2.4 Playing Back Movie
Movie is played back in the DVR screen. Right after switching to the DVR screen, live image is dis-
played. To play back the Movie data, perform each playback operation after selecting the data. Play-
back operations other than Scene forward/backward and Frame forward/backward can be switched
anytime. Scene forward/backward and Frame forward/backward can be performed only when the
Movie is paused.
2
 Playback in normal display
1 Select the date of Movie to be displayed from the drop-down list.

Still images or Movie thumbnails of selected date are displayed.
2 Select the thumbnail of Movie to be played back.

The first frame of Movie is displayed in the image display and paused.
3 Click the Playback button.

The Movie start playing back and “Play” is displayed in the status display part.
4 Click the Stop button.

Stop playing back and switches to the live image.
169
 Playback in magnified display
1 Select the date of Movie to be displayed from the drop-down list.

Still images or Movie thumbnails of selected date are displayed.
2 Select the thumbnail of Movie to be played back.

The first frame of Movie is displayed in the image display and paused.
3 Click the Magnify button.

Switches to the magnified display.
4 Click the Playback button.

The Movie start playing back.
5 Click the Stop button.

Stop playing back and switches to the live image.
6 Click the Return button.

The Movie switch to the normal display.
170
 Operation during playing back

Various displays other than normal playback can be performed with the record/play controls.
Record Stop Playback Track forward/backward
High-speed playback
2
Scene forward/backward
Pause
Time backward (-) Frame forward/backward Time forward (+)
Record button Starts recording. During recording, live image is displayed.

Stop button Stops recording or playing. When stopped, switches to live image.
Playback button Plays back Movie.
Changes track (Movie) when multiple sets of Movie is recorded.
Track forward/backward button The highlight in the Movie display moves and the track number in the status
display part changes accordingly.
High-speed playback button Plays back forward or reverse in high-speed.

Moves the playback position forward or backward one scene. The scene
Scene forward/backward button
Scene backward can be used only when the file format of Movie is set to DV-
AVI.
Pause button Pauses playing back.

Moves the playback position forward or backward one frame. The frame
Frame forward/backward button
Moves the playback position forward or backward in time intervals. The
Time forward/backward button
specificable times are 1 second, 5 seconds, and 30 seconds.
The playback position bar moves to the clicked position and the image of
Playback position bar
the position is displayed.
171
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Editing Movie
2.5 Editing Movie
To edit Movie data, perform clip creation and cutting out.
• The definition of a clip is from the starting point (In point) and ending point (Out point) of the
necessary section extracted from the Movie data.
• When cutting out the Movie data, an interval of one or more seconds must be set.
2.5.1 Creating clips
1 Select a thumbnail of Movie that creates a clip.

The first frame of the Movie is displayed in the Movie display and paused.
2 Click the Clip Make button.
Clip Make button
172
The Select Clip Title dialog box appears. Select a clip title and click the OK button.
• Registration of clip title is performed in the Clip Title tab of the Setting dialog box displayed
by clicking the Setting button.
2
The Clip control area enters edit mode and all the playback position bar turns orange
(selected status). (The color may depends on the monitor used.)
3 Use the buttons or Playback position bar in the Playback area to display the clip starting
point (In point).
173
4 Click the In point button to define the In point.
In point button
5 Use the buttons or Playback position bar in the Playback area to display the clip ending
point (Out point).
6 Click the Out point button to define the Out point.
Out point button
174
7 Click the Set button to complete the clip creation.
Set button
Clip creation is completed and the range defined with the clip is displayed in light blue in the
Playback position bar. (The color may depends on the monitor used.)
• A maximum of nine clips can be created. The created clips are named Clip 1 to 9.
• A clip that crosses or overlaps other clip cannot be created.
175
2.5.2 Selecting clips
1 Select a thumbnail of clip created Movie.

The first frame of the Movie is displayed in the Image display and paused.
2 Click the clip selection button.

The list of created clips are displayed in the drop-down list.
Clip selection
button
176
3 Select clip from the list.

The clip control area enters edit mode and the selected clip is displayed in orange in the
playback position bar.
2.5.3 Deleting clips
1 Select a thumbnail of clip that created Movie and select clip to be deleted.
Clip control area enters edit mode and selected clip is displayed in orange in playback posi-
tion bar.
2 Click the Clip Delete button.

A confirmation message appears.
177
3 Click the OK button of the Delete Clip dialog box.

The clip is deleted. For the remaining clips, the name Clip 1 to 9 are allocated again from the
left of the Playback position bar in order.
2.5.4 Editing clips
1 Select a thumbnail of the clip that created Movie and select the clip to be edited.
The clip control area enters edit mode and the selected clip is displayed in orange in the
Playback position bar.
178
2 Move the playback position and click the In point button.

The In point is redefined.
In point button
3 Move the Playback position and click the Out point button.
The Out point is redefined.
Out point button
179
2.5.5 Cutting out clip
1 Select a thumbnail of the clip created Movie.

The first frame of the Movie is displayed in the Image display part and paused.
Clip Cut button
2 Click the Clip Cut button.

The Clip Cut dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the OK button in the Clip Cut dialog box.

A confirmation message appears.
Checking “The clip is joined” combines the cut out Movie into Movie.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels the clip cutting out.
4 Click the Save or Delete button in the Check dialog box.

Clicking either button starts clip cutting out.
Save button Cuts out clip with the original Movie saved.
Delete button Cuts out clip with the original Movie deleted.
180
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Printing Image Data
2.6 Printing Image Data
Images can be printed in any of following methods.
Print The selected image is printed out in the standard format.

The selected image in the standard format is displayed in the preview screen.
Preview The selected image and layout can be changed as necessary. Click the Print
button to print out the data.
CAUTION • While the message “Please wait” is displayed, do not use the mouse or keyboard. 2
• When no printer is set up, this function cannot be used.

• Important point to note related to printouts:
The tone of printouts produced from printers may vary according to the used monitor and
printer.
2.6.1 Printing selected images

When Print is selected from the File menu, the selected image is printed in the default setting. The
image is printed out in the standard format.
1 Select an image data to be printed on the Image List screen.

It can also be performed from the Recycle Manager screen.
• Fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330, DS-10/20 images, and OCT images
cannot be selected at the same time.
To print the fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330 and OCT images in the same for-
mat, perform the custom report using a template. For details, see “3 CUSTOM REPORT” (page
201).
2 For fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330 and the DS-10/20 images, select
Print from the File menu. For OCT images, click the Forward button and display the
images in the Viewer screen, then select Print from the File menu.
The images are printed out in the standard format specified for each image type and accord-
ing to the values specified in “2.6.3 Print setting” (page 187).
When “Select the settings when performing print-

ing” is selected in the print setting, the “Confir-
mation of the print setting” screen appears.
Clicking the Print button after specifying the print
setting prints the setting.
The specified print setting is used for the printer

to be used.
For details, see “2.6.3 Print setting” (page 187).
181
2.6.2 Print from preview screen

Before printing, confirm the print format and layout in the preview screen.
1 Select an image data to be printed on the Image List screen.

It can be also performed from the Recycle Manager screen.
• Fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330, the DS-10/20 images, and OCT images
cannot be selected at the same time.
To print the fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330 and OCT images in the same for-
mat, perform the custom report using a template. For details, see “3 CUSTOM REPORT” (page
201).
2 For fundus images captured by the AFC/F-10/RS-330 and the DS-10/20 images, select
Preview from the File menu. For OCT images, click the Forward button and display
the images in the Viewer screen, then select Preview from the File menu.
The print preview is activated and is displayed on the screen.
• The captured date is displayed under the image.
• For the fundus images or the DS-10/20 images, the image displayed in the Viewer screen is
displayed for print preview.
Printing of the drawing data and analysis results can also be toggled between ON and OFF
in the image list screen.
• For OCT images, even when multiple images are selected, the image displayed in the
Viewer screen is displayed in the preview screen.
182
3 Select printing of the patient information and image information.

The preview is displayed with the initial print setting.
Displayed information check box
Patient information 2
Image information
4 Specify the print layout in the Layout field.
5 Replace the image or rearrange images in the print preview as necessary.
6 Select Print from the File menu.

The image is printed out as displayed in the preview screen.
7 To use link transfer, select “Setting” and “Link Reservation” from the menu to perform link
transfer reservation.
183
In accordance with the link transfer setting, the image is

transferred when the preview screen is closed.
A confirmation message appears. Clicking the Yes button
transfers the image.
The transferred data is saved as the current-day report.
If the link transfer is reserved in multiple print previews,
the images are transferred collectively when the print pre-
view screen is closed.
8 To exit the preview screen, click the Return button in the toolbar.
The screen previous to the preview screen is displayed.
 Layout
Select the image layout from the image layout
drop-down list.
1x1 Lays out an image on a page.

1x2 Lays out images in a row and two columns.
2x1 Lays out images in two rows and a column.
2x2 Lays out images in two rows and two columns.
3x3 Lays out images in three rows and three columns.
Lays out images according to the layout set in the Print Setting screen.
User
For the Print Setting screen, see “2.6.3 Print setting” (page 187).
 Navigate buttons
To print two or more pages, the displayed page is changed with
the navigate button.
Displays the first page.

Displays the previous page.
Displays the next page.
Displays the last page.
184
 Magnification selection drop-down menu

Select the magnification of the page displayed in the print pre-
view from 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, Page Width, or Page Fit.
Page Width and Page Fit can be selected also with the buttons on the side of the magnifica-
tion field.
2
Page Fit The entire page is displayed.
Page Width The entire width of the page is displayed.
 Image list
Using the image list, the images can be selected or replaced.
Image list Displays the image list at the bottom of the screen.
Image list
By dragging an image in the print preview and dropping it on the image list, the image is removed
from the preview temporarily.
By dragging and dropping a thumbnail in the image list, it can be placed at desired areas.
• When an image is dragged and dropped to or from the image list, a blank page on which no
image is placed may be automatically created.
Set “Page Range” to “Current Page” in the Print Setting screen to remove the blank page. For
details, see “2.6.3 Print setting” (page 187).
185
 Displayed information checkbox

The Patient and Image Info checkboxes are displayed. The selected items are displayed.
Patient information (name, ID, date of birth (age), print date, and sex) is
Patient
displayed at the upper part of the sheet.
The selected image information is displayed at the bottom left of the sheet.
Image Info Date, Eye, Image Type, and Image Comments can be selected.
The size of the characters can be selected from Large, Medium, and Small.
• Selection of the checkboxes can be changed in the Print Setting screen.

• For fundus images captured by the AFC series/F-10/RS-330 and the DS-10/20 images,
when any of the boxes are checked in the Print Setting screen or in the screen previous to
the preview screen, the selected items are displayed.
 Clear
Clear Moves all the images to the image list.
186
2.6.3 Print setting

Print setting is performed in the print preview screen. Direct printing and the initial setting of the print
preview at the time of activation are set.
1) Display the desired image data in the print preview.

2) From the Setting menu, click “Print Setting”.
The Print Setting screen is displayed.
• The setting of “Image Layout” is effective when “User” is selected for the Layout setting in
the preview screen.
3) Select the pattern name from SET1 to

SET4.
Four pattens of print settings can be saved. Set
the direct printing to SET1.
To change the pattern name, click the Change

button to display the “Enter the pattern name.”
dialog, and enter the desired pattern name.
4) Enter a title in the Title field.

When setting the size, font, and position of the
title, perform setting in the Footer Item Setup dia-
log box displayed by clicking the Setup button.
For detailed setting of the font, set with the Font
dialog box displayed by clicking the Set button in
the Font field.
187
5) Set the number of the rows and columns in the Image layout frame.
6) Set the space of the image and space of the page.
7) Select the settings for the printer in the Printer Setup field.
Set “Printer”, “Paper Size”, “Orientation”, and “Page Range”.
8) Select the information to print in the Selects Print Items field.

Select from “Patient” and “Image Info”.
Patient information (name, ID, date of birth (age), print date, and sex) is
Patient
displayed at the upper part of the sheet.
The selected image information is displayed at the bottom left of the sheet.
Image Info Date, Eye, Image Type, and Image Comments can be selected.
The size of the characters can be selected from Large, Medium, and Small.
9) Select “Mask trimming” to be performed.

By checking “Trim the Mask Data.”, printing is conducted with the captured image background
mask trimmed.
Trimming is not performed for the edited image, scope image, and anterior segment image.
• Trimming is not performed for the image captured with the AFC-330/210/RS-330 whose
masking type is Hardware.
For the masking type, see “8.4.3 Mask tab” (page 335).
10) For the changed setting to be effective for the next printing and later, click the “Set to default” button
to save the setting.
To use the changed setting for the current image only, the “Set to default” button does not need to
be clicked.
11) To set another pattern, repeat the procedure from Step 3).
If any setting has not been saved, a confirmation
message appears.
12) To save multiple patterns and select one at the time of printing, check “Select the settings when
performing printing”.
When the setting is checked, clicking the Print

button displays the “Confirmation of the print
setting” screen where the desired patten can be
selected.
13) When the setting is complete, click the OK button to close the Print Setting screen.
188
 Header/Footer Setup
Set the contents indicated at the header and footer.
• The positions where the header and footer are printed can be set in the Page Margins field
on the Print Setting screen.
1) Click Header/Footer from the Setting menu.

The Header/Footer Setup dialog box appears.
Reload button Font setting tool

Master button 2
2) Enter the contents to be indicated in the Header or Footer field.

Clicking each field displays a text cursor. Enter the desired characters from a keyboard.
To enter the Master items, click the Master button to display the menu. In the entry fields, vari-
ables corresponding to each Master item are indicated.
Type, style, or color of the font can be set with the Font setting tool at the upper left of the dialog
box. The tool functions the same as Text Editor.
Clicking the Reload button returns to the initial state.
3) Click the OK button on the Header/Footer Setup dialog box.

Use the Preview button to confirm the display without closing the dialog box.
189
DISPLAYING IMAGES: Export
2.7 Export
2.7.1 Exporting images

The image data can be exported (converted into the file format readable in the other systems).
The available export modules are as follows:
Starts the application software specifying the bitmap format and JPEG format
data.
Export bitmap file(s) Image data is exported in the Bitmap format.
Export ClipBoard(s) Saves the image data into the clipboard of the computer.
Export image file(s) Outputs the image data as the file format saved in the NAVIS-EX.
Export jpeg file(s) Image data is exported in the JPEG format.
Outputs the image data, patient information, photographing information and
Export Report file(s) comment with report format.
Preview is displayed before saving and the comment can be entered.
To use Exporting function, export module setting is required.

For the setting of the export module, see “1.20.10 Export tab” (page 101).
The procedures in the following is the case when exporting the images of the AFC-330/230/210, fun-
dus images (color/FAF) of the RS-330, the Still images of the F-10, or the DS-10/20 images from the
Image List screen.
For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330 images, export images from the Viewer
screen and the Follow-Up screen of the OCT image.
For the OCT image exporting, see “12.15 Exporting OCT Images” (page 460).
1 Display or select the image to be exported.

* Exporting can be performed for both Single display and List display.
* In List display mode, multiple images can be exported if multiple images are selected at the
same time.
2 When the Export button is clicked, usable

export modules are displayed on the lower part of
the button. Click to select the export module to be
used.
190
Or from the pop-up menu displayed by right click-

ing of the image, click the export module to be
used.
When “Export Report file(s)” is selected, preview

is displayed before export is performed.
The images are exported.
When “When exporting, the dialog to be saved is displayed.” is checked, the Save As dialog
box to be saved is displayed before exporting.
Enter the file name and click the Save button to perform exporting.
191
 Export Report file

When “Export Report file” is selected, the preview is displayed.
• According to the setting of Server Manager, Race can be displayed.
Enter comments as necessary and click the Save button to perform exporting.
Enter comment with keyboard or click the Comment button to select from the Comment dialog box.
In the Comment dialog box, click the comment
list to select and click the OK button to enter.
To add a new class (or comment) to the

list, enter a desired class (or comment)
in the edit box under the Class (or
Comment) list box, and click the Add
button.
When adding comments, specify the
class in advance.
To delete a class (or comment), desig-
nate the class (or comment) from the
list box and click the Delete button.
When deleting a class, all comments
registered in the class are deleted.
To modify a class (or comment), designate the class (or comment) from the list box, enter a
new class (or comment) in the edit box and click the Edit button.
To change the order in which classes (or comments) are listed in the box, designate a class
(or comment) in the list box and click the Up and Down buttons.
192
2.7.2 Exporting movies

Saves Movie to the specified folder.
Export button
Select a thumbnail of exporting Movie on the DVR screen and click the Export button.
• Specify the folder to be exported with the Export tab of the Setting dialog box displayed by
clicking the Set button.
193
DISPLAYING IMAGES: E-mail Sending Function
2.8 E-mail Sending Function
The Export Report file is sent by e-mail.

The file is zipped to send.
CAUTION • If Japanese is used for the name of the address, title, or name of the sender, sent
e-mails may not be properly displayed depending on the mail server or mail
software of the receiver. In such a case, use alphabet for the name of the address,
title, and name of the sender.
2.8.1 Setting e-mail sending

To use e-mail sending function, perform e-mail address, server, and certification setting in advance.
To perform setting, contract with provider is required.
1 On the Image List screen, select Setting from the Setup menu to display the Configura-
tion dialog box.
2 Click the Export tab to display the Export dialog box.
3 Select the Exporting name (Function Name) to use e-mail sending and click the Edit but-
ton.
Export Report file must be used for Module Name.
When registering newly, refer to “1.20.10 Export tab” (page 101).
4 Click the Detail button to display Report export dialog box.
5 Check the Mail Sending in the Setting Mail

field and click the Mail button to display the
Server Setup dialog box.
6 Perform Mailer setting to send e-mail.
SMTP Server Enter the contracted SMTP server (e-mail sending server) address.
Port No. Enter the SMTP server Port.
Enter the sender e-mail address.
Mail Address
The e-mail address connects to the SMTP server acquired by contract.
Name Enter the sender name.
194
Setting SMTP Authentication
Check when performing POP3 server authentication.

POP before SMTP E-mail receiving setting is required. Receive tab is displayed and perform receiving
setting.
When the attached file exceeds regulation size, a Warning message appears
before sending.
It Warns About Attached Clicking the OK button stops sending e-
File Size Exceeded mail and closes the message.
2
Check when performing authentication when connecting to the SMTP server.
SMTP Authentication
The User ID is for connecting to the SMTP server acquired by contract.
When the “SMTP Authentication” checkbox is

checked, the User ID and Password entering
field is displayed.
When the “Save Password” checkbox is

checked, the Password field becomes
enterable. Enter password if skipping entering
the password when connecting to the SMTP
server.
POP3 server authentication

When sending e-mail, perform settings to connect to the POP3 server for authentication.
When the “POP before SMTP” checkbox is
checked, the Receive tab is displayed. Per-
form receiving settings.
195
POP3 Server Enter contracted POP3 server (receiving e-mail server) address.
Port No. Enter the POP3 server Port.
User ID Used for connecting POP3 server acquired by contract.
Enter the password acquired by contract.

When the “Save Password enables the password field imputable” is checked, the
Password
Password field becomes inputtable. When skipping entering the password when
connecting to the POP3 server, enter the password.
• Each setting related to Receive is a setting for POP3 server authentication. E-mail cannot
be received with the NAVIS-EX.
2.8.2 Sending e-mails
1 Display or select the image to be exported.

* The image can be export by both Single display and List display.
* In List display mode, when selecting multiple thumbnail images, multiple images can be
exported at the same time.
2 Clicking the Export button displays usable export module

on the lower part of the button. Click and select the export
module to be used.
Select export module that Export Report file is set as use
module.
The preview is displayed.
196
3 Enter comments in the comment field as

necessary and click the Send Mail button
to display the Send Mail dialog box.
4 Enter address, subject, and text.

Clicking the Address button or Template button displays the entering support tool.
Or enter each box directly.
5 Click the Send button.

When the POP3 authentication is set, a screen entering
password opens and enter the password.
Enter a password and click the OK button.
When SMTP authentication is set, a dialog entering

password opens and enter the password.
Enter a password and click the OK button.
197
2.8.3 Registering addresses

Enter e-mail address using Address button. It is registered when using the same address repeatedly.
 New registration
1 In the Mail Send dialog box, click the

address button to display the Mail
Address Select/Edit dialog box.
2 Click the Add button to display the New dialog

box.
3 Enter Name and Mail Address field and click the OK button.
The settings are added to the Mail Address List.
 Selecting e-mail address
1 Check the e-mail address to be selected.

Multiple e-mail addresses can be
selected.
E-mail address that may be set in the
“To:” field of Send Mail dialog box are
displayed in the preceding column of the
Mail Address List field.
Clicking the Clear Selection button
clears selection of all the checked
addresses.
2 Click the OK button to finalize.

The selected address is entered in the To field of Send Mail dialog box.
198
 Other operations
Edit or delete the e-mail address.
Displays the Name of selected address and editing dialog changing e-mail
Edit button
address.
Deletes the selected address.

Delete button
A message to confirm the deletion appears. Click the Yes button to delete.
2.8.4 Registering templates

Enter template into the Subject or Body field using the Template button. It is registered when sending
the same e-mail repeatedly.
1 In the Mail Send dialog box, click the

Template button to display the Template
dialog box.
2 Enter Subject, Header, Body and Footer

3 From the next e-mail sending, the tem-

plate registered in the Mail Send dialog
box will be displayed.
199
200
3. CUSTOM REPORT
3.1 Custom Report Operating Procedure
A report of various images, color maps, and analysis charts is displayed in a registered template.
In addition, templates can be registered for custom report.
For setting of the template, see “3.1.5 Custom Report screen” (page 212).
3.1.1 Explanation on report display screen 3

The report is displayed in the selected template.
(1) Menu bar Display switching button (3) Shape button
(2) Edit button

Image
control bar
Patient information
Tree view
Scope setting tool

(4) Workspace
(1) Menu bar

The menu shown below is available.
The buttons on the tool bar corresponding to the available menu can be used.
File Logout, Close, Export, Preview, Print
Edit Screen Capture
201
CUSTOM REPORT: Custom Report Operating Procedure
View Renewal, OCT Capture (depending on license), Recycle, Back
Setting Setting, Administrator Setting, Template Setting, Customize Toolbar
Help About
(2) Edit button

Images and objects in the work sheet are edited. In addition, the report is transferred to the linked device.
Delete Deletes the selected image and shape.
Redo Cancels the previous undo.
Arrange Sets the arrangement, order and grouping of the selected image or shape.
Overlay Re-edits registration images.
Setting Sets the selected shape (line, image, square, text box).
Link Transfers reports with the communication function.
(3) Shape button

Adds an object (line, image, square, text box) to the workspace by dragging and dropping. After adding an
object, its attributes are edited in the workspace.
The operation is the same as template setting. For details, see “3.1.8 Editing shapes” (page 216).
Line Adds lines.
Image Adds images.
Square Adds squares.
Text box Adds text boxes.
(4) Workspace
A report is displayed. The report can also be edited temporarily.
Reports can be edited in the same manner as templates. However, images cannot be added to them.
The entire report is displayed in the screen. No portion of it can be enlarged.
Other tools on the screen
The screen changes in the same manner as the Patient List screen and
Tree view
image list screen. The report display screen is closed.
Scope setting tool Disabled
Image control bar Disabled
Display switching button Disabled
Patient information display Displays the patient information of the selected patient.
202
3.1.2 Displaying report

Select the desired template and measurement data to display a report in the report display screen.
From the report display screen, the report can be printed, and the data can be output.
1 Select the patient to display the image list screen.
2 Select the thumbnail of the desired template shown along the top of the screen.
By selecting a template, selection of the image is canceled.
3
Template thumbnail
3 Click the Forward button, or double-click the thumbnail.
4 A list of examination data selected for the report display is shown in the “Image Selection
for Report” screen.
Examination data of the latest date and time is selected for each image type.
• If there is no examination data for image

types used for the report, an operation result
message “No data that can be displayed in
the selected template found. Return to the
image list screen.” is displayed.
Click the OK button to return to the image list
screen.
203
Display of “Image Selection for Report” screen
List of examination data used

for report
Information on examination
data selected in the list
After changing the date and

time, clicking the Update but-
ton updates the list.
Fundus image of examination data selected in the list
5 Check the information of the automatically selected examination data. As necessary,

change the date and time of the examination data.
The selection of image cannot be changed after advancing to the report display screen. If
the selection of image needs to be changed, the complete the selection in the “Image Selec-
tion for Report” screen.
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(1) Examination data selected in the “Image Selection for Report” screen
The fundus image and examination information are displayed in the lower part of the screen.
(2) Display of an image type without examination data

The Date and Time fields are blank, and “No target data” is displayed in the Comment field.
For images without data, “NO IMAGE” is displayed in the report.
(3) An asterisk “*” appears if the date of the latest data selected by default is changed.
(4) An icon appears for the examination data used as the registration image.
204
To change the date and time of the examination data, select from the drop-down menu. After
the change, click the Update button.
Click the Update button every time the examination data is changed.
3
6 Clicking the OK button closes the “Image Selection for Report” screen, and displays the
report display screen.
Depending on the previous operation, a confirmation message is displayed before the report
display screen.
Examination data of a different date is being selected.

To display the report without changing the date, click the OK
button.
To change the date, click the Cancel button to return to the
“Image Selection for Report” screen.
After changing the date of examination data, the OK button

was clicked without clicking the Update button.
To display the report without changing the date, click the OK
button.
To change the date, click the Cancel button to return to the
“Image Selection for Report” screen.
After displaying the message “Please wait.”, the report of the selected template is displayed.
205
When any part of the Images without data are displayed as “NO
measurement data is not IMAGE”.
available
When there is a registration A message for editing the registration image is displayed.
image Clicking the OK button displays the Registration screen.
See “3.2 Editing Registration Image” (page 227).
When editing of the registration image is finished, the report is
displayed.
206
7 If necessary, change the layout temporarily.

The layout changed in the report display screen is effective only to the report that is being
displayed.
To change the layout permanently, edit the layout in the Template Setting screen.
Edit buttons / Shapes field
Editing of object (image, shape)

The object (image, shape) can be edited in the same manner as creation of the template.
However, images cannot be added. For details, see “3.1.5 Custom Report screen” (page
212).
Changing display of registration image

The display size and range of the registration image can be changed.
Enlargement Place the pointer on the image, and use the mouse wheel to enlarge
or reduce the image.
Changing the display range Place the pointer on the image, and right-drag to change the display
range.
This operation is available when the image is enlarged.
207
Re-editing of registration image

Clicking the Overlay button allows you to re-edit the registration images.
The Registration screen is displayed with its positioning canceled. To edit the registration image,
see “3.2 Editing Registration Image” (page 227).
Placing the pointer on the registration image displays the contents of the two sets of used
examination data in two lines.
3.1.3 Printing and link transfer of report

In the report display screen, printing, print preview, and link transfer function can be performed. The
displayed report is not automatically saved to the NAVIS-EX database. To save the report, perform the
procedure below.
• To export a report, see “3.1.4 Exporting Report” (page 210).
1 To print the report, select File and Print.

The specified print setting is used for the printer to be used.
2 To print the report after checking the print preview, select “File” and “Preview”.
In the print preview, the print form including the header and footer, patient information, and
image information can be checked. With the link reservation function, link transfer can be
performed with the previewed form.
For the operation of print preview, see “2.6.2 Print from preview screen” (page 182).
208
Images can be added using the Layout function. However, images can be added only to the
single report that is being displayed.
3 To output the report, click the Link button.

The specified data is output in accordance with the setting of the communication function
setting. In link transfer, only the contents of the report are output. The header and footer,
patient information, and image information are not output.
4 Click the Back button to return to the image list screen.
209
3.1.4 Exporting Report

Exports the image data to the external devices (convert the file format which can be read with other
systems).
The exporting module “Export Report file(s)” cannot be used for exporting reports.
Displays a bitmap format or JPEG format data by starting the specified

application.
Export bitmap file(s) Output the displayed image data as a bitmap format.
Export ClipBoard(s) Saves the displayed image data in the computer clipboard.
Outputs the displayed image data as the original file format saved in the
Export image file(s)
NAVIS-EX.
Export jpeg file(s) Outputs the displayed image data as a JPEG format.
To use the Export function, the exporting modules are necessary to be set.
The setting of the Exporting function is standard system setting in the NAVIS-EX. For details,
see “2.7 Export” (page 190).
• Even when “Output Caption” and “Output Title” are checked for the setting of exporting
module, neither “Caption” nor “Title” is displayed on the image.
• Even when “Save patient data when exporting a picture” is checked in for the setting of the
export modules, “Export bitmap file(s)”, “Export image file(s)”, or “Export jpeg file(s)”, no
patient data is saved.
1 Select an image to be exported and display in the report display screen.
2 Display the image as you want it to be exported.
3 From the file menu, select “Export” and select an

exporting module to be used.
The image is exported.
210
Example of the output data
For the setting of exporting module, when “Display saving dialog box when output” is
checked, the Save As dialog box is displayed before exporting.
Enter the file name and click the Save button executes the exporting.
211
3.1.5 Custom Report screen

Templates used for report are created and edited in this screen.
(1) Template edit buttons (2) Edit buttons
(3) Display check boxes (6) Shapes field
(4) Template list (5) Workspace (7) Image list
(1) Template edit buttons
Back Closes the Custom Report screen.
NEW (H) Creates a new, horizontally-oriented template.
NEW (V) Creates a new, vertically-oriented template.
Delete Deletes the selected template.
Copy Copies the selected template to create a new template.
Import Imports a template.
Export Exports a template.
212
(2) Edit buttons
Save Saves the displayed template.
Delete Deletes the selected image and shape.
Arrange Sets the arrangement, order and grouping of the selected image or shape.
Changes the setting of the selected shape (line, image, square, text box) and
Setting registration image.
(3) Display check boxes
Hides the thumbnails of template list. The list of only the template names is 3
Template Name Only
displayed.
Gridlines Gridlines are displayed in the template.
(4) Template list

The template displayed in the workspace is selected.
To change the order in which the template thumbnails (or template names) are displayed, drag them. To change the
template name, double-click the template thumbnail (or template name) to display the Template Name Settings
screen.
(5) Workspace
Images and objects can be arranged and edited on the template.
(6) Shapes field

Adds an object (line, image, square, text box) to the workspace by dragging and dropping. After adding an
object, its attributes are edited in the workspace.
Adds lines.
In the screen displayed by clicking the Setting button, specify the width and color of the
Line line.
The lines are moved and changed on the workspace.
Adds images.
In the screen displayed by clicking the Setting button, select the image file.
Image Image files in the jpg, jpeg, png, or bmp format can be selected.
The images can be moved and changed on the workspace.
Adds squares.
In the screen displayed by clicking the Setting button, fill the square with a color, or specify
Square the square line width and color.
The squares are moved and changed on the workspace.
Adds text boxes.
In the screen displayed by clicking the Setting button, input texts. The settings such as the
Text box text font, size, and character formatting can be specified.
The text box can be moved and its shape can be changed on the workspace.
(7) Image list

The type of the image is displayed in the form of a tree. Image types can be added to the template by
dragging and dropping.
213
3.1.6 New registration of template

Templates used for report can be created.
1 From the Setting menu, click “Template Setting”.

The Custom Report screen is displayed. The layout of the template displayed at the top of
Template List is displayed.
2 Depending on the form of the template to be created, select the New (H) or New
(V) button.
Once the creation of a new template is started, the orientation of the layout cannot be
changed.
3 Input the template name in the Template

Name Settings screen, then click the OK but-
ton.
A blank template is displayed in the work-
space. In addition, a thumbnail is added to the end of Template List.
A thumbnail is added.
4 Create a template using the edit tools.

Create a template using the combination of images and shapes.
Image Expand the tree of Image List, then select the image to place in the template. Placing
the cursor on the image name displays the image. In this status, drag and drop the
image on the workspace.
For details, see “3.1.7 Editing images” (page 216) and “3.1.9 Arranging images and shapes”
(page 219).
Shape Drag and drop the button in the Shapes list to the workspace.
For details, see “3.1.8 Editing shapes” (page 216) and “3.1.9 Arranging images and shapes”
(page 219).
After placing the object (image, shape), edit the settings such as the position and size.
214
To delete the arranged object, select it and click the Delete button .
Arrange the objects on the workspace.
5 After completing the template, click the Save button .
Saving it changes the thumbnail.
6 Click the Back button to close the Custom Report screen.

If any template has not been saved, a confirma-
tion message appears.
Clicking the Yes button saves the template, and
closes the Custom Report screen.
215
3.1.7 Editing images

The position and size of the image arranged in the template can be edited.
1 Place the pointer on the arranged image so that the

pointer becomes a cross ( ). Then drag the image to
change its position.
Clicking an image selects it (indicated with a green frame),
and enables the Delete button and Arrange button
.
The image cannot be moved to positions where any part of

the image is outside the workspace. At places where drop-
ping is not allowed, the pointer becomes .
2 To change the image size, place the pointer on any corner

of it so that the pointer becomes a bidirectional arrow
( ). Then drag the image to change its size.
The image size is changed without changing its aspect
ratio.
3.1.8 Editing shapes

The shapes (line, image, square, text box) arranged on the template can be edited.
1 Place the pointer on the arranged shape so that the pointer becomes a cross ( ) or
bidirectional arrow ( ). Then drag the shape to change its position and size.
Move Enlarge horizontally

Enlarge vertically and horizontally
Move
Movement of start and
end points
216
At the same time, the shape becomes selected (indicated with a green frame, or anchor
points), and enables the Setting button .
The shape cannot be enlarged or reduced while maintaining its aspect ratio. Edit it while
checking the screen.
2 In the screen displayed by clicking the Setting button , specify the attributes of the
shape.
3 When the setting is complete, click the OK button to close the setting screen.
Line setting
The width and color of lines can be specified.
Line width: Direct input or input using ▲ or ▼ button

3
Line color
Image setting
Select the image in the Open dialog
box. Clicking the Open button dis-
plays an image fitted to the image
frame.
To change the image, select an
image again, and overwrite the cur-
rent one.
When the image is acquired, the

selected image is displayed in place
of “NO IMAGE”.
217
• If the image to be displayed cannot be loaded, an error

message appears when the report is displayed. In such a
case, set the image again.
Square
The square can be filled, or the width and color of its lines can be specified.
Line width:
Direct input or
input using ▲ or ▼ button
No fill / Solid fill

Line color
Color for filling
Text box
Texts can be added in the Text Box Set-
tings screen. Replace the default text
“TextBox”.
To change the text settings (font, style,

size, character formatting, and character
set), change them in the screen displayed
by clicking the Font button.
218
3.1.9 Arranging images and shapes

The arrangement, stacking order, and grouping of the
objects (image, shape) can be specified.
Align Align Objects Left Moves (Aligns) the selected objects on the workspace.
When multiple objects are selected, they are moved
Align Objects Center (aligned) within the square that includes all of them.
Align Objects Right
Align Objects Top 3

Align Objects Middle
Align Objects Bottom
Distribute Horizontally Changes the widths of multiple selected images to the

widest one.
Distribute Vertically Changes the heights of multiple selected images to the

highest one.
Order Objects Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the front of all overlapped
objects.
Bring Forward Moves the selected object one place forward.
Send Backward Moves the selected object one place backward.
Send to Back Moves the selected object to the back of all overlapped
objects.
Group Objects Group Groups multiple selected objects.

The grouped objects are selected with a single frame, and
edited as a single object.
Ungroup Cancels grouping of the selected objects.
Selecting objects to group

To select multiple objects, click the desired
objects while pressing the Shift key (or Ctrl
key).
Multiple objects can be selected also by
dragging over the desired objects so that
they are contained in the square formed by Drag.
dragging.
219
Not grouped Grouped
3.1.10 Editing of registration image

The analysis result images to be overlaid on the registration image can be changed.
1 Select an arranged registration image.

At the same time, the Setting button becomes
enabled.
2 Click the Setting button .

The Registration Image Settings
screen is displayed.
A list of selectable analysis result
images is displayed.
List of analysis result images
3 From the list of analysis result images, select the ones to overlay, then click the Execute
button.
220
The Registration Image Settings screen is closed, and the

overlaid image is changed.
3.1.11 Other operations on template
 Editing template
3
Registered templates can be edited.
1) Select the template to edit from the template list.

The layout of the template is displayed.
2) Edit the template in the same manner as registration.

3) After editing the template, click the Save button .
4) If any editing has not been saved, selecting
another template or closing the Custom Report
screen displays a confirmation message.
5) Click the Yes button to save.
• The pre-registered templates can also be edited. Once they are edited and saved, they
cannot be restored to the original status. If necessary, export and save the original
templates.
 Deleting template
Templates can be deleted.
1) Select the template to delete from the template list.

The layout of the template is displayed.
2) Click the Delete button .

The selected template is deleted from the template list. It can be restored while the Undo button
is enabled.
• The pre-registered templates can also be deleted. Once they are deleted, they cannot be
restored. If necessary, export and save the original templates.
 Re-arranging template
The order of the templates in the template list can be changed.
221
1) Select the template to change the order from the tem-

plate list.
2) Drag and drop the selected template to the desired
position.
 Changing template name

1) Double-click the template to change the name from the template list.
The current name is displayed in the Template Name Settings screen.
2) Change the name and click the OK button.

The name of the template in the template list is changed.
• If a part of the name of the template is hidden in the display area of the thumbnail, placing
the cursor on the thumbnail displays the full name.
3.1.12 Importing / Exporting template

Created templates can be imported or exported to be shared with other facilities.
• Only the display forms of templates are imported or exported.

To export templates that contain any shape, the image file of the shape needs to be saved sepa-
rately on Windows.
222
 Export
1) From the menu, select “Setting” and “Template Setting”.
The Custom Report screen is displayed.
2) Click the Export button .

The Export Template screen is displayed.
3) Specify the folder for saving the template data to “Destination Folder”.
4) From Template List, select the template to export.
As necessary, the All and Deselect buttons can be used.
By default, no template is selected.
5) Click the Execute button.

Exported data is saved in a folder indicating “Template”, year, month, day, and time created in the
folder specified as “Destination Folder”.
Three types of CSV files are saved in the folder. The templates are imported in the unit of the folder
indicating “Template”, year, month, day, and time.
 Import
1) From the menu, select “Setting” and “Template Setting”.
The Custom Report screen is displayed.
2) Click the Import button .

The Import Template screen is displayed.
223
3) Specify the folder from which to load the template data to “Source Folder”.
Select it in the reference window displayed by clicking the reference button.
4) Click the OK button in the reference window.

A list of templates to be read in the template list is displayed.
If there is any inconsistency with import conditions, a warning message appears. Templates cannot
be imported until the inconsistency indicated by the message is eliminated. When all the inconsis-
tencies are eliminated, the Execute button becomes enabled.
If any template of the same name has been registered

If any template of the same name has been registered, they are displayed in red. Templates of the
existing name cannot be imported. Perform any of the actions shown below.
Change the name. Double-clicking a template name displays the Template Name
Settings screen.
Change the name and click the OK button. The template name is
changed and displayed in black.
Do not import the templates

Check only the template in black in the template list.
with existing names.
224
Cancel the import. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import, and closes the
Import Templates screen.
If necessary, change the template name in the Custom Report screen,
then perform the import again.
• If any template of the same name has been registered, it is not overwritten. Import cannot
be executed until no name of the templates is the same as the existing ones.
When all the import conditions are proper, the Execute button becomes enabled.
When the number of registered templates exceeds the limit

A maximum of 100 templates can be registered. If the number of templates exceeds 100 including
the pre-registered templates, additional templates cannot be imported.
When the number of templates to import exceeds the registerable number, the number of selected
templates is displayed in red, and the Execute button becomes disabled.
3
In this example, import of 10 templates is attempted

with “Registerable: 4”.
The Execute button is disabled.
Reduce the number of

Cancel selection of some templates in the template list.
templates to import.
Cancel the import. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import, and closes the
Import Templates screen.
If necessary, delete the templates in the Custom Report screen,
then perform the import again.
225
When the number of templates to import is reduced to the limit value, the number of selected tem-
plates is displayed in black, and the Execute button becomes enabled.
When it is displayed in
black, import is possible.
The Execute button becomes enabled.
When any unregistered type of image exists

When a template containing any unregistered type of image is imported, the error shown below is
displayed.
In such a case, the template is registered without unregistered types of images.
226
CUSTOM REPORT: Editing Registration Image
3.2 Editing Registration Image
If any registration image is included in the report, their position can be aligned manually and the opac-
ity of overlaid image can be set.
3.2.1 Explanation on registration screen

In this screen, registration images can be edited when a template including them is displayed.
Alignment image Set control points Alignment image
(6) Registration Image (2) Opacity for Alignment (3) Alignment Complete button
(Control point edit mode)
(4) Overlay sliders (5) OK / Cancel button
(1) Control point edit tools
227
(1) Control point edit tools

Delete all control points.
Reset
The confirmation message “Delete all control points. Continue?“ appears. Clicking the
OK button deletes all control points.
In this mode, control points can be specified on the image.

Draw Mode
A maximum of 5 control points can be specified at clicked positions.
By placing the cursor on any control point and dragging it, the control point can be
moved. Control points can be erased by right-clicking.
When two control points are specified, a registration image (control point edit mode) is
displayed.
In this mode, specified control points can be erased.

Erase Mode
By placing the cursor on any control point and clicking it, the control point can be
erased.
In this mode, control points can be moved.

Operation Mode
By placing the cursor on any control point and dragging it, the control point can be
moved. Control points can be erased by right-clicking.
The name of the selected button is displayed with bold characters

with an underline.
(2) Opacity for Alignment

The opacity of the alignment image displayed over the registration image can be changed. By changing the
opacity, the alignment condition can be checked.
As the slider is moved toward left, the left image can be seen clearly. As the slider is moved toward right, the right
image can be seen clearly.
The registration image is updated in accordance with the slider only when the registration image is for alignment.
The registration image does not change by moving the slider when the registration image is for overlay.
(3) Alignment Complete button

Determines the edited alignment, and changes the control point edit mode to registration image edit mode.
Clicking the Alignment Complete button changes the registration image display from Alignment to Overlay. In
addition, the Overlay slider and the OK button become enabled.
The screen mode can be checked by the message
displayed above the control point edit tools.
Control point edit mode “Specify at least 2 control points.”

“Edit the control points and complete the alignment.”
Registration image edit mode “Edit the registration image and complete the image.”
In registration image edit mode, editing (add, erase, move) any control point restores control point edit mode.
228
(4) Overlay sliders

The opacity of the images to be overlaid on the registration image can be changed.
As the slider is moved toward left, the opacity is reduced (transparency is increased).
It is disabled in control point edit mode (image alignment).
(5) OK / Cancel button
OK Determines the registration image.
Cancel Discards the registration image that is being edited.
(6) Registration image

The overlaid registration image is displayed as for alignment or for overlay in accordance with the edit mode.
Control point edit mode The right and left images for alignment are overlaid for
(for alignment) confirmation of alignment result.
With reference to the left alignment image, the shape of
3
the right alignment image is changed so that the control
points are aligned between two images.
This mode starts when two or more control points are
clicked, and ends when the Alignment Complete button
is clicked.
Registration image edit Based on the alignment result, the alignment image and
mode the analysis result image can be overlaid for
(For overlay) confirmation.
The images indicated to the left of the sliders are
overlaid. The image indicated at the bottom is laid at the
back and the one at the top is overlaid in front.
The opacity of each images are changed with the sliders
shown to the right of the image names.
The registration image edit mode starts when the
Alignment Complete button is clicked.
3.2.2 Editing registration image

Displaying a template containing any registration image automatically starts the procedure to edit the
registration image.
1 Select a template containing any registration image, then click the Forward button.
A template preview is displayed, and the mes-
sage “Registration will be started.” is displayed.
2 Click the OK button to display the Registration

screen.
The Registration screen is displayed in Control point draw mode.
229
In Draw mode, the cursor is displayed as a pencil ( ) on the alignment image.

When five control points are placed, the pencil returns to an arrow cursor, indicating that no more
control point can be added.
• If the patient data contains no image necessary for

editing a registration image, the message “There
is insufficient number of registration images.” is
displayed.
Clicking the OK button closes the message, and
“NO IMAGE” is displayed in the workspace.
3 Click two or more characteristic parts as control points on the alignment images shown
at the upper part of the screen.
Clicking one of the two images displays a control point on both of them.
Clicking one of the two images displays a control

point on both of them.
When two control points are specified, a registra-
tion image is displayed.
A maximum of 5 control points can be specified.
230
Using the mouse wheel, the image can be

enlarged and reduced. By clicking the Operation
Mode button , an enlarged image can be
moved by dragging.
It can also be moved by right-dragging in any
mode.
To delete any specified control point, enter Erase

Mode by clicking the Erase Mode button .
By placing the cursor on any control point, the
cursor changes to an eraser ( ). Clicking con-
3
trol points erases them.
In Draw Mode and Operation Mode, control
points can be erased also by right-clicking.
4 Check the registration image to determine whether an adjustment is necessary.
5 In Draw Mode or Operation Mode, move the control points to adjust their positions.
Move the control points so that they are at the same positions on both of the alignment
images.
Placing the cursor on a control point changes the cursor to
a hand ( ). Drag the control points to move them.
Right-clicking while the cursor is displayed as a hand
erases the control point.
• To erase all control points and start placing them again, click the Reset button .
All control points are erased, and the initial Registration screen is displayed.
• In Control point edit mode, the opacity of overlaid alignment images can be changed for
confirmation using the Opacity for Alignment slider.
6 After editing control points, click the Alignment Complete button to finish the image align-
ment.
231
Registration image edit mode is enabled, and the registration image for alignment changes
to that for overlay. The Overlay slider becomes enabled.
Click the Alignment Complete button.
The registration image for overlay is dis- The Overlay slider becomes enabled.
played.
7 Operate the Overlay slider to edit the registration image.

Change the opacity of overlaid images.
If any control point is edited (add, erase, move) at this point, Control point edit mode is
enabled.
Change the opacity of overlaid images.
8 After editing the registration image, click the OK button to finish editing.
232
The Registration screen is closed, and the registration image

is displayed in the report display screen.
Clicking the Cancel button displays the message “Creating registration image is not com-
plete. Discontinue?”.
If there are multiple registration images, another message “Registration will be started.” is
displayed. In the same manner, edit the registration image.
Re-editing registration image

To change the registration image displayed in the report display screen, select a registration
image, and click the Overlay button .
Click the Overlay button.
The Registration screen is displayed with its editing of registration image canceled. The reg-
istration image can be edited again from the image alignment.
233
234
4. COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM
STANDARD
4.1 NAVIS-EX DICOM Support
NAVIS-EX supports the following functions (Service Classes) in conformance with DICOM.
1. A function to obtain exam information (Modality Worklist Information Model - Find)
2. A function to send a report for a performed examination to HIS/RIS (Modality Performed
Procedure Step)
3. A function to send images to an image server (Image Storage)
4. A function to confirm that images are permanently stored by a device (Storage Commit-
ment Push Model)
5. A function to determine whether a DICOM entity is active and can be reached on the net-
work (Verification)
For details, refer to the “Conformance Statement”. 4
The NAVIS-EX terminal receives an order for examination data from the HIS/RIS server, and exam-
ination image data managed by NAVIS-EX can be sent to the image server.
Hospital Information System (HIS) / Radiology Information System (RIS)
HIS/RIS
HIS/RIS server
1. Modality Worklist Information 2. Modality Performed

Procedure Step 5. Verification
Model Study in progress,
Order, Patient information Study complete
PACS
3. Image Storage
4. Storage Commitment
Push Model
NAVIS-EX
5. Verification
Photography device Image server
Modality Picture Archiving and

Communication Systems
235
COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM STANDARD: Worklist Screen
4.2 Worklist Screen
Examination information is managed on the Worklist screen.

Select View and then Worklist from the menu. Or click the Worklist button to display the Work-
list screen.
The Worklist button is disabled in the default setting. To enable the button, selection of DICOM is nec-
essary in the Link tab of the Configuration dialog box.
Menu bar
Tool bar
Simple Search field Order list
Tree view
 Tree view
Display of the orders in the order list is selectable between Schedule Study and Complete Study.
Schedule Study Displays orders whose status is “Scheduled”, “Progress” or “Discontinue”.
Displays orders whose status is “Complete”.

Complete Study
The order cannot be managed in the “Complete Study”.
236
 Order list
The order list is displayed to check the order contents and order selection.
When the order list of the Schedule Study is displayed, double-clicking an order displays the image list
screen of the appropriate patient.
 Simple Search field

Input patient information such as patient ID or name, and order information such as an reservation ID
or modality.
The names and comments are can be narrowed down by simultaneous left and right truncation. Other
items can be narrowed down by right truncation.
 Menu bar
The menu bar contains, File, Order, Study, and Setting menus.
Clicking each menu opens a pull-down menu.
File Back Closes the Worklist screen to display the previous screen.
Order Delete Deletes the selected order. 4
Loads an order not yet received.
Order Query
Order Order condition can be set. For details, see “ Worklist tab” (page 245).
Displays the Patient Query dialog box for specification of the Patient ID,
Patient Query
Number, Name, and Requested ID to receive the order.
Changes the selected order status from “Scheduled” (or “Discontinue”) to
“Progress” (In Progress).
The In Progress dialog box is displayed. Input the examination contents and click
Study In Progress the OK button to change the order status to “Progress”. The image list screen for the
appropriate patient is displayed.
When an MPPS server is not used, the order status is changed to “Progress” without
displaying the In Progress dialog box.
Study
Changes the selected order status from “Progress” to “Complete”.
The Study Complete dialog box is displayed. Input the examination contents and
Study Complete
click the OK button to change the order status to “Complete”. The order moves from
the “Schedule Study” list to the “Complete Study” list.
Changes the selected order status from “Progress” to “Discontinue”.

Study Discontinue The Study Discontinue screen is displayed. Input the examination contents and click
the OK button to change the order status to “Discontinue”.
Setting Customize Toolbar Displays the Customize dialog box for setting the tool bar display.
237
 Tool bar
Displays the shortcut buttons frequently used. The buttons displayed can be changed by using Cus-
tomize Toolbar.
Operation of functions not displayed as short cut buttons can be conducted from the file menu.
Back Closes the Worklist screen and displays the previous screen.
Order Delete Deletes the selected order.
Order Query Loads an order not yet received.
Displays the Patient Query dialog box. Specify the Patient ID, Number,
Patient Query Name, and Requested ID to receive the order.
Changes the selected order status from “Scheduled” (or “Discontinued”) to
Study In Progress “Progress” (In Progress).
Study Complete Changes the selected order status from “Progress” to “Complete”.
Study Discontinue Changes the selected order status from “Progress” to “Discontinued”.
238
COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM STANDARD: Operating Procedure
4.3 Operating Procedure
1 Select View and then Worklist from the menu. Or click the Worklist button to display
the Worklist screen.
2 Click the Order Query button to load the order.

The order is loaded from the worklist server and displayed in the list.
4
3 Select the order to conduct an examination on and click the Study In Progress but-
ton .
Input patient information such as patient ID or name, and

order information such as an reservation ID or modality.
The names and comments are can be narrowed down by
simultaneous left and right truncation. Other items can be
narrowed down by right truncation.
239
The In Progress dialog box is displayed.
4 Check the items to be conducted during the

examination and click the OK button.
The image list screen of the selected order is displayed.
If no item is checked and the OK button is
clicked, a caution message “Is it good although
the inspection is not chosen?” is displayed.
5 Click the Capture button to display the Capture screen.
6 Conduct image capture and examination with the connected device and save the exam-
ination data.
7 Send the Examination data to the image server.
For the AFC-230/210 and F-10

When an image is captured, the image is automatically sent.
For the AFC-330

Click the Back button to return to the
image list screen. Right-click on the examination
data and select Link and then File Transfer.
When multiple data is in the list, select multiple
thumbnails and export the file.
For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330

Display the OCT Viewer screen and click the Link
button .
240
8 Check that an order is selected in the Worklist screen and click the Study Complete but-
ton.
The order status is changed from “Scheduled” to “Progress”.
The Complete dialog box is displayed.
• When changing the order from “Progress” to “Discontinue”, click the Study Discontinue
button . Select the examination item in the displayed Discontinue dialog box and click
the OK button. The order status changes to “Discontinue”.
For an order with its status “Discontinue”,
Study In Progress and Order Delete opera-
tions can be performed.
9 In the Complete dialog box, check the box of an item for which examination is complete
and confirm that necessary examinations have been conducted.
10 Click the OK button to complete the capturing and examination of the order.
The Study Complete screen is closed and the order is removed from the order list.
Clicking Study Complete in the tree displays the order list for examinations that are complete.
241
Management of operation on orders is not possible from the Study Complete view.
• The complete orders displayed in the Study Complete view are removed from the list when
NAVIS-EX is restarted the following day.
4.3.1 Order Query with patient specified

Specify patient information (Patient ID, Number, Name, and Requested ID) to load the specified
patient’s order.
1 Click the Patient Query button.

The Patient Query dialog box is displayed.
2 Input the required contents for Patient Query.

Input the Patient ID, Number, Name, and
Requested ID.
When the Name is input, the corresponding
patient is extracted by the string of the entire
name (Last Name, Middle Name, and First
Name).

The Patient Query dialog box is closed and corresponding orders for the patient are dis-
played in the order list.
When no orders for the corresponding patient, a confirmation message is displayed.
242
4.3.2 Deleting order

An order is deleted from the order list (Scheduled Study). An order with its status “Progress” cannot be
deleted.
• If the examination cannot be complete, the order is not deleted from the order list
(Schedule Study).
1 Select the order to be deleted in the order list (Schedule Study).

The order with its status “Scheduled” and “Discontinued” can be deleted.
2 Click the Order Delete button.

A Caution message is displayed.
3 Click the Yes button to delete the order.

Clicking the No button cancels the order deletion and the
message closes.
4
243
COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM STANDARD: Setting in DICOM Communication Detail Setting Screens
4.4 Setting in DICOM Communication Detail Setting Screens
In the Link tab of the Configuration dialog box, click the Setup button for DICOM in the Communication
Protocol to display the Communication detail setting dialog box.
 Modality tab
Register the NAVIS-EX terminal as a modality (device communicating with DICOM).
AE Title (required) A name to identify the AE (Application Entity). Devices recognized

each other by AE title and conduct communication.
Station Name (required) Inputs the modality station name.
Institution Name Inputs the modality institution name.
Institution Address Inputs the modality address.
Institutional Department Name Inputs the modality department.
Institution ID Inputs the 4-digit unique identifier of the institution that sent the image
data.
244
 Worklist tab
Input the server information that manages the worklist.
Use Modality Worklist Server Check this box when using the worklist server.
AE Title Inputs the AE title in the work list server.
Host Name/IP Address Inputs the host name (or IP address) in the work list server.
Port Number Inputs the port number in the work list server.
Communication Test Clicking the Connect button conducts a connection test with the worklist
server and the result message is displayed.
Broad query Condition Sets the conditions of the order for loading by Order Query.
AE Title Sets the AE Title order of the NAVIS-EX terminal itself as target.
Modality Type Selects the modality type.
Schedules Start Date Specifies the date to load the order.

Select from Today/Period.
Sort Order Sets the order of the item to be displayed in the Worklist screen.
Select the item and click ▲/▼ button to change the order.
Display the worklist screen at the Check this box to display the Worklist screen instead of the Patient List
start-up and a picture list screen screen when activating NAVIS-EX or when the Back button is clicked in
the Return button is clicked. the Viewer screen and the Capture screen.
Check this box when mainly operating in the Worklist screen.
245
 MPPS tab
Use MPPS Server Check this box when using the Modality Performed Procedure Step
server (MPPS server).
AE Title Inputs the AE Title of the MPPS server.
Host Name/IP Address Inputs the host name (or IP address) of the MPPS server.
Port Number Inputs the port number of the MPPS server.
Communication Test Clicking the Connect button conducts a connection test with the
MPPS server and displays the result message.
246
 Image Storage tab
Store Images Check to save images.
Use Storage Server Select to use Storage Server.
AE Title Inputs the Storage Server AE title.
Host Name/IP Address Inputs the Storage Server host name (or IP address).
Port Number Inputs the Storage Server port number.
image server and the result message is displayed.
SOP List Selects the SOP from the drop down list.
Transfer List Selects the transfer format from the drop down list.
Use Storage Commitment Server Select to use Storage Commitment Server.
AE Title Inputs the Storage Commitment Server AE title.
Host Name/IP Address Inputs the Storage Commitment Server host name (or IP address).
Port Number Inputs the Storage Commitment Server port number.
Storage Commitment Server and the result message is displayed.
247
Receive the response from a Check this box to receive a response from the Storage Commitment
different association Server with a different association.
Port Number Sets the code number of the terminal receiving the response.
Select DICOM File Output Select this button to export the data to a specified folder instead of
Destination the Storage Server.
Destination folder Sets the export destination folder.

Select from the folder reference dialog box displayed by clicking the
Reference button.
 Store Format Registration tab

Defines the Examination data storage format. Examination item, SOP Class, Transfer Syntax, and
Modality are displayed.
Store format list The registered store formats are displayed in the list. When the store
format to be edited is selected, the format is displayed in the input
field of the lower part of the screen.
Item Inputs the test item.
SOP Class Selects the SOP class from the drop down list.
Transfer Syntax Selects a transfer syntax from the drop down list.
Modality Inputs the Modality type.
Update button Updates the store format according to the input contents.
• At times, image acquired by Import may not be able to be registered by image contents.
248
 Examination Code Registration tab

Registers the examination item to be displayed in the Study In Progress screen, Study Complete
screen, and Study Discontinue screen.
Examination Code list Displays the registered examination code.

The contents of the item selected in the list are displayed in the input edit
field.
To register a new item, click a blank line.
Delete button Deletes the examination item selected in the list.
Examination Code Inputs and edits the Examination Code in the Examination Item.
Examination Content Inputs and edits the examination contents of the Examination item.
Register/Update button Registers the input and edit field contents.

Set the Examination Code and Examination Content according to the
examinations performed in the facility.
249
250
5. DRAWING FUNCTION
5.1 Image Drawing
Drawing on the selected image can be performed with this function.
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 OCT images, the Drawing

function cannot be used.
• Drawing data cannot be rotated.
 Start-up
1 Select the image to be drawn on the Image List screen.

Double-click the thumbnail of the selected image. Or click the Forward button.
The Drawing tab becomes enabled.
2 Click the Drawing tab to display the Drawing tool in the tree view.
3 Perform drawing with the Drawing tool. 5

Drawing tools
Function button
251
DRAWING FUNCTION: Image Drawing
• Open the Configuration dialog box before saving the drawing data and click the OK button
to close the Configuration dialog box abandons the drawing data.
 Exiting
1 Click the Save button of the Display Switching buttons.

The confirmation message “Save now?” is displayed.
2 Click the Yes button to save the Drawing data.
3 Exit the Drawing function by switching the selected screen or the tree view.
When there is unsaved image processing data, a confirmation message is displayed.
In this case, click the No button to abandon the unsaved Drawing data and perform screen
switching or such.
• When “No messages are selected.” is selected in the Image Tool tab in the Configuration
dialog box, data is saved without displaying a confirmation message and then the screen
changes.
252
DRAWING FUNCTION: Drawing Tools
5.2 Drawing Tools
Drawing tools Function buttons
 Function button
Function buttons displays the dedicated dialog box and operates the Drawing function.
Displays the Shape reference window and reference shape can be added on
Shape the image.
Perform various setting of the reference image from the shape reference dialog box.
Displays the Comment reference window and comments can be added to the 5
Comment image.
The various setting of comments is performed in the Comment reference dialog box.
Layer Toggles display of the Layer window.
The following checkboxes are used to select the data to be displayed overlaid on the image.
Markup
Selected in the Drawing function.
Check box
Analysis
Displays the analysis result overlaid on the displayed image.
Check box
Caption
Displays the Caption overlaid on the displayed data.
Check box
Image List
Displays the Image List under the Image Display area.
Check box
• For the setting of the image caption display, see “1.20.8 Image Caption tab” (page 98).
253
DRAWING FUNCTION: Drawing Tools
 Drawing tools
Reload Reloads the drawn data.
Clears the drawn data.

Clear Clear the once saved drawn data. The unsaved button is not deleted by Clear
button.
Cancels the previous action. Maximum of ten previous actions can be
Undo cancelled.
Redo Returns to the status before Undo.
Line width Allows selection of the line width. (Small, Middle, Large)
Allows selection of color of the line.

Color palette
Color selecting
Displays Color Setting palette and specifies the drawing line color.
(Detail)
Trans The selected drawing color is displayed in translucent.
Top Displays the selected drawn data in the foreground.
Bottom Displays the selected drawn data at backmost.
Pen Allows drawing of a line with the pen tool.
Pencil Allows drawing of a line with the color pencil tool.
Brush Allows drawing of a line with the brush tool.
Water Allows drawing of a line with the water tool.
Crayon Allows drawing of a line with the crayon tool.
Select Allows selection of the drawn data.
Straight line Draws a straight line.
Arrow Allows drawing of a line with an arrow on an end
Rectangle Allows drawing of a rectangle.
Ellipse Draws an ellipse.
Selects the line style. (H-V Line, H-V Arrow, Both-ends arrow, H-V Both-ends
Pen style arrow, Circle, Free line)
Allows drawing the selected line.
Attribute Allows editing of the selected object or text.
Erases the selected drawing date with the eraser. (Erase Small, Erase
Erase Middle, Erase Large)
Copy Copies the selected object or text.
254
DRAWING FUNCTION: Functions of Each Tool
5.3 Functions of Each Tool
 Reload
Reload button Reloads the saved drawn data.
1) Draw on the image.

2) Click the Reload button.
3) The confirmation message “Reload now?” is displayed.
4) Click the Yes button.
The saved drawn data is displayed.
 Clear
Clear button Clears all drawn data.
1) Draw on the image.

2) Click the Clear button.
5
3) The confirmation message “Clear now?” is displayed.
The drawn data is cleared.
 Undo
Undo button Returns to the previous status.
1) Select any draw tool and make a drawing on the image.

2) Click the Undo button.
The data drawn in step 1) disappears.
 Redo
Redo button Cancels the previous undo.
1) Select any draw tool and make a drawing on the image.

2) Click the Undo button.
The data drawn in Step 1) disappears.
3) Click the Redo button.

The data disappeared in Step 2) reappears.
255
 Line width
Line selection drop

Allows selection of the line width.
down button
1) Click the Line selection drop down button.

2) Select any line width.
The line width is changed. Line width button
Line width button Displays the Line width set dialog box.
1) Click the Line width button.

2) Select a line (Large, Middle, or Small) from the drop
down list.
3) Set the line with the line width up and down buttons.
4) Click the OK button.
Simple line width set

By clicking the Setting button, the Simple line width set dia-
log box appears. The widths of the Large, Middle, and
Small lines can be set at once.
1) Click the Setting button in the Line width set dialog box.
2) The Simple line width set dialog box appears. Change
the line widths with the up and down buttons.
3) Click the OK button in the Simple width set dialog box.
4) Click the OK button in the Line width set dialog box.
 Color palette
Color button Allows selection of color of the line.
1) Click a color from the color palette.

The clicked color is selected.
 Trans
Trans button Allows drawing of a translucent drawing.
1) Select a drawing tool (pen or others).

2) Click the Trans button to set it pressed.
3) Draw lines.
256
 Top
Top button Displays the selected data on top of other data.
1) Select the data to display on top of other data with the Select tool.
2) Click the Top button.
The selected data is displayed on top of other data.
 Bottom
Bottom button Displays the selected data at the bottom of other data.
1) Select the data to display at the bottom of other data with the Select tool.
2) Click the Bottom button.
The selected data is displayed at the bottom of other data.
 Pen
Pen button Allows drawing of a line with the pen tool.

5
1) Click the Pen button.
2) Draw lines on the selected image.
 Pencil
Pencil button Allows drawing of a line with the color pencil tool.
1) Click the Pencil button.

2) Draw lines on the selected image
• When using a mouse, drawing with Pencil, Brush, Water and Crayon is same as that for
Pen.
 Brush
Brush button Allows drawing of a line with the brush tool.
1) Click the Brush button.

257
 Water
Water button Allows drawing of a line with the water tool.
1) Click the Water button.

 Crayon
Crayon button Allows drawing of a line with the crayon tool.
1) Click the Crayon button.

 Select
Select button Selects the drawing data.
1) Click the Select button.

2) The drawing data is clicked or a portion is selected by drag and drop.
 Line
Line button Allows drawing of a straight line.
1) Click the Line button.

2) Draw a rectangle on the selected image. Decide the start and end points of the diagonal
line of the rectangle by dragging the mouse.
 Arrow
Arrow button Allows drawing of a line with an arrow on an end.
1) Click the Arrow button.

2) Draw a line with an arrow on an end on the selected image. Decide the start and end
points by dragging the mouse. The arrow is on the end point.
258
 Rectangle
Rectangle button Allows drawing of a rectangle.
1) Click the Box button.

2) Draw a rectangle on the selected image. Decide the start and end points of the diagonal
line of the rectangle by dragging the mouse.
 Ellipse
Ellipse button Allows drawing of an ellipse.
1) Click the Ellipse button.

2) Draw an ellipse on the selected image. Decide the distance from the focus of the ellipse
by dragging the mouse.
 Other line tools
Line tool button Draws with the set line style.

Drop down button Select the desired line.
1) Click the drop-down button.

5
2) Select the desired line.
The line tool button changes to the selected line.
3) Drag the mouse to specify the start and end
points.
Allows drawing of a horizontal or vertical line depending on the start and end points
H-V Line
of dragging the mouse.
Allows drawing of a horizontal or vertical line with an arrow at an end depending on
H-V Arrow
the start and end points of dragging the mouse. The arrow is at the end point.
Allows drawing of a line with an arrow at each end between the start and end points
Both-ends arrow
of dragging the mouse.
H-V Both-ends Allows drawing of a horizontal or vertical line with an arrow at each end depending
arrow on the start and end points of dragging the mouse.
Allows drawing of a circle by specifying the radius with the start and end points of
Circle
dragging the mouse.
Free line Allows drawing of the same line as dragging of the mouse.
259
 Attribute
Attribute button Allows editing of the selected object or text.
Editing lines and arrows

1) Select the desired drawn objects with the Select tool.
2) Click the Attr button.
The Select arrow head dialog box appears.
3) Edit the lines or arrows.

4) Click the OK button on the dialog box.
Select arrow head
Style Select an arrow head.

Direction Select the end of the line at which the arrow head is put on.
Line width Select the line width from the drop-down list or with the up and down buttons.
Select the line color from the drop-down list or with the Change button.
Line color
By clicking the Change button, the color setting dialog box appears.
Line translucence Checking the box makes the line translucent.
Default Click the Default button to set the current arrow head setting as the default.
Editing rectangles and circles
1) Select the desired drawn objects with the Select tool.

The Brush selection dialog box appears.
3) Edit the brush settings.

4) Click the OK button on the dialog box.
260
Brush selection
Brush Select a brush.

Color Select the color.
Line width Select the line width from the drop-down list or with the up and down buttons.
Select the line color from the drop-down list or with the Change button.
Line color
Line translucence Checking the box makes the line translucent.
Default Click the Default button to set the current arrow head setting as the default.
Edit text
1) Select the desired entered texts with the Select tool.

The Text edit dialog box appears.
3) Edit the text.

4) Click the OK button on the Text edit dialog box.
261
Text edit
Edit the text in the field. The background color of the text can be changed by
Text
setting the Back color.
Displays the font and the size being selected.
Font Clicking the Change button shows the Font dialog box on which the font name,
style, size, decoration, and script can be changed.
Checking the “Use text line2 box allows the leader line to be drawn.
Line
Clicking the Change button shows the color setting dialog box.
Checking the “Enable transparency” box sets the background color transparent.
Back color
Frames the text when “Use text frame” is checked.
Frame
 Erase
Allows erasing of the drawn objects according to the size of the

Erase button
selected eraser.
Drop down button Select the eraser size.
1) Click the drop-down button.

2) Select the eraser size.
The selected eraser appears on the Eraser button.
3) Erase the drawn objects by dragging the mouse on them.
• Other than the objects drawn with the pen, pencil, brush, water, or crayon tool, selecting
the object with the Select tool and clicking the Erase button erases the object.
262
 Copy
Copy button Copies the selected object or text.
1) Select the desired drawn objects or texts with the Select tool.
2) Click the Copy button.
3) Click the mouse on the image.
4) The copied objects are pasted.
263
5.3.1 Editing drawn lines

The positions and the types of the drawn lines can be changed.
To change them, specify a drawn line first.
Selecting a drawn line

Selecting a drawn line
1) Click the Select button in the toolbar.
2) Click a part of the line to select.
The clicked line is selected.
The selected line is displayed as:
A small rectangle is displayed at the starting point and the end point of
Straight line
the line.
The drawn line is enclosed by a dotted rectangle. Eight small
The other drawn lines
rectangles are shown on the dotted rectangle.
Selecting multiple drawn lines
1) Click the Select button in the toolbar.

2) Drag an area containing desired lines to select.
All the lines circled by the dragging are selected.
Moving a drawn line

1) Select the drawn line to be moved.
2) Drag the selected drawn line.
The selected drawn line is moved to where it is dropped.
Deleting a drawn line

1) Select a line to be deleted.
2) Click the Erase button .
3) The confirmation message “Delete the selecting object?” is displayed.
The selected drawn line is deleted.
Deleting the leader line for the text

The leader line for the text can be deleted.
1) Select the leader line for the text to be deleted.
2) Click the Erase button .
3) The confirmation message “Delete the selecting object?” is displayed.
The selected leader line for the text is deleted.
264
Changing the drawn line type
1) Select a line to be changed.

2) Select the type of the line.
The type of the selected line is changed.
265
DRAWING FUNCTION: Shape Reference
5.4 Shape Reference
The drawn image can be saved as a pattern image beforehand and used later for drawing easily.
5.4.1 Drawing using pattern image
1 Select the image.
2 Click the Shape button on the tree view.

The Shape reference window appears.
266
3 Select the desired pattern image from the Shape reference window and drag and drop it
on the image.
The pattern image is drawn on the image.
4 Move or scale the reference shape.

When moving, select and drag the reference shape.
When scaling, select the reference shape and display the bundle to change the size.
267
5.4.2 New addition of the reference shape
 Importing pattern images

1) Click the Shape button of the tree view.
The Shape Reference dialog box appears.
2) Click the Edit button in the Shape Reference dialog box.

The Figure Set dialog box appears.
3) Click the Import button.

The Open dialog box appears.
268
4) Specify the file location and file name of the reference shape (pattern image) and click
the Open button.
5) The file name is displayed in the Title field. Change the file name as necessary.
The reference shape of the set title is added to the list.
7) Click the OK button in the Figure set dialog box.
 Registering pattern images from drawn object

1) Select the desired drawn object on the image with the Select tool.
2) Drag and drop the selected object in the Shape reference dialog box.
The new pattern image is registered.
5
5.4.3 Editing pattern images

Edit the title of the pattern image.
1) Click the Shape reference button in the toolbar.

The Figure set dialog box appears.
2) Click the Edit button in the Shape reference dialog box.
269
3) Select the title of the desired pattern image from the list in the dialog box.
4) Click the Edit button.
5) Change the title in the Title field.

7) When changing the sort order, select from the list and change with the up and down but-
ton.
5.4.4 Deleting reference shape

1) Click the Shape reference button in the toolbar.
The Shape reference dialog box appears.
270
2) Click the Edit button in the Shape reference dialog box.

The Figure set dialog box appears.
3) Select the title of the desired pattern image from the list in the dialog box.
4) Click the Delete button.
The selected shape is deleted. Be aware that no confirmation message is displayed.
271
DRAWING FUNCTION: Entering and Setting Comments
5.5 Entering and Setting Comments
5.5.1 Entering comments
1 Click the Comment Reference button in the tree view.

The Comment reference window appears.
2 Select the desired comments and click the Put Center button.
When entering comments which are not in the list, enter with the Attribute dialog displayed
by clicking the Free Input button.
The comments are input in the center of the image.
272
3 Drag the arranged comments to change the position.

The line position and length are also changeable by dragging.
• Change the size, color and frame of the drawn comments with the Attribute dialog box
displayed by selecting the comments and clicking the Attribute button (or double click the
comments).
273
5.5.2 Adding comments

Add comments to the Comment reference window.
The comments are displayed in the Comment reference window displayed by clicking the Comment
reference button with tree view format. Enter with item and comments.
 Adding Item
Item classifies comments. The item name cannot be added to the image as comments.
1) Click the Comment Reference button in the tree view.
The Comment Reference dialog box appears.
2) Click the Item button in the Comment Reference dialog box.

The Comment title dialog box appears.
3) Input the title in the Title field.

Checking the Sub item adds the item to the subclass of the item selecting now. Without checking,
the item is added to the same class of the item selected at the moment.
274

The new item is added to the tree view.
5) Change the added item sorting as necessary.

Select and drag the item on the tree.
 Adding Comments
2) Select the item to add comments.

The comments are added to the subclass of the selected item.
3) Click the Comment button in the Comment reference dialog box.

The Attribute dialog box appears.
4) Enter comments added to the text field.

5) Set the font, background color, line and frame as necessary.
Clicking the Default button changes the present setting beck to default of when opening the Attri-
bute dialog box.

New comments are added to the subclass of the tree view item.
7) Change the added comment sorting as necessary.

Select and drag the comments on the tree.
275
5.5.3 Editing comments

Set the comment content, character size, font and color inserted to the image.

2) Select comments to be edited.

The Edit button and Delete button become enabled.
3) Click the Edit button in the Comment Reference dialog box.

The Attribute dialog box appears.
4) Change the setting in the Attribute dialog box.
Edit the text in the field. The background color of the text can be
Text
changed by setting the Back color.
Displays the font and the size being selected.

Font Clicking the Change button shows the Font dialog box on which the font
name, style, size, decoration, and script can be changed.
276
Checking the “Use text line” box allows the leader line to be drawn.
Line Select the line width with the up and down buttons
By clicking the Color button, the Color dialog box appears.
Checking the “Enable transparency” box sets the background color

Back color transparent.
Frames the text when “Use text frame” is checked.

Frame Select the line width with the up and down buttons
277
5.5.4 Deleting items and comments
 Deleting items
Delete the item. All comments included in the item are deleted.
1) Select the desired item other than the Common and Image items from the tree in the
Comment Reference dialog box.
2) Click the Delete button in the Comment Reference dialog box.
A confirmation dialog box confirming the item dele-
tion is display
3) Click the Yes button to delete the item.
 Deleting comments
Delete the desired comments.
1) Select the desired comments from the tree in the Comment Reference dialog box.
2) Click the Delete button in the Comment Reference dialog box.
The comments are deleted.
278
DRAWING FUNCTION: Layer
5.6 Layer
By clicking the Layer button in the toolbar, the Layer dia-

log box appears.
The drawing data can be displayed or non-displayed for each
layer.
5.6.1 Display or non-display of layer

Display or non-display of the layers is selected by checking or unchecking the layer name in the Layer
dialog box. Only the checked layers are displayed in the drawing area.
The order of the selected layers is changed by clicking the up

and down buttons above the Show Layer field.
1) Check the layer name.

2) Click the Up/Down button in the Layer dialog 5
box.
The order of the selected layer changes.
5.6.2 Creating layers

Create a layer.
1) Click the Edit button in the Layer dialog

box.
The Layer edit dialog box appears.
2) Click the New button in the Layer edit

dialog box.
3) Enter the title in the Title field. Then click

the OK button.
A layer is created.
4) Click the OK button in the Layer edit dia-

log box.
The Layer edit dialog box closes and a new
layer is displayed in the Layer dialog box.
279
DRAWING FUNCTION: Layer
5.6.3 Editing the layer name

Edit the layer name.
1) Click the Edit button in the Layer dialog

box.
2) Select a layer to edit from the List field in

the Layer edit dialog box. Then click the
Edit button.
3) Change the layer name in the Title field.

Then click the OK button.
5.6.4 Deleting layers

Delete a layer.
1) Click the Edit button in the Layer dialog box.

2) Select a layer to delete from the List field

in the Layer edit dialog box. Then click
the Delete button.
5.6.5 Changing layers

Change the Write layer.
1) Select a layer to write on from the List

field in the Layer dialog box.
The Write layer changes.
The order of the layers is changed by clicking

the up and down buttons above the Show
Layer field.
280
DRAWING FUNCTION: Displaying Analyzed Results
5.7 Displaying Analyzed Results
For the image performing image measurement, the analyzed result can be displayed in the image wiz-
ard.
As the analyzed result displaying position cannot be changed, perform drawing not to overlap to the
analyzed result display. Add drawing and comments to the analyzed result.
When the “Analysis” checkbox is checked, the analyzed result is displayed.
281
DRAWING FUNCTION: Displaying Analyzed Results
282
6. IMAGE PROCESSING
6.1 Image Processing Screen
The Image processing function is a tool for processing an obtained image with various filters and
effects.
• For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 OCT images, the Image

Processing function cannot be used.
• Image processing is performed for images. Drawing or calculated results cannot be
processed.
 Start-up
1 Select an image to be processed from the Image List screen and display on the Image
Selection screen.
The Processing tab becomes enabled.
2 Click the Processing tab and display the Image Processing tool in the tree view.
3 Perform Image Processing with the Image Processing tool.

6
283
IMAGE PROCESSING: Image Processing Screen
• Open the Configuration dialog box before saving the image processing and click the OK
button to close the Configuration dialog box abandons the image processing contents.
 Exiting
1 Click the Save button of the Display Switching button.

The confirmation message “Would you save?” is dis-
played.
When the “Save with performed drawing data.” check-
box is checked, drawing data is saved in the image
edited with the Image Processing function. When the
checkbox is not checked, drawing data is not saved in
the image edited with the Image Processing function.
2 Click the Yes button to save the image data.
switching or such.
dialog box, the drawing data is not saved.
284
IMAGE PROCESSING: Image Processing Tool
6.2 Image Processing Tool
Image processing tool

Function button
 Image processing function button

All buttons in the image control bar are common in Image Wizard screen except for the following but-
tons specialized for processing function.
Display or non-display the Histogram window.

The color ingredients of brightness/red/green/blue are displayed as graph.
Histogram
As there is no color ingredients of red/green/blue in F-10, these are not
displayed in graph.

The following checkboxes are used to select the data displaying overlapping the image. 6
Markup
Displays the drawing data overlapping the displayed image.
Check box
Analysis
Displays the analyzed result overlapping the displayed image.
Check box
Caption
Check box
Image List
Check box
285
IMAGE PROCESSING: Image Processing Tool
 Image processing tool
Reload Reloads the original image and display it.
Range of selection Specifies the range.
Flip Reverses the top and bottom of the image.
Mirror Reverses the right and left of the image.
Rotate Rotates the image.
Resize Resizes the image.
Brightness (-) Lowers the brightness of an image.
Brightness (+) Increases the brightness of an image.
Contrast (-) Lowers the contrast.
Contrast (+) Increases the contrast.
Sharpen Sharpens the image.
Blur Graduates the image.
Changes the color. (Grayscale, Invert, Brightness, Contrast,

Color Contrast RGB, Gamma correct, Intensity Detect and Red free)
Filter Executes the filter processing.
Dividing channels Displays the image that divides the channel.
286
IMAGE PROCESSING: Editing Images
6.3 Editing Images
6.3.1 Flip
Flip Reverses the top and bottom of the image (vertical direction).
Mirror Reverses the right and left of the image (horizontal direction).
6.3.2 Rotate
 Rotating an image 90 degree, 180 degree or 270 degree clockwise.

In the toolbar, click the Rotation button and select 90-clockwise,
180-clockwise, or 270-clockwise.
The image rotates at the specified angle.
 Rotating an image to a designated angle
1 In the toolbar, click the Rotation button

6
and select Any Angle.
The Rotation dialog box appears.
Resize box
2 Enter an angle in the Angle entry box, or drag the angle designation bar.

The image rotates clockwise.
The size of the image is adjusted automatically so that the whole image can just fit in the
screen after rotation when the resize box is checked.
287
6.3.3 Changing the image size

The image size (resolution) is changed.
1 Click the Resize button in the toolbar.

The Resize dialog box opens.
2 Enter each item and click the OK button.

This is a size after the change. Directly input the size or drag
the size designation bar.
“Width” and “Height” fields
When the image resolution is higher than the screen, the image
cannot be magnified.
When this box is checked, the aspect ratio (length-to-width
“Maintain Aspect-Ratio” checkbox
ratio) is fixed.
When this box is checked, a high resolution image is produced
“Resample” checkbox
by interpolation and equalization.
• When the image size is changed, the image fitting may not be operated properly for the
unsaved image.
6.3.4 Filter
The edges can be extracted with six types of filters.
In the toolbar, click the Filter button and select the desired fil-
ter name
Available filters:
• Gradient (Differential Filter)
• Laplacian
• Sobel
• Prewitt
• Shift and Difference Operator
• Line Segment
• Emboss
Filter processing example (gradient)
288
 Emboss
Selecting “Emboss” displays the setting dialog box for Emboss processing. Set the angle, depth, and
intensity of the Emboss image to be displayed and click the OK button.
For the Emboss setting, select a preset setting or input each value for Angle, Depth, and Intensity.
Select a preset setting for Emboss processing.

Emboss Preset List Combination of set values are prepared as a preset setting. (Emboss+,
Emboss-) In addition, a new a preset setting can be registered.
Sets the value of Emboss processing. Selecting Preset displays the

set values.
Angle, Depth, Intensity
Input each field by inputting directly, clicking the Up/Down button, or
input field
dragging the setting bar.
Images larger than the screen resolution cannot be enlarged. 6
Input the preset name or edit the name.
Emboss Preset Name
The name for “Emboss +” and “Emboss -” cannot be edited.
Sets the displayed settings as a new preset.

[Add]
If no preset name is input, the a preset setting cannot be added.
Overwrites the selected preset set value and name for the displayed
contents.
[Update] The name of “Emboss+” and “Emboss-” cannot be changed.
Changing the set value of “Emboss+” and “Emboss-” changes the settings
in Simple image processing.
Deletes the selected preset.

[Delete]
“Emboss+” and “Emboss-” cannot be deleted.
Initializes the contents of the setting dialog box.

Clicking the button displays a
confirmation message. Clicking the
[Reset] Yes button initializes the settings.
Preset settings other than “Emboss+”
and “Emboss-” are deleted.
289
6.3.5 Changing the color

The color of an image is changed.
 Gray scale
This is an effect of changing a color image to a gray-scale image
In the toolbar, click the Color button and select Gray scale.
* This is not useful for F-10 images (black and white).
 Inverting color
This is an effect of inverting the image mode between positive mode and negative mode.
In the toolbar, click the Color button and select Invert.
 Brightness correction
1 In the toolbar, click the Color button and

select Brightness correction.
The Brightness dialog box appears.
2 Enter the correction level of the brightness and click the OK button.
290
 Changing contrast
The contrast is changed.

select Contrast correction.
The Contrast dialog box appears.
2 Enter the correction level of the contrast and click the OK button.
 Contrast RGB
Change the contrast for each color of red, green and blue.

select Contrast RGB.
The Contrast RGB dialog box appears.
2 Enter the correction level of the contrast and click the OK button.
 Gamma correct
The color is corrected by changing the gamma value.

select Gamma correct.
The Gamma Correct dialog box appears.
2 Enter 100 times of the gamma value to be corrected and click the OK button.
291
 Extracting intensity range designated

Only the colors in the designated brightness range are extracted.

select Intensity Detect.
The Intensity Detect dialog box appears.
2 Enter the minimum intensity and maximum brightness and then click the OK button.
 Red free imaging

Display the image in red free.
1 In the toolbar, click the Color button and select Red free.
The image is displayed in red free.
292
IMAGE PROCESSING: Saving Image Data
 Dividing channels
This reproduces the mimic effect of applying single color filter during capturing. (The result of the
effect is different from the actual-filter-applied result.)
1 Select the Channel Separation button in the toolbar.

The Channel Separation window appears, and the original image and three images divided
into three colors are displayed.
 Displaying the histogram

Click the Histogram button from the image control bar.
The Histogram View window appears.
The graph with the checkboxes for brightness/red/

green/blue checked is displayed.
As there are no color ingredients of red/green/blue in the
F-10, these are not displayed in graph.
6.4 Saving Image Data
To save the image processed with the Image Processing function, save the image as new image. For
the processed image, new image No. is assigned and saved. The original image remains.
 Saving processed images
1 With the image processed is displayed, click the Save button .

The processed image is saved with a new image number and two windows for each of the
original image and the processed image are displayed.
293
IMAGE PROCESSING: Saving Image Data
294
7. IMAGE MEASUREMENT
7.1 Image Measurement Function
The image measuring software calculates optic disc, cup, GLD parameters of the fundus image. The
software is also provided with the functions of measuring the distance and area in the image with pix-
els.
* For the F-10 images, the GLD measurement can be performed.
* For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 OCT images, the Image Mea-
surement function cannot be used.
Use the result of distance conversion as reference values.
When performing the Distance Conversion with the AFC images, the image must be
obtained in Jpeg+XML format.
• Use the distance conversion result as a reference value. The error of the measured value
varies significantly depending on the image capturing conditions.
• The measurement result cannot be rotated.
 Start-up (for AFC images and RS-330 fundus images)
1 Select the image to be measured on the Image List screen and display it on the Image
Selection screen.
The Measurement tab becomes enabled.
2 Click the Measurement tab to display the Image Measurement tool in the tree view. 7
3 Perform measurement with the Image Measurement tool.
• For the image with no XML file, only the pixel value is displayed.
295
IMAGE MEASUREMENT: Image Measurement Function
• Open the Configuration dialog box before saving the image measurement data and click
the OK button to close the Configuration dialog box abandons the measured data.
 Start-up (for F-10 images)
1 Select the image to be measured on the Image List screen and display it on the Image
Selection screen.
The Measurement tab becomes enabled.
2 Click the Measurement tab.

The input dialog box for eyeball optics correc-
tion appears.
• It is necessary to enter the Image Selection field when the image data has no information
about a wide-angle adapter sensor. This version of NAVIS-EX does not process the F-10
image data with no sensor information.
296
IMAGE MEASUREMENT: Image Measurement Function
3 Select correction mode, enter proper correction values, then click the Update button.
When entering correction values is unnecessary, click the [ × ] button to close the dialog box.
Selection fields in eyeball optics correction mode
Gullstrand model eyes

Input value none Refraction power: +0.00 D, Kerato: 7.8 mm, Axial
length: 24.0 mm
Refraction power input -
Input refraction power of axial myopia or hyperopia.
Axial myopia and hyperopia
Refraction power input - Input refraction power of refractive myopia or
Refractive myopia and hyperopia hyperopia.
2 variable input - Ref, Kerato Input refraction power and cornea curvature.
2 variable input - Ref, Axial Input refraction power and axial length.
Input refraction power, cornea curvature, and axial
3 variable input - Ref, Kerato, Axial
length.
Refraction power (D) Input range: -15.0 D to +15.0 D

Kerato (mm) Input range: 6.5 mm to 9.0 mm
Axial length (mm) Input range: 18.0 mm to 30.0 mm
Updates to the data currently input in the dialog box.

Update button If any data is not input, the message prompting input appears.
When measured values are displayed, they are updated to the recalculated
values.
Reload button Loads the saved data and displays it in the input dialog box.
4 Select an image measurement tool for image measurement.
 Exiting 7
1 Click the Save button of the Display Switching button.
The confirmation message “Save now?” is displayed.
2 Click the Yes button to save the drawing data.
switching or such.
dialog box, data is saved without displaying a confirmation message and then the screen
changes.
297
IMAGE MEASUREMENT: Image Measurement Tool
7.2 Image Measurement Tool
Image measurement tool

The following checkboxes are used to select the data to be displayed overlapping the image.
Markup
Check box
Analysis
Selected in Image measurement function.
Check box
Caption
Check box
Image List
Check box
 Image measurement tool
Clear Clears the measurement data.
Disc Specifies a disc and calculates disc parameters.

Specifies a GLD measurement and calculates GLD parameters
GLD (enabled when the F-10 image is selected).
Line Measures a distance between two points in pixel units.
298
IMAGE MEASUREMENT: Image Measurement Tool
Circle Measures an area of circle in pixel units.
Box Measures an area of square in pixel units.
Free Measures a desired area in pixel units.
Erase Erases the selected object.
Color Selects the color assigned to the measuring tool.
Pen style Selects the pen style assigned to the measuring tool.
Brush Selects the brush assigned to the measuring tool.
Line width Selects the line width assigned to the measuring tool.
Selects the font assigned to the measuring tool. The currently selected
Font font color is displayed by the horizontal line.
• The GLD measurement can be performed only for the F-10 images.
299
IMAGE MEASUREMENT: Measuring Images
7.3 Measuring Images
7.3.1 Specifying tools

The color, pen style, brush, and line width can be specified for each individual measuring tool (Disc,
Cup, GLD, Line, Circle, Shape, and Free).
 Color
Clicking the Color button displays the dialog box.
To change the color assigned to the drawing tool, select a color
 Pen style
Clicking the arrow in the box changes the pen style assigned to
the drawing tool.
300
 Brush
Clicking the arrow in the box changes the brush style assigned
to the drawing tool.
 Line width
Clicking the up or down button changes the line width assigned to the
drawing tool.
 Font
Clicking the Font button displays the Font dialog box.
Selecting a font and clicking the OK button changes the font assigned to the drawing tool.
7.3.2 Selection tool
1) Click the Select button .

2) Click the object or select area by dragging.
301
7.3.3 Disc tool
Disc Specifies a disc and calculating disc parameters.

The starting point is displayed with and the other
points are displayed with .
Clicking the starting point again finalizes the disc

edge and outlines a disc line with a spline curve
The disc diameter (vertical), disc diameter (horizontal) and
disc area are displayed in pixel units. When the cup edge
has been finalized, Cup/Disc ratio (vertical), Cup/Disc ratio
(horizontal) and Cup/Disc area ratio are displayed.
When the finalized disk is selected with the Select tool, the
disk edge has become possible to move.
Measurement
result
302
• As the measurement result is calculated by those values of average eyes, handle the
measurement result as reference value.
• The display position of the measurement results can be moved by dragging the triangle
mark on the upper left of the measurement results.
However, when displaying the C/D ratio, do not display the caption on the left.
For the setting of the Image caption, see “1.20.8 Image Caption tab” (page 98).
7.3.4 Cup tool

The starting point is displayed with and other points
are displayed with .
Clicking the starting point again finalizes the cup

edge and outlines a cup line with a spline curve. The cup
diameter (vertical), cup diameter (horizontal) and cup area
are displayed in pixel units.
When the disc edge has been finalized, Cup/Disc ratio
(vertical), Cup/Disc ratio (horizontal) and Cup/Disc area
ratio are displayed.
When the finalized cup is selected with the Select tool, the 7
cup edge has become possible to move.
303
7.3.5 GLD measurement tool
GLD measurement Specifies a GLD measurement and calculates GLD parameters.
The GLD measurement cannot be performed for edited images such as composite ones.
The GLD measurement tool buttons become unselectable.
1 Click the left mouse button to enter four or more points to select the measurement area.
The starting point is displayed by and other points are displayed by .
2 Clicking the starting point again finalizes the

measurement area and draws the following.
• Spline curve showing the selected area
• A circle with a diameter equal to the widest part of the
selected area and a line showing the diameter
• A circle with a diameter of 500 µm greater than either
side of the widest part of the selected area
GLD (greatest diameter) and spot size are indicated
by µm units.
When the disc frame is finalized, the length between
the optic disc and spot is indicated by µm units.
304
• When the disc frame is finalized and the distance from the edge of the outside circle to that
of the optic disc is less than 200 µm, a warning message appears.
Selecting the finalized area with the selection tool can move it or change its shape.
Move Drag the selected area when the cross arrow is displayed.
Zoom in / out Rotate the mouse wheel.
Drag the handle displayed on the square frame surrounding the

Shape change 1
selected area.
Drag the handle displayed on the curved line bordering the selected
Shape change 2
area.
305
7.3.6 Line tool
Line Measures the distance between two points in pixel units.
Click the starting point and drag the mouse to

the end point. The distance between two points
is displayed in pixel units
The measurement value is displayed under the
line.
306
7.3.7 Circle tool
Circle Measures an area of circle in pixel units.

the end point. The circle area is displayed in
pixel units.
The measurement value is displayed in the cen-
ter of the circle.
307
7.3.8 Shape tool
Box Measures an area of square in pixel units.

the end point. The area of square is displayed
in pixel units
The measurement value is displayed at a
square center.
308
7.3.9 Free tool
Free Measuring the desired area in pixel units.
Drag an outline of the area desired to be mea-

sured with the mouse. The desired area is dis-
played in pixel units.
The measurement value is displayed at the
starting point of the line.
309
310
8. PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION
8.1 Outline of Panorama Image Creation
The Panorama function produces simulated wide-angle fundus images by overlapping multiple fundus
images captured at different angles.
* For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 OCT images, the Panorama
function cannot be used.
• The sample image cannot be performed the panorama composition.

• The composite image may be changed the color tone compared with the original image.
 Panorama screen
Image control bar Toolbar
Thumbnail area Workspace
311
PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION: Toolbar
8.2 Toolbar
Image control bar (Panorama function)
Panorama function tool

All buttons in the image control bar are common on the Image Wizard screen except for the following
buttons specialized for the Panorama function.
Toggles display of the Navigator window.

Navigator The Navigator window is used for changing the workspace display area and
size.
Toggles display of the Color window.
Color The Color window is used for changing the hue of images.
Toggles display of the History window.

History The History window is used for undo and redo the actions in the list.
Toggles display of the Layer window.
Layer The Layer window is used for managing the layer level of images on the
workspace, changing the image transparency, and point alignment.
The following buttons are used when selecting each multiple image.
Multi select button
Select All button Cannot be selected in Panorama function.
Deselect button
Draw Data
Check box
Result
Displays the analyzed result overlapping the displayed image.
Check box
• Drawing data and analyzed result are displayed on the thumbnail image and they are not
displayed on the image in the workspace.
• When the buttons specialized for the Panorama function are not displayed, change display
or non display in the Customize dialog box.
312
 Panorama function tool
Clear All the data on the workspace is cleared.
Undo Cancels the previous action.
Displays the Panorama tab of the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog
Panorama Setup box.
Displays the Lens calibration tab of the Fundus Panorama Image Setup
Lens Calibration dialog box.
Mask setup Displays the Mask tab of the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box.
Displays the Work space tab of the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog
Work space Setup
box.
Zoom in Magnifies the image.
Zoom out Reduces the image.
Original Image Displays the image in the original.
Zoom Fit Fit displays the image.
Return Cancels the previous panorama processing.
Execute All the data on the workspace is cleared.
Auto Aligns the image automatically and performs panorama processing.
1 Select images to be used for the Panorama composition on the Image List screen.
Place all images in the selective state to use for composition.
• A maximum of 25 images may be overlapped. Panorama processing using more than 25 8

images cannot be performed.
• Panorama processing of exceptionally large image files may fail due to lack of memory
space.
If panorama image composite fails, reduce the image size or lower the digital camera image qual-
ity setting.
313
3 Click the Panorama button in the image control bar.

The Panorama function toolbar appears.
4 Drag and drop an image from the thumbnail area to the workspace.
Images are arranged in the specified positions.
• If mask processing is set, the mask processing is performed when arranging the image
from thumbnail field to the workspace.
After arranging the image to the workspace, changing the mask setting will not be reflected to the
workspace image.
314
• When the composite image size is large, composition may fail due to insufficient memory
space.
5 In the same manner, arrange all images to overlap on the workspace.
6 Make fine alignment of the images arranged on the workspace.
 Alignment by dragging the mouse

1) Select an image to move.
* See "8.2.1 Selecting images to move" (page 317) for selecting the image.
2) Move the image to the desired position by dragging.
 Alignment using a keyboard 8

1) Select an image to move.
* See "8.2.1 Selecting images to move" (page 317) for selecting the image.
2) Move the image to the desired position with the arrow key (-,¯,¬,®) on the keyboard.
 key The image moves upward.
 key The image moves downward.
 key The image moves to the left.
 key The image moves to the right.

* Holding down the Shift key and arrow key simultaneously makes position alignment possi-
ble.
315
7 Click the Execute button in the toolbar.

When creating a panorama composite image, a
progress bar is displayed.
8 A panorama composite image is displayed.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

A message confirming the saving is displayed and clicking the Yes button saves the pan-
orama composite image as a new image.
316
8.2.1 Selecting images to move

Overlapped fundus images are layered, and each image is at a different level.
The level can be checked with the Layer window.
 Selecting images to move with the Layer

window
Click the thumbnail of an image on the Layer window.
The clicked image becomes the selective state.
 Moving the image level with the buttons in the Layer window
The buttons in the Layer window allow the user to move the image level.
Move to top Moves the image that is being selected to the foreground level.
Move to bottom Moves the image that is being selected to the bottom level.
8
Move to front Moves the image that is being selected to the higher level.
Move to back Moves the image that is being selected to the lower level.
Next image Changes the image that is being selected in order of level by clicking.
Changes the image that is being selected in the reverse order of level by
Previous image
clicking the button.
Deletes the image that is being selected from the workspace and returns to
Delete image
the thumbnail column.
317
8.2.2 Specifying the area to be stored

The area to be stored can be specified in the panorama composite image.
• When the Save button is pressed without specifying the saving area, all images in the area
are saved.
1 Select an area to store by dragging the mouse on the panorama image.

A save confirmation message is displayed and click the Yes button to save the images in the
specified area.
318
PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION: Tool Window
8.3 Tool Window
The Panorama software has the tool windows, which help to align images arranged on the workspace.
There are the tool windows as follows:
Thumbnail area
Navigator Window
Color Window
History Window
Layer Window
1 Click the button of each tool window name in the toolbar.

When the tool windows are not displayed, they are displayed.
When the tool windows are displayed, they close.
8.3.1 Thumbnail area

The thumbnail area is used when arranging the image to be overlapped.
Thumbnail area
319
 Arranging images on the workspace

Arrange images to overlap on the workspace.
1 Drag and drop the images from the thumbnail area to the workspace.
Images are arranged in the specified positions.
 Deleting images from the workspace

Delete unnecessary image from the workspace.
1 Drag and drop the selected image from the workspace to the thumbnail area.
The selected images are deleted from the workspace.
320
8.3.2 Navigator window

The Navigator window is used for changing the workspace display area and size.
Clicking the Navigator button displays the Navigator and the overall workspace is reduced displayed.
The light blue frame on the thumbnail indicates the actual display area.
 Moving workspace display area

Move the workspace display area.
Specifying the display area by clicking

Clicking any point outside the light blue frame on the thumbnail finalizes the center of the
display area.
The area whose center is the clicked coordinates is displayed.
Changing the display area by dragging the mouse

Dragging the light blue frame changes the display area.
8
 Changing workspace display size
Change the workspace display size.
Changing the display size with the slider

Dragging the uparrow mark of the slider to the left or right changes the workspace display
size.
Changing the display size by dragging the light blue frame

Dragging any point on the light blue frame changes the frame size.
The frame size change affects also the workspace display size.
321
8.3.3 Color window

The hue of the image is changed.
 Changing image hue
1 Select an image whose hue is changed.
2 Drag each uparrow mark of the RGB sliders on the Color window to the left or right.
The hue of the image becomes stronger when the value is set close to 255.
The hue of the image becomes softer when the value is set close to 0.
* When the value is 127, the hue of the image does not change.
R Changes the red hue of the image.

G Changes the green hue of the image.
B Changes the blue hue of the image.
322
8.3.4 History window

The History window contains a list of recently performed actions on the workspace. It is possible to
undo and redo the actions in the list.
The History window lists the last twenty actions that you have performed.
 Undoing operations
Undo operations on the workspace.
1 From the list of the History window, click an item (letters in black) that you want to back.
The workspace goes back to the state by clicking the item in the list.
The clicked item becomes the selective state (letters in blue).
* In the following figure, the workspace goes back to the state of “Point Change”.
323
 Redoing operations
Redo operations cancelled with the undo function.
1 From the list of the History window, click an item (letters in gray) that you want to redo.
The workspace goes back to the state by clicking the item in the list.
The clicked item becomes the selective state (letters in blue).
* In the following figure, the workspace goes back to the state of “Color change”.
324
8.3.5 Layer window

The Layer window is used for managing the layer level of images on the workspace, changing the
image transparency, and point alignment.
325
 Selecting images
Select images on the workspace from the Layer window.
1 Click a thumbnail on the Layer window.

The image on the workspace corresponding to the clicked thumbnail becomes the selective
state.
 Image level
Overlapped fundus images are layered, and each image is at a different level.
Thumbnails in the Layer window are displayed in the order of level. The upper thumbnail is in the fore-
ground level.
Moving the image level with the buttons in the Layer window
The buttons in the Layer window allow the user to move the image level.
Move to top Moves the image that is being selected to the foreground level.
Move to bottom Moves the image that is being selected to the bottom level.
Move to front Moves the image that is being selected to the higher level.
Move to back Moves the image that is being selected to the lower level.
Next image Changes the image that is being selected in order of level by clicking.
Changes the image that is being selected in the reverse order of level by
Previous image
clicking the button.
Moving the image level by dragging the mouse

The level can be moved by dragging a thumbnail on the Layer window to other thumbnail
position.
326
 Deleting Images
Delete unnecessary images from the workspace with the Layer window.
Deleting images with the button in the Layer window

Clicking the [ ] button in the Layer window deletes the selected image.
Deleting images by dragging the mouse

Dragging a thumbnail in the Layer window to the Thumbnail window deletes the image.
 Transparency
Specify the transparency of images on the workspace.
* The setting does not reflect on composite images.
1 Select an image whose transparency is changed.
2 Click the [ ] button on the Transparency field of the Layer window.

The slider appears.
8
3 Drag the mark of the slider to the left or right.
The transparency becomes lower when the value is set close to 0.
The transparency becomes higher when the value is set close to 255.
 Displaying images
Select whether images on the workspace are displayed or not.
The image selected to not-display is not displayed also in the panorama composite image.
The setting is with the [ ] checkbox in the left of thumbnails.
The box is checked The image is displayed.
The box is not checked The image is not displayed.
327
 Operation lock
Select whether the operation to images on the workspace is locked or not.
The locked image does not accept the operations such as movement, hue change, transparency
change, point alignment.
The setting is with the [ ] checkbox in the left of thumbnails
The box is checked The operation is locked.
The box is not checked The operation is not locked.
 Point alignment
Align images on the workspace with points (characteristic points).
1 Select an image to perform point alignment.
2 Set the selected image in the Layer window to the point mode.
The cross icon appears on the image of the workspace.
The setting is with the [ ] checkbox in the left of thumbnails
The box is checked Point mode
The box is not checked Normal mode
328
3 Click a (characteristic) point of the image on the workspace.

The cross icon moves to the clicked coordinates.
4 In the same manner, click the points of all images to perform point alignment.
329
5 Click the Execution button of Point align on the Layer window.

The points are aligned.
330
PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION: Settings
8.4 Settings
Each setting of the Panorama software is performed in the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog
box.
The following is set in the dialog box.
• Setting panorama composite images
• Setting lens calibration
• Setting mask
• Setting workspace size
1 Click the Setting button in the toolbar.

The Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box appears.
331
8.4.1 Panorama tab

Set the conditions of panorama composite images.
 Picture size
A panorama composite image is produced from multiple images so a computer with high specifica-
tions is required depending on the CCD camera to be used or the number of images to overlap.
When the computer is heavily loaded at the time of panorama composite processing or processing
takes time, changing the image size to overlap will lighten the load on the computer.
Select the overlapped image size with any radio button in the Picture size field.
100% The size is not changed.

50% The size is reduced to 50%.
 Result size
A panorama composite image is produced from multiple images so the produced image will be rela-
tively large in size. Thus, the overlapped image size can be changed.
Select the image result size with any radio button in the Result size field.
100% The size is not changed.

332
 Blend Type
Select a blend type to be produced the composite image.
Blending overlapped images makes the produced image seamless between images.
Select the blend type with any radio button in the Blend type field.
Blend by gradually changing the entire overlapped area to make the

Gradual
images seamless.
Half Blend by using the average of each pixel of the overlapped area.
Blend by changing the entire overlapped area to make the images

Steep seamless.
The degree of the change is higher than Gradual.
No blend.
None
Images are composed in the level of images.
 Background Color
Specify the color of the background of the panorama composite image.
Clicking the button displays the Color Setting dialog box. Select the background color and click the OK
button.
333
8.4.2 Lens calibration tab

Sets calibration of the barrel and pin-cushion distortion.
Lens calibration in the Lens Calibration tab is not performed for images captured by the F-10. There-
fore, set the correction factor (parameter) to “0”.
 Output rect type

Outer rect
The image is extracted in the circumscribed rectangle after being corrected.
Inner rect
The image is extracted in the inscribed rectangle after being corrected.
Source rect
The image is extracted in the original size after being corrected.
Source rect (Stretch)

The image is extracted in the circumscribed rectangle after being corrected, and then
reduced to the original size.
 Parameter
Adjust the calibration degree by specifying the correction factor to calibrate the lens distortion.
* When the correction factor is set to 0, no calibration will be made.
 Background Color
The background color of the unproductive area produced after lens calibration can be specified.
334
8.4.3 Mask tab

Specify the fundus area extracting (mask image extracting) method.
 Enable mask
Select whether fundus area extraction is performed or not when images to overlap are arranged on
the workspace.
The box is checked The fundus area is extracted.

The box is not checked The fundus area is not extracted.
• For composition of the F-10 image, uncheck the “Enable mask” checkbox to conduct
composition.
335
 Mask selection
Select a fundus area extraction method.
The method is selected with the radio buttons in the Mask selection field.
Mask pattern
Specify a prepared fundus area pattern and extract the fundus area.
Click the 6 button to select the mask pattern from the drop-down list.
* The fundus area cannot be extracted when the resolution pattern is different with that of the
extracted image.
Mask by luminosity is performed

Extract the fundus area by the luminosity of the fundus image.
When fundus area extraction is not successful (the fundus area is discarded or the periphery
of the image remains), adjust the tolerance level (mask level) of luminosity.
• When the fundus area is discarded, increase the mask level.
• When the periphery of the image remains, decrease the mask level.
* The mask level is selectable from 0 to 10.
336
 Importing mask pattern

Import a mask pattern.
1 Click the Mask tab in the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box.
2 Check the Enable mask checkbox in the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box, and
click the Edit button.
The Mask edit dialog box appears.
3 Click the Import button in the Mask edit dialog box.

The Open dialog box appears.
4 Select the mask pattern to be imported in the Open dialog box and click the OK button. 8
The Open dialog box closes.
337
5 Enter a mask pattern name in the Title box of the Mask edit dialog box and click the OK
button.
The mask pattern name is displayed in the List field.
6 Click the OK button in the Mask edit dialog box.

The Mask edit dialog box closes and the mask pattern is added to the drop-down list.
338
 Creating mask pattern

Create an original mask pattern.
1 Arrange the image to create the mask pattern on the workspace.
2 Click the Mask Setup button in the toolbar.

The Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box appears.
3 Check the Enable mask checkbox in the Fundus Panorama Image Setup dialog box and
click the Edit button.
The Mask edit dialog box appears.
339
4 Click the New button in the Mask edit dialog box.

The Mask image dialog box appears.
5 Click the [ ] button in the Mask image dialog box.
6 Drag the mouse on the image in the Mask image dialog box and select the fundus area.
A circle is displayed as the drag starting point is center and finishing point is circumference.
The inside of the circle (including the line) is masked.
8 Drag the mouse on the image of the Mask image dialog box and move the circle.
10 Drag the mouse on the image in the Mask image dialog box and select the fundus area.
A rectangle is displayed as the drag starting point and finishing point are opposite angle
The inside of the rectangle (including the line) is masked.
When drawing both circle and rectangle, the overlapped part (including the lines) is masked.
340
12 Drag the mouse on the image in the Mask image dialog box and move the rectangle.
13 Click the OK button in the Mask image dialog box.
The Mask image dialog box closes.
14 Enter a mask pattern name in the Title box of the Mask edit dialog box and click the OK
button.
The mask pattern name is displayed in the List field.
8
15 Click the OK button in the Mask edit dialog box.
The Mask edit dialog box closes and the created mask pattern is added in the list.
341
8.4.4 Work space tab

The workspace size is specified.
Select the workspace size with any radio button in the Work space size field.
The following sizes are selectable.
1600 X 1200 The workspace size is 1600 pixel (wide) X 1200 pixel (long).
* Reduce the workspace size when starting the Panorama software.
342
PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION: Automatic Panorama Function
8.5 Automatic Panorama Function
Aligns the image automatically and performs the Panorama Processing.
1 On the Image List screen, select the image to perform the Panorama Image Composite.
Make all the images used for composite selected status.
2 Click [Setting] - [ImageWizard] from the menu to enter the Image Wizard screen.
3 Click the Panorama button in the image control bar.

The Panorama Image Composite toolbar appears.
4 Click the Auto button in the toolbar.

Auto Panorama Image Composite is started and a progress bar dialog box appears.
8
It may take a few minutes to complete processing. To stop processing, click the Cancel but-
ton in the dialog box.
343
5 When the processing is completed, the Progress Report dialog box closes and the Pan-
orama image is displayed.
After completing the Panorama Image Composite, if the Return Workspace button is
clicked, images used for the composition are released composition of the workspace with
the current arrangement.
Each images can be adjusted.
344

A save confirmation message is displayed and click the Yes button to save the Panorama
Composite Image as new image.
7 When the Return button is clicked, save the Panorama image and return to the
345
346
9. STEREO VIEWING
9.1 Outline of the Stereo Viewing Function
Display the image captured with the AFC-330/230/210, F-10, or RS-330 by stereo technique and
observe the stereo image using the stereo viewer.
• Stereo Composite cannot be performed for the sample images.
 Stereo image creating screen
Thumbnail area Navigator window Workspace
347
STEREO VIEWING: Toolbar
9.2 Toolbar
Image control bar (Stereo function)
Stereo function tool

All buttons in the image control bar are common on the Image Wizard screen except for the following
buttons specialized for stereo function.
Toggles display of the Navigator window.

Navigator In the Navigator window, the image can be checked overall.
The following buttons are used when selecting multiple images.
Multi select button

Select All button Cannot be selected for the Stereo function.
Deselect button
Draw Data
Displays the drawing data to overlap the displayed image.
Check box
Result
Display the analyzed result to overlap the displayed image.
Check box
Stereo function tool
Clear All the data in the workspace is cleared.
Back Returns the sequence of Stereo image creation.
Proceed Proceeds the stereo image creation sequence.
Full Screen Displays the stereo image with full-screen.
348
STEREO VIEWING: Stereo Image Creation and Observation
9.3 Stereo Image Creation and Observation
1 Select the pair image captured with the Stereo function.
3 Click the Stereo button to switch to the Stereo screen.
• When an image is first selected for stereo image, the image is automatically assigned to
the workspace when switching to the Stereo screen.
349
4 Drag the thumbnail image to arrange to the workspace.
5 Adjust the position and the size of the image.

Left-click on the Moves the right-and-left image to center the clicked position and the image
image. expands at the same time.
Right-click on the The right-and-left image moves to center the clicked position and the image
image. reduces at the same time.
Moves the one side image.

Drag
This is enabled only when the image is displayed extended off the white frame line.
350
6 Click the Proceed button .

The stereo image is displayed with compounded.
When fine adjusting the image position, drag the image.
When changing the image display magnification, click the Return button to return to
Step 5.
7 Use the stereo viewer to perform stereo observation.

During observation, perform fine adjustment to the image position as necessary.
1) When displaying the stereo image with full-screen, click the Full-screen button .
The stereo image is displayed with full screen.
351
2) Use the stereo viewer to perform stereo observation.

Clicking the mouse returns to the screen in which the tool is displayed.
8 When saving the compounded stereo image, click the Save button .
Clicking the Return button saves the stereo image and return to the Patient List screen.
352
10. AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION
10.1 Outline of AF Composite Function
The Composite function enhances and makes images clear by overlapping multiple fundus images
captured at the same angles.
* The AF Composite function is only useful for the F-10 captured images.
• AF Composite cannot be performed for the sample images.
 AF composite function screen

10
353
AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION: Toolbar
10.2 Toolbar
Image control bar (AF composite function)
AF composite function tool

All buttons in the image control bar are common on the Image Wizard screen.
The following buttons are used when selecting multiple images.
Multi select button
Select All button Cannot be selected for AF Composite function.
Deselect button
Draw Data Displays the drawing data to be overlapped on the display image (image
Check box that is the basis of composition).
Result Displays the analyzed result to be overlapped on the displayed image

Check box (image that is the basis of composition).
 AF composite function tool
Release Reverses the sequence of composite image creation.
Execute Advances the composite image creation sequence.
Composite Setup Displays the Composite Setup dialog box.
354
AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION: AF Composite Image Creation
10.3 AF Composite Image Creation
1 Select images from the Image List screen for use to create an AF composite image.
Highlight all images to be used in creating a composite image.
3 Click the AF Composite button in the image control bar.

The AF Composite function toolbar appears.
10
355
4 Select an image to be the basis of composition from the thumbnail field.

The selected image is displayed in the workspace.
5 Click the Execute button in the toolbar.

When creating a composite image, progress bar is displayed.
When the Abort button is clicked, the conformation message “This process was aborted” is
displayed. Click the OK button to return to the status in Step 4.
356
6 An AF composite image is displayed.
“(Composed / Processed) = (N / N)” is displayed in the right bottom of the screen to show the
number of images actually used in the composition and the total processed images.
When a image cannot be aligned automatically, the image is excluded from the images to be
composed.
7 Check the composite image.

When releasing the image composition to change the basis image for composition, click the
Release button in the toolbar.
The image is displayed in the thumbnail field and the sequence of composite image creation
can be performed again from Step 4.
8 When saving the composite image, click the Save button .

Clicking the Return button saves the composite image and return to the Image List
screen.
• AF composite images are saved in the bitmap format.
10
357
AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION: Settings
10.4 Settings
Setting of the Composite software is performed in the Composite Setup dialog box.
1 Click the Composite Setting button in the toolbar.

The Composite Setup dialog box appears.
The tracking mode of composition can be set to High Speed or Normal.
• When set to High Speed, the number of images used to perform composition may be
different compared to Normal.
358
11. COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION
11.1 Outline of Color Composite Function

11
Using the color composite image creation function, false-color images can be created by combining
multiple images captured using different light sources in Manual mode.
* The Color composite function is only useful for F-10 captured images.
• Color composite cannot be performed on the sample images.
 Color composite function screen

359
COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION: Toolbar
11.2 Toolbar
Image control bar (Color composite function)
Color composite function tool

All buttons on the Image control bar are the same as the Image Wizard screen.
The buttons below are used to select multiple images.
Multi select button
Select All button Cannot be selected for the color composite image creation function.
Deselect button
The check boxes below are used to select the type of data to be superimposed on the image.
Draw Data
Superimposes draw data on the displayed image (base image).
Check box
Result
Superimposes analysis results on the displayed image (base image).
Check box
• Draw data and an analysis results are displayed only on the thumbnail image. They are
not displayed on the image in the workspace.
 Color composite function tool
Release Used to undo the previous action for the color composite image creation.
Execute Used to proceed with the color composite image creation sequence.
360
COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION: Color Composite Image Creation
11.3 Color Composite Image Creation
1 Select images to be used to create a color composite image from the Image List screen.
Highlight all images to be used to create a color composite image. A maximum of three
11
images of the same size can be selected.
3 Click the Color composite button on the image control bar.

The Color composite function toolbar appears.
361
4 Click the Execute button on the tool bar.

While a color composite image is being created, a progress bar is displayed.
If images of different sizes are selected, or more than three images are selected, an error
message appears, and the color composite image cannot be created.
• The same message appears when Edited or Scope images are selected to create a color
composite image.
5 An color composite image is displayed.
362
“(Color) = (# + # + #)” is displayed at the bottom right of the screen to show the types of
images used to create the color composite image. (# represents IR, R, G, or B.)
Images that cannot be aligned automatically are excluded, and are not used for the color
composite image.
11
6 Check the color composite image.
To cancel the color composite image and change the base image, click the Release button
on the tool bar.
The images are displayed in the thumbnail area and a color composite image can be cre-
ated again from Step 3.
7 Click the Save button to save the color composite image.

Clicking the Return button saves the color composite image and returns to the Image
List screen.
363
364
12. VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE
Fundus image
For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Lite/RS-3000 Advance/RS-330, the fundus image for the OCT image can
be displayed for reference. Since the image acquisition principles are different between the RS-3000,
RS-3000 Advance, and the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 (image generation from SLO image/OCT image) the
image appearance differs.
12
Fundus image of the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance Fundus image of the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330
In this manual, the RS-3000 image is used for explanation.
12.1 Viewer Screen
The OCT images captured by the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000Lite/RS-330 are displayed or

referred to on the Viewer screen.
1 Select an image to be displayed from the Image List screen and display it in the Viewer
screen.
Double-click the thumbnail of the selected
image. Or click the Forward button.
365
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Viewer Screen
• A maximum of 31 images can be selected. However, only two images can be selected for
the Macula map and Disc map. When the Forward button is clicked with three or more
images selected, an error message is displayed.
Clicking the OK button displays the first two images.

• When the display area of the Viewer screen becomes small, the characters in the Viewer
screen becomes small and difficult to read or may be disappeared from the screen.
2 The selected image is displayed. Change the display conditions and refer to the image.
Toggles display by
checking the Markup or
Caption box
Moving the cursor over the OCT image Displayed by checking the Image List.
displays the operation buttons. (When an image is selected in the Image List, the
image cannot be displayed in the data area.)
Some display conditions are displayed on the screen such as tab, slider, or pull-down
menus. Other conditions are executed by pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking.
366
 When images for both right and left eyes are selected
When images for both right and left eye captured on the same date are selected and the
Forward button is clicked, the two images are displayed at the same time. To switch to Sin-
gle display, press the Display Switching button.
When three or more images are selected, the images are not displayed together.
Capture information-1 Both eye graph Display Switching buttons
12
Indicates which direction (horizontal/vertical) is displayed in the both eye

graph. For the Both tab, click here to change the display. Capture information-2
LBS, LBE, Color, and Both/Horizontal/Vertical tabs are set to both eyes in common.
For the both eye graph (layer thickness graph), the right eye graph is displayed in pink and the left eye
graph is displayed in blue.
The capture information is displayed together with, two lines of text information for each eye.
• When data other than Macula Map and Disc Map is Single displayed, the screen layout
changes between right eye and left eye.
• The sample image cannot be displayed for the eye image in pair.
367
 The Option menu displayed by right-clicking on image

Place the pointer over the target image and right-click to display the pop-up menu.
• If the mouse is moved when right-clicking, the pop-up menu may not be displayed. When
right-clicking, be sure not to move the mouse.
• “Layer”, “Color”, “Show Cross Image”, and “Full Size” can also be selected by the buttons
displayed by moving the cursor over the OCT image.
• “Full Size” can also be selected from the button displayed by moving the cursor over the
fundus image.
OCT Fundus
image image
Specifies display or not display the layer borderline for the
Layer
displayed OCT image.
Select from Show Layer, All, ILM, NFL/GCL, IPL/INL, OPL/ONL, IS/
 ×
OS, RPE/BM, and Manual. (Multiple selection is allowed.)
Select the OCT image color from among Positive (B/W), Negative
Color
(B/W), and Color.
Selecting “Release” returns to the color setting when the image is
 ×
captured.
Measure
Displays the OCT image with a measurement scale.
Scale 1 and 2 can be displayed and moved along the image.
 ×
Digital Smoothing Displays the smoothed OCT image.  ×
Show Cross Image Displays the OCT image captured by cross image capture (RS-
(Macula map) 3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 only).
Selecting this item again displays the OCT image with original
dividing line.
 ×
* The RS-3000 Advance has to be updated to a compatible version to
use this function.
Displays the image of the layer to be edited for the recalculated
Layer Editor
OCT image.
Layers of the sample image cannot be edited when patient data is
 ×
selected that is being accessed by another computer.
Displays the image in full size.
Full Size Right-clicking and selecting “Return to Normal Size” returns the  
image to the normal display.
Saves the image as a bitmap file in the specified folder with the
Save As Bitmap
displayed status.
 
Raw OCT to Save As Saves only the raw image of the displayed image as the bitmap
Bitmap file in the specified folder.
 
Show Anterior
Displays the Anterior segment observation image. (RS-3000
Segment Observation
Advance/ RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 only)
× 
Image
368
 Scope setting tool

Brightness, Contrast, and Zoom can be used. Brightness
Clicking the Reset button returns the

display to the initial status. Contrast
Zoom
12
• The Scope setting tool changes the selected image (displayed in the green frame).
• After magnifying the image, the image can be panned by dragging the image.
 Display Switching button
The following operation can be performed with the Display Switching button.
Reset Resets the image to the initial status.
Original Size Displays the image in original size.
First Displays the first image when multiple images are selected.
Previous Displays the previous image when multiple images are selected.
Next Displays the next image when multiple images are selected.
Last Displays the last image when multiple images are selected.
• The buttons other than those described above are disabled.
 Standard buttons
Ends the image display in full size and returns to the display in original
Return
size.
Both Displays the right and left eye images at the same time.
Right Displays the right eye image.
Left Displays the left eye image.
Start recording a movie

Starts or stops recording a 3D movie.
Stop recording a movie
Link Sends the data to the host system as set by the communication function.
369
Save config Saves the current screen settings.

Export the analytic value in CSV/TSV format.
Export analytic value Select the types of file (CSV format/TSV format) when saving the file.
• The Link button is enabled when “Link up with the external system” is set in the Link tab.
In addition, the function changes in accordance with the setting of “Operation when the Link
button is clicked” under the Link tab in the Setting Dialog of the Viewer screen.
For details, see “1.20.12 Link tab” (page 107) and “12.2 Setting Viewer Screen” (page 372).
• The above illustration is just for explanation. Under actual conditions not all buttons are
enabled.
• Some OS require additional software to display recorded 3D video. Install video viewer
software such as Windows Media Player as necessary.
 Checkbox
Select the data to be overlapped on the displayed image.
Displays the line indicating the captured position and point indicating the
position of synchronous line.
Markup
For the Macula Map and Disc Map, removing the check also cancels the
overlay display.
Analysis Cannot be selected.
Caption Displays a caption on the fundus image.
Image list Displays the image list on the lower part of the image display area.
• To set an image caption, see “1.20.8 Image Caption tab” (page 98).
• The check boxes displayed in the Image List screen (Markup and Analysis) do not
synchronize.
370
 Capture information-1
Conditions when the image is captured are displayed.
OCT capture mode (Capturte width [Scan point]: Scan Pitch)
Image evaluated value of SLO image Focus adjustment

Image evaluated value of OCT image
12
Captured eye SLO capture mode Axial length SET AL button RESET AL button
Captured date
SET AL Displays the Eyeinfo setting dialog box for inputting axial length.
Initializes the setting information of axial length to the default (Gullstrand model
RESET AL
eye = 24.38mm).
• When the image captured with the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 is displayed, SLO capture mode
is not displayed.
The SLO capture mode of the images captured with the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 is treated as Wide.
 Capture information-2
The captured RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 serial No. and the software
version are displayed.
Serial No. of the device Software version
371
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Setting Viewer Screen
12.2 Setting Viewer Screen

Sets the display of the Viewer screen in “Setting Dialog”.
To display “Setting Dialog”, select “RSViewer Property” from “Setup” menu in the Viewer screen.
• The settings in the Value Export tab, Color Control tab, Link tab, and Multimodal Analysis
tab are specific to each client. Settings other than those are common to all clients in the
NAVIS-EX network.
 Image Analyze tab

Sets the conditions of OCT Analyze and
Registration.
If “ReAnalyze when Analyze Engine is
different” is checked, the data whose
analysis engine is different is reanalyzed.
In addition, if “ReAnalyze when it was
edited” is checked, the edited data is
also reanalyzed.
The Registration setting is only available
for the Follow-Up function. The setting
can be performed on the Setting Dialog
box displayed by selecting “RSViewer
Property” on the Follow-Up screen.
See “13.3.7 Follow-Up screen setting”
(page 490).
“OCTA Analyze” is the setting of the density of analysis executed under the AngioScan tab
for the Macula Map or Disc Map. “Vessel Density” or “Perfusion Density” can be selected.
The color map is displayed with the analysis values of the selected analysis type.
For image data saved with a prior version of NAVIS-EX, by checking “Be use when Eyeinfo File
exist”, the eye axial length set with the prior version is carried over.
When it is not checked, the axial length of the eye information file is not used and all data is
set to the default, Gullstrand (24.38 mm). Input the axial length when necessary.
• In NAVIS-EX Ver. 1.4.0 or prior versions, the axial length was saved in the eye information
file. With Ver.1.4.1 or later, the axial length is registered in the NAVIS-EX database and no
eye information file is created.
372
 Retina Layer tab

Select LBS or LBE of the thickness map
to be displayed as macula map for the
Macula and Glaucoma tabs.
The setting of the LBS or LBE of the

thickness map is displayed in the map
name on the screen.
12
Indicates that the thickness map is between

ILM(LBS) to RPE/BM(LBE).
 Report tab
Sets the Report screen.
Set the Graph Background Color (Black
or White), Radial Scan Report Setting
(Selected OCT + Graph or All OCT
Images).
In addition, set resolution of the image to
be sent to the host system specified in
the Communication field.
373
When “Add Release Setting” is checked, the release setting is added to the format of the
printed or exported data.
Display / non-display of “Release setting”

is switched.
• When Radial is displayed in pair, “Selected OCT + Graph” is applied as Radial Scan
Report Setting.
 Value Export tab

For the analytic value export, set the
Thickness Map Export Method.
However, for the DiscMap, the export
method cannot be set with the current
version.
For the contents of the analytic value to
be exported, see “12.3 Analytic Value
Export Contents” (page 378).
374
 Thickness Setting tab

Set the color scale for the retinal thickness display.
Specify the upper value between 50 to 2000.
The default setting is 125, 250, 500, and 1000. Click-
ing the Reset button resets all the values to their
default settings.
The differential setting is for the differential map set-
ting in the Follow-up screen. This setting is active
when the setting dialog box is displayed in the Fol- 12
low-up screen.
 Color Control tab

Set the brightness, contrast, and intensity of Positive
(B/W), Negative (B/W), and Color images.
Checking the “Set each color correction value for
printing” box enables the “Print” field on the right.
 Axial Length Compensation tab

The initial value of the axial length in Normative
Database, 24.38 mm (Gullstrand model eye), cannot
be changed.
When RESET AL button is pressed, the axial length
is reset to 24.38 mm, and “Gullstrand” is displayed.
The input field of Long Axial Length NDB can be
used only when the optional Long Axial Length Nor-
mative Database is installed.
375
 Link tab
Sets the data to be transferred to the host system by
DICOM or some other standard.
With “Operation when the Link button is clicked” selected, the types of data to be transferred by click-
ing the Link button can be selected from examination data containing multiple OCT images.
The function to display the “Send all reports to other system” sub menu is enabled with the
conditions below.
Macula Radial 6/12 (one eye), Macula Radial 6/12 (both eyes)
Disc Radial 6/12 (one eye), Disc Radial 6/12 (both eyes)
Macula Multi Cross (one eye), Macula Multi Cross (both eyes)
Macula Multi H-V Line (one eye), Macula Multi H-V Line (both eyes)
Cornea Radial 6/12 (one eye), Cornea Radial 6/12 (both eyes)
Send current report to other

Sends a report of the currently displayed OCT image.
system
Send all reports to other system Sends all reports of all OCT images for the examination data at a time.
Display sub menu Displays and sends the sub menu by clicking the Link button.
In addition, when Radial Scan Report Setting under the Report tab is “All
OCT Images”, reports of all OCT images are sent without displaying the
sub menu.
• In the data transfer using the link function, color fundus images and FAF images that have
already been transferred are not transferred.
To transfer color fundus images or FAF images that have been transferred again, see “2.1.11
Transferring images with the Communication function” (page 161) (link function in the Image List
screen).
376
 Screen Layout tab

Sets the image between the Deviation Map and the
Fundus image to be displayed in the Overall tab, Mac-
ula tab, and Glaucoma tab of the Macula Map.
12
 Multimodal Analysis tab

The type of image to overlay on the registration
image can be selected between Fundus Image and
En face Image.
• When Fundus Image is selected, note that proper alignment may not be achieved
between the OCT image and the fundus observation image.
The misalignment can be avoided by performing the Tracing image capture.
377
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Analytic Value Export Contents
12.3 Analytic Value Export Contents

The analytic value export file is comprised of the following four components.
Patient information Patient information

Capture mode OCT capture mode
Capture information Information of the image when captured
Analytic value Layer thickness, analytic chart value, etc.
• Images of Cornea Line, Cornea Cross, Cornea Radial, and ACA Line cannot be exported.
• When the image is displayed in pair, the information for both the right and left eyes is
exported.
In this case, in comparison with the left eye single display, the orders of the exported left
eye information for both the analytic value and the OCT image number are reversed on
the left and right side viewed from the nasal side. (except for Disc circle)
12.3.1 Patient Information

The exported patient information includes the following.
Patient ID Patient identification

Name Patient name
DOB Date of Birth
Age Patient age
Gender Patient gender
History Case history
Comment Additional patient information
12.3.2 Capture mode

OCT capture mode (OCT Setting) of “ Capture information-1” (page 371) in “12.1 Viewer Screen”
(page 365) is exported.
12.3.3 Capture information

The capture information includes the following.
Eye Captured eye
S/N Serial number
Version (F/S) Software version
Date Captured date
SSI Image evaluation value
SLO SLO Capture mode
Focus [D] Focus adjustment
Ref [D] Refractive power (only index is output and the value is not output)
Axial [mm] Axial length
SQI 5-scale evaluation of SLO image
• When the setting information of the axial length is the default (Gullstrand model eye), the
axial length value is exported as “0.0”.
378
12.3.4 Analytic Value

The analytic value differs according to the capture pattern.
The value is exported in the order of analytic values LBS and LBE setting, Analyze chart value, and
Analytic value.
 Macula Line, Macula Cross, Macula Multi, Macula Radial, Disc Radial
The thickness of LBS and LBE displayed on the screen for all points captured in the OCT image is
exported.
The numbers of OCT image are as follows.
12
OCTV
OCT1 OCTH
Macula Line Macula Cross
OCTV1
OCTV3
OCTV2
OCTV4
OCTV5
OCT3
OCT5
OCT2
OCT4
OCT1
OCT1
OCT2 OCTH1
OCT3 OCTH2
OCTH3
OCT4 OCTH4
OCT5 OCTH5
Macula Multi (horizontal) Macula Multi (vertical) Macula Multi (Cross)

OCT1
OCT1
OCT2
OC
OC
OC
T3
T2
T
4
OC OC
T3 T5
OCT6
OCT4 OCT7
OCT8
T5 T9
OC OC
10
T
OC
1
T6
T1
2
OCT1
OC
OC
Macula /Disc Radial 6 Macula /Disc Radial 12
For all points of the OCT images, the base of the arrow is the index point “0”, and the tip of the arrow
is the index far point.
The far point index differs according to the captured condition.
379
 Macula Map
As an analyze chart, all sector values and size of ETDRS, GChart, and S/I are exported.
Export the Macula disease (FullRetina) data as “Thickness 1” and Glaucoma (Glaucoma For
Macula) data as “Thickness 2”.
For the OCT image thickness, the settings are according to the thickness map export setting
selected in the Analytic Export tab in “12.2 Setting Viewer Screen” (page 372).
The x [deg] and y [deg] coordinates indicating the position are defined as follows:
(+) y[deg]
The position is indicated as coordinates with a +/- angle in
reference to the center of the analyze chart (x direction = 0
[deg], y direction = 0 [deg]).
When there is no thickness data at the point indicated in
(-) (+)
the coordinate, “-” (hyphen) is exported.
(0[deg], 0[deg]) x[deg]
(-)
 Disc Map
As an analyze chart, all sector values of Whole, Sup/Inf (two-way split), TSNIT (four-way split), and
Clock Hour (twelve-way split) are exported.
As an analytic value of optic disc, C/D ratio (horizontal), C/D ratio (vertical), R/D ratio (minimum), R/D
ratio (angle), Disc area, and Cup area are exported.
 Disc Circle
For all points of captured OCT image, the currently displayed thicknesses of LBS and LBE are
exported.
The thickness values on the circumference of the TSNIT graph are exported starting and ending at the
temporal point (from index 0 to the last).
S S
T N N T
I I
Right eye Left eye
As an analyze chart, the whole average (Whole), superior average (Superior), and inferior average
(Inferior) are exported.
380
 Measurement area of Angio Scan En face image

Macula map
In the grid chart, ETDRS chart, and G chart, the blood vessel density (VD) and perfusion density (PD)
of each sector, the name of the selected slab, and the chart size of the ETDRS / G chart are output.
With the FAZ parameter, the area, perimeter, circularity, and axial ratio are output.
Values are output to the second decimal place.
Disc map
In the S/I chart, and TSNIT chart, the blood vessel density (VD) and perfusion density (PD) of each
12
sector, the name of the selected slab, and the chart size are output.
Values are output to the second decimal place.
381
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Macula Line, Macula Cross)
12.4 Image Display Menu (Macula Line, Macula Cross)
Observation of the OCT image and display of thickness graph can be performed using the Macula
Line data and Macula Cross data.
Macula Line
Macula Cross
For the both eye tab, graph is not

displayed.
Click the tab to switch the dis-

play.
Horizontal tab Vertical tab
382
12.4.1 Display / non-display of layer

Specifies whether or not to display the layer of the displayed OCT image.
Select “Layer” and select from Show Layer,
All, ILM, NFL/GCL, IPL/INL, OPL/ONL, IS/
OS, RPE/BM, and MANUAL from the pop-up
menu displayed by right-clicking on the OCT
image. (Multiple selection is allowed)
Selecting the layer again with the layer dis-
played hides the layer.
Selecting “Show Layer” displays the layers
12
selected in the pop-up menu. When “Show
Layer” is not selected, no layers are dis-
played. However, the selection of layers to be
displayed is retained.
(Used for averaging / total capturing)

OCT sensitivity (Reguler/Fine/UltraFine)
HD/Tracing HD
OCT image type (Retinal/Choroidal)
OCT image intensity (-10 to +10)
When “All” is selected (Manual is not set)

• The OCT sensitivity is displayed only for the image captured with the RS-3000 Advance/
RS-3000 Lite/RS-330.
• Tracing HD and OCT image type are displayed only in the image captured with the RS-
3000 Advance.
• Depending on the display size of the OCT image, abbreviated image captions are
displayed.
Ex. Regular = R, Intensity +5 = +5
Red ILM (Inner Limiting Membrane)
Orange NFL/GCL (Nerve Fiver Layer / Ganglion Cell Layer)
Yellow IPL/INL (Inner Plexiform Layer / Inner Nuclear Layer)
Green OPL/ONL (Outer Plexiform Layer / Outer Nuclear Layer)
Blue IS/OS (Inner Segments / Outer Segments)
383
Purple RPE/BM (Retinal Pigment Epithelium / Bruch's Membrane)
Deep blue Manual (optional Layer set by the Layer Editor)
The layer colors in the above table are for when the color setting of the OCT image is Posi-
tive (B/W) or Negative (B/W). When the setting is set to Color, all the layers are displayed in
white.
The display setting of each layer borderline can also be changed in the pop-up menu displayed by
moving the cursor over the OCT image.
1) The button is displayed by moving the cursor over the OCT image.
2) Moving the cursor over the Layer button when set to On displays option buttons. When
Layer button is set to Off, clicking the button displays the option buttons.
3) Select the desired layer border buttons. Clicking the button causes the layer to appear or
disappear.
Selected layer border buttons are outlined in white.
384
12.4.2 Color
Changes the display color of the OCT image.
From the pop-up menu displayed by right
clicking on the OCT image, select “Color” and
select from “Positive (B/W)”, “Negative (B/
W)”, or “Color”.
Selecting “Release” returns to the color set-
ting when the image is captured.
All OCT images are changed as well. 12
Positive (B/W)
Negative (B/W)
Color
The color of the OCT image can also be changed in the pop-up menu displayed by moving the cursor
over the OCT image.
385
1) The button is displayed by moving the cursor over the OCT image.
2) Moving the cursor over the button displays the option buttons.
3) Select the desired image button.

The far left button indicates the current setting. Clicking this button cycles the image color in the
following order: Positive, Negative, Color, and Release.
12.4.3 Intensity
Sets the intensity of the OCT image and fundus image (En face image).
Pointing the cursor over the OCT image displays the buttons to change the inten-
sity of the OCT image from -10 to +10.
The current intensity is displayed at the top left of the image.
• The buttons are only displayed for images whose intensity can be changed.
386
12.4.4 Measure
Displays a scale and align on the OCT image for measurement.
CAUTION • For the measurement value, an error may generated according to the eye shape
and measurement part. In addition, the same error may generated by wearing the
glasses.
Open the pop-up menu by right clicking on

the OCT image and select “Measure”. Select
“Measure1” and “Measure2”. (Multiple selec- 12
tion is allowed)
The scale can be moved by cursor aligned on
and dragged with the cross arrow cursor sta-
tus.
The scale can be expanded or contracted by
aligning the cursor to the upper or lower end
of the scale and dragging with the cursor in
the cross arrow status.
When “Measure1” is selected
Select menu again or double-click the center part of the scale deletes the measurement
value and arrow.
• When the OCT image is extended off the frame by magnifying, the scale is not displayed.
• When the scale is contracted to a certain amount, the shape
changes as in the figure to the right.
• When “Reset” is selected, the scale returns to the original
position in the OCT image display.
387
12.4.5 Digital Smoothing

Displays the OCT image with smoothing processing.
Select “Digital Smoothing” from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking on the OCT
image.
Digital Smoothing is only performed for displayed images. It is not performed on the saved
original image.
Selecting “Digital Smoothing” again cancels the Digital Smoothing.
12.4.6 Editing layers

Displays the layer of layer image to be edited of the recalculated OCT image and edits the layer.
• When the right and left eyes are selected and the Single display is selected, Layer Edit
cannot be selected.
• For Manual, the layer can be set in each screen after editing the layer.
1 Select “Layer Editor” from the pop-up

menu displayed by right-clicking the OCT
image.
The OCT image is displayed in the Edit-
ing screen.
The Editing toolbar is displayed in the
upper part of the Editing screen.
Editing toolbar
The following operations can be performed with the Edit tool.
Reset Resets the layer to the initial state of the editing.

Recalculates the layer.
ReCalculation The recalculation results may be different from the initial calculation.
Panning and scale movement can be controlled by the mouse.
Operate Zoom The cursor changes from the cursor indication of Draw Line and Erase Line to
normal arrow cursor.
Spline Enters the layer Spline mode.
Draw Line Enters the layer Draw mode.
388
Erase Line Enters the layer Erase mode.
Selects the layer to be edited.

Layer Selection
“Show the confirm dialog” Checking this box displays the confirmation dialog box when editing is
check box performed.
Exit without saving Exits the Editor screen without saving the edit contents.
Exit with saving Exits the Editor screen after saving the edit contents.
Setting Reflects editing with Spline mode.

12
Clear Clears editing with Spline mode.
[<<], [<], [>], [>>]
Changes displayed OCT images.
Image change
Right click to open the pop-up menu to perform the following operations.
Edit the layer under the

Changes the layer under the cursor to the edit target (pink).
cursor
Select from among “Operate Zoom”, “Spline (Spline mode)”, “Draw
Edit mode
Line”, or “Erase Line”.
Select the display color from among Positive (B/W), Negative (B/W), and
Color.
Color
Selecting “Release” returns to the color setting when the image was
captured.
Displays the OCT image with a measurement scale.

Measure
Measure 1 and 2 can be displayed and moved along with the image.
Digital Smoothing Displays the smoothed OCT image.

Saves the OCT image as a bitmap file in the specified folder with the
Save As Bitmap
displayed status.
Raw OCT to Save As Saves only the raw OCT image of the displayed image as a bitmap file in
Bitmap the specified folder.
2 Selects the layer to be edited from the selection

box.
Or double-click the layer of the image to select.
The selected layer is displayed in pink and unse-
lected layer are displayed in blue.
3 Draw a new layer with Draw mode or Spline

mode.
389
Editing in the Drawing mode
1) Click the Draw Line button to enter the

Drawing mode.
The cursor is displayed in as a pencil in
the Drawing mode.
2) Edit the new line by dragging.

The entered line is drawn in white and after drag-
ging is finished, the layer is overwritten.
Editing in Spline mode
1) Click the Spline mode button to enter Spline mode.

For the Spline mode, the cursor is displayed as pencil ( ).
2) Click the position that is seen as layer with the
mouse button.
When two or more points are clicked, a line passing
through those clicked points are automatically
drawn.
To clear the drawings, click the clear button.
• Maximum of 30 points can be arranged.
3) After drawing, click the Set button to

determine the edited contents.
• When “Show the confirm dialog” is checked, a confirmation message is displayed after
editing operation. Clicking the OK button executes the operation.
4 Click the Erase Line button to enter Erasing mode.

The cursor is displayed in as an eraser ( ) in the Erasing mode.
390
5 Erase the part of the layer to be edited by dragging.
6 Repeat Steps 2 to 5 to edit the layer in the same way.
7 Click the Exit with saving button to save the edit contents.
When the Exit without saving button is clicked, the edit contents are canceled and the
Editor screen is closed.
For an OCT image whose borderline has been edited, an Edit icon is displayed at the
lower right of the image. 12
12.4.7 Displaying images in full size

Displays the Fundus image or OCT image in full size.
1 Open the pop-up menu by right-clicking

and select “Full Size” for the image to be
displayed in full size.
The image is displayed in full size.
“Return to Normal size” button “Normal Size button”
Fundus image OCT image
2 Right-clicking the image and selecting “Return to Normal Size” from the displayed pop-
up menu returns the image to the normal display.
Clicking the “Return to Normal size” button or “Normal Size” button displayed by mov-
ing the cursor over the image also returns the image to the normal display.
391
12.4.8 Saving image data

Save the Fundus image or OCT in bitmap format.
Raw images or displayed images can be selected and saved.
1 Open the pop-up menu by right-clicking and select “Save As Bitmap” or “Raw OCT to
Save As Bitmap” for the image to be saved.
Saves the Fundus or OCT image as a bitmap file in the specified folder
Save As Bitmap
with the displayed status.
Raw OCT to Save As Saves only the raw Fundus or raw OCT image as a bitmap file in the
Bitmap specified folder.
2 The Save As dialog box is displayed. Specify the saving location and file name then click
the Save button.
No file format other than bitmap format can be selected.
• Displayed images are saved as the displayed size and Raw images are saved as the
captured size because all images are not necessarily saved at the same size depending
on their display conditions. Be careful when using images for comparison.
Example of output image
OCT image (Save As Bitmap) OCT image (Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap)
Image with layer and scale are displayed
392
12.4.9 Setting the graph display

When Macula Line data is selected or when “Horizontal” or “Vertical” tab of Macula Cross data is
selected, a graph indicating the thickness of the layer is displayed on the lower part of the OCT image.
The horizontal axis of the graph displays the distance from the start point and the vertical axis displays
the thickness (µm) between LBS and LBE.
12
Synchronization slider
LBS box LBE box Move the synchronous line by dragging to indi-
Select from the drop-down Select from the drop-down cate which part of the image thickness is dis-
menu menu played.
• In synchronization with movement of the synchronous line, synchronous line on the OCT
image and yellow circle on the Fundus image also move.
• Aligning the cursor on the graph displays the thickness of the layer at that position.
Changing vertical axis scale

From the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the graph, vertical axis scale can be spec-
ified.
Max125[µm] The maximum value of the vertical axis is fixed as 125 µm.
Max Auto Select from 125/ Selects the maximum value of vertical axis from among 125/250/
250/500/1000[µm] 500/1000µm automatically. Even if the layer specification is
changed, the maximum value does not change.
Max Auto Select by LBS-LBE The value changes automatically according to the combination of
LBS and LBE.
393
• The maximum values of 125, 250, 500, and 1000 are the default values. These maximum
values can be changed in the Thickness Setting tab in the Setting Dialog box.
For settings, refer to “ Thickness Setting tab” (page 375).
12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display

The fundus image display type can be selected according to the captured device.
Fundus Image Fundus image

OCT Phase Fundus Image Fundus image generated from the phase difference of the image
(RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 only)
Color Fundus Image→[Color] Color fundus image (RS-330 only)
Additionally, Color/ Red Free / Emboss+ / Emboss- images can be
selected.
This display cannot be selected when no color fundus image has been
captured.
Color Fundus Image→[FAF] FAF image (fundus autofluorescence image) (RS-330 only)
Additionally, Color/ Red Free / Emboss+ / Emboss- images can be
selected.
captured.
Fundus SLO image Not available
• OCT Phase fundus image may not be selectable depending on the displayed image.
Select the image to be displayed from the pop-up menu

displayed by right-clicking on the image.
Non-selectable menu items are displayed in gray.
Menu display of the RS-330 image
394
Aligning the cursor on the color fundus image (Color/FAF) on the screen displays icons. Select the
image type from among Color/Red Free/Emboss+/Emboss- by clicking on the icon.
Image being displayed
Color
Red Free
Emboss+: Normal emboss image 12

Emboss-: Invert emboss image
395
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Macula Multi)
12.5 Image Display Menu (Macula Multi)

For the Macula Multi Horizontal, Macula Multi Vertical, and Macula Multi Cross, select from the five
lines in each directions to display the OCT image.
• The Macula Multi Horizontal and the Macula Multi Vertical cannot be captured with the RS-
3000 Lite.
Perform the same operation as with Macula Line and Macula Cross except for selecting the line.
Macula Multi Horizontal
Click the thumbnail to select which line of

OCT image to display.
On the Fundus image, the selected line
is displayed in red and other lines are
displayed in green.
For the thumbnail, the selected thumb-
nail is displayed with the red frame.
Macula Multi Vertical

displayed in green.
Macula Multi Cross

displayed in green.
When Horizontal/Vertical tabs are se-
lected, only the selected side can be se-
lected the red frame.
396
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Macula Radial)
12.6 Image Display Menu (Macula Radial)
For the Macula Radial 6, Macula Radial 12, select from the radial lines of 6 directions (30° interval)
and 12 directions (15° interval) to display the OCT image.
• The Macula Radial cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.
The same operations are performed as with Macula Line and Macula Cross except for the following
differences. 12
Optional lines can be selected from the radial lines.
The layer thickness map is displayed in color scale.
The graph to be displayed can be selected.
The layer thickness can be displayed with the Analyze chart.
Macula Radial 6
OCT image lines are displayed in 6 direc-

tions (30° interval).
The lines are not displayed if the “Mark-
up” checkbox is not checked.
Click the button to select which line of OCT

image to display.
is displayed in red and the other lines
are displayed in green.
When “Compare symmetry OCT” is se-
lected for the graph, the line is displayed
in orange.
When “Ratio (Lower/Upper)”, “Diff (Low-
er-Upper)”, or “Log10 (Lower/Upper)” is
selected, the line for Lower is displayed
Graph selection Thickness display
in orange. Layer thickness map/Analyze chart
397
Macula Radial 12
OCT image lines are displayed in 12 direc-

tions (15° interval)
Layer Thickness Map/Analyze chart

Displays the layer thickness map/analyze chart selected in the Thickness display field.
For the Thickness map, the layer thickness map
of the set LBS or LBE is displayed in a color
scale. Around the outer edge of the map, the
average thickness of the area is displayed and
the selected line is displayed in red.
The thickness value of the X mark position is dis-
played in the upper right of the map.
Moving the cursor to any position on the map
displays the thickness at that position.
To reset the position of the X mark to the center

after moving it, select "Reset" from the pop-up
menu displayed by right-clicking the X mark.
The moved X mark position is saved.
For “ETDRS”, “GChart”, and “S/I”, subdivide the

area to display the average thickness between
LBS and LBE (µm) with each analyze chart.
• Even if the graph type is changed, thickness map/analyze chart display are not changed.
• When “Ratio (Lower/Upper)”, “Diff (Lower-Upper)”, or “Log10 (Lower/Upper)” is selected,
the red line on the thickness map is not displayed.
398
Graph display
A graph indicating the layer thickness is displayed.
The horizontal axis of the graph indicates the distance from the starting point and the vertical
axis of the graph indicates the thickness between LBS and LBE (µm).
12
Graph selection
The graph can be selected from among “Select OCT”, “Compare Symmetry OCT”, “Ratio
(Lower/Upper)”, “Diff (Lower-Upper)”, or “Log10 (Lower/Upper)” and displays symmetry of
the layer thickness and distribution of the difference.
Thickness display
Select the map/analyze chart to be displayed in “Layer thickness map/Analyze chart” from
Thickness map, ETDRS, GChart, and S/I.
399
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Macula Map)
12.7 Image Display Menu (Macula Map)

Macula Map display can be switched by selecting among the Overall tab, 3D tab, Macula tab, Glau-
coma tab, Image tab, and En face tab. For AngioScan, the AngioScan tab is displayed instead of the
En face tab. The layout of the template is displayed.
• Comparison with Normative Database can be used when “Asian” or “Caucasian” is

selected for the Race. When the other option is selected for the Race, “For Use Demo
Only” is displayed as a warning.
• Normative Database corresponds to age 20 to 79. When the patient’s age is 80 or older,
“Over Age 80(Reference Data)” is displayed and when the patient’s age is younger than
20, “Invalid Age” is displayed to bring notice for handling of the data.
• For a color map being compared with Normative Database, areas of no Normative
Database are displayed in gray.
• For the Macula Map, the caption display is effective only for the Fundus image in full-
display.
• As the captured image data is large, image display may require several moments
according to the network setting.
• Normative Database is not compatible with images captured with the scan points of 1024
X 64, 1024 x 32, and 1024 x 16.
• When the SLO Image capture mode is Zoom, the Normative Database is not supported.
400
12.7.1 Overall Tab

Thickness map of Macula (Full Retina) and Glaucoma (ILM-IPL/INL) and Normative Database com-
parison map are displayed at the same time.
Thickness map and Analyze Chart of Macula tab and Glaucoma tab are displayed at the same time.
LBS and LBE of each thickness maps can be set in the Setting dialog box.
Analyze Chart (ETDRS 9 Sector) 2. RESET AL button

1. SET AL button Analyze Chart (GChart)
Analyze Chart (S/I) Thickness map
Thickness map
12
Color chart (comparison and differen- Color chart (comparison and differential
tial with Normative Database) with Normative Database)
For AngioScan
Color chart (comparison with Normative Database) Color chart (comparison with Normative Database)
and Angiography En face image of ORCC and Angiography En face image of retinal surface
401
3. Transparency
4. Layer thickness setting
*The transparency setting is common for all overlays.

The overlay thickness setting only reflects on the En face tab.
1. SET AL button
Displays the Eyeinfo Setting Dialog box to input the axial
length.
Input the axial length in the range of 18.46 to 32.31 mm.
To measure the cornea thickness on the image more
accurately, input the axial length when the axial length is given.
As initial value, the axial length of Gullstrand model eye is
input.
When the axial length is already input in the same date, a
confirmation message “Axial length of the same day already
exits. Overwrite?” is displayed. Click the Yes button to overwrite the axial length information.
When the captured date of the data into which the axial length is input is the oldest data among the image data
sets, a message “Do you set this axial length to data before MM/DD/YYYY?” is displayed. Clicking the Yes button
applies the axial length setting to the previous data.
• The axial length can be set for each captured date. In addition, the input axial length can
be applied to the data in future.
2. RESET AL button
Resets the axial length input value to the default.
A confirmation message “Restore the saved setting
information to original. Continue? Yes/No” is displayed.
Clicking the Yes button resets the input value to “Axial length =
Gullstrand model eye”.
3. Transparency
Set the transparency of the Overlay image to be displayed in
fundus image and the thickness map with the slider.
The transparency decreases as the slider moves to the right.
4. Layer Setting
Select LBS or LBE for the image to be displayed on the
fundus image of the and En face tab as an overlay
image from the pull-down menu.
This is inactive in all tabs other than 3D tab and En face
tab.
402
 Color scale of Normative Database display

For the comparison map, comparison graph, analyze chart, the probability of range of normative eye
is displayed with the 4 steps or 5 steps of color scale.
4 steps of color scale 5 steps of color scale
White >95% Light red > 99%
Green ≤ 95% Light yellow ≤ 99%

> 5% > 95%
Yellow ≤ 5% Green ≤ 95%

> 1% > 5%
12
Red ≤ 1% Yellow ≤ 5%
> 1%
Red ≤ 1%
403
12.7.2 3D tab
The Macula Map data can be displayed in 3D and referred.
1. Fundus image
2. OCT image
3. 3D display contents
4. Texture display
5. Vitreous body
6. Clipping
7. Surface display
setting
8. Volume display
setting
9. 3D image 10. Visual point change
1. Fundus image
Displays the fundus image and indicates the part displayed in
3D (OCT image capture range) with a yellow frame.
For the OCT image capture range, the dividing line in the X
direction is displayed in light blue and the dividing line in the Y
direction is displayed in pink.
Move the dividing line by dragging the triangular handles.
Right-clicking the triangular portion displays a pop-up menu and
Auto Play (automatic movement of the dividing line) can be
performed.
Open the pop-up menu by right-clicking the fundus image and

each operation of “Stop Auto Play”, “Save As Bitmap”, or “Raw
Image to Save As Bitmap” can be performed.
The display of the fundus image can also be selected. See
“12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display” (page 394).
However, during the Auto Play execution, menus other than
“Stop Auto Play” cannot be selected.
The overlay color map overlay operates with Layer Setting on

the lower part of the screen.
404
2. OCT image
Displays the OCT image.
Operate the dividing line in the Z direction with the slider
displayed in the left.
For each operation, see “12.4 Image Display Menu
(Macula Line, Macula Cross)” (page 382).
12
For the data captured with OCT-Angiography, open the pop-up menu by right-clicking the image to perform the
following operations: "OCT", "OCT-Angiography", or "OCT-Angiography Overlay". (For data captured with OCT-
AngioScan using the OCT-Angiography optional software for the RS-3000 Advance)
OCT OCT sectional image
OCT-Angiography Sectional image of OCT-Angiography
OCT-Angiography Overlay Image of a blood vessel figure extracted

from the OCT-Angiography image
overlayed on the OCT sectional image
3. 3D display contents
Select the contents to be displayed in 3D.
Volume+Surface Displays the volume and the surface.
Volume Displays the volume by a color chart.
Surface Displays the surface.
4. Texture display
To display the surface texture, select the image attribute for the ILM layer of the 3D image.
No Displays 3D image only.

Layer Thickness Displays the layer thickness color map overlaid on the image.
Fundus Image Displays the fundus image overlaid on the image.
OCT Phase Fundus Image Displays the phase-fundus image overlaid on the image.
* Except for RS-3000
Fundus Image (Color) Displays the color fundus image overlaid on the image.
* Only when the color fundus image is captured with the RS-330.
405
For the 3D image, Brightness and Contrast of Scope Setting tool cannot be changed. The change of magnification
(Zoom, Reset , Original Size ) can be performed.
5. Vitreous body
Select whether or not to display the opacity or such of the vitreous
body.
Select from Hide and Show.
This function is disabled when the 3D display contents are set to
“Surface”.
6. Clipping
Selects whether or not to conduct clipping using the dividing line on the 3D image.
Select from On and Off. When set to On, the image is clipped along the dividing line and partially displayed.
When set to Off When set to On
7. Surface display setting

Check the surface to be displayed to select.
Select from among ILM, NFL/GCL, IPL/INL, OPL/ONL, IS/OS, and RPE/BM.
When the 3D display contents are set to Volume, the Surface display is disabled.
8. Volume display setting

Changes the Volume of Opacity, Threshold, Intensity, and Color (Color/Gray-scale).
9. 3D image
The contents set by “3D display contents” are displayed with the fundus image.
Dragging the 3D image changes the display position.
The following operations can be performed from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the image.
Initialize zoom and display position. (clearness, threshold, and color setting
Reset
cannot be reset.)
406
Specify the direction (T/N/S/I, Vitreous / Choroid) to be deleted the Volume until
Volume Cut
dividing line.
Show the frame Sets display / non-display of the cube frame.
Update 3D Updates the Volume and Surface from the edited results.
The Save As dialog box is displayed and saves the displayed image as a bitmap
Save As Bitmap
file in the specified folder.
For the 3D image, Brightness and Contrast of Scope Setting tool cannot be changed. The change of magnification
(Zoom, Reset , Original Size ) can be performed. 12
10. Change view direction
When each button of “N”, “S”, “T”, “I”, “V” (Vitreous), “B” (B-scan), “C” (Choroid) is clicked, the image viewed
from the specified direction is displayed.
 Display with the dividing line movement
Y direction dividing
line
X direction dividing
line
Z direction dividing line
Y direction dividing line (For X-Y)

X direction dividing line (For Y-X)
When the cross image is displayed, the dividing
line is not displayed on the OCT image.
407
X direction dividing line / Y direction dividing line
These lines are displayed so that they are synchronized in

the 3D image Surface display and the fundus image.
When Clipping is set to On, Volume and Surface are cut (not
displayed) along the dividing line.
Z direction dividing line
Volume is cut (not displayed) along the dividing line. The Sur-
face display is not changed.
 Recording movie
Records the image displayed in the 3D image as a movie (AVI) file.
The movie file can be played with the Windows Media Player or such.
1 Display the 3D image with the recording starting status.
2 Click the Start Record button .

3 Specify the saving location and file name then click the Save button to start recording.
Perform operation of the 3D movie.
The Start Record button changes to the Stop Record button .
4 When stopping the recording, click the Stop Record button .

• The maximum recording time is one minute.
• The movie file is always shorter than the recording time.
408
12.7.3 Macula Tab

Thickness map of Full Retina and Comparison map of analyze chart and Normative Database are dis-
played at the same time.
1. Thickness map 2. OCT image 3. Analyze chart 4.Comparison map
12
5. Surface display
1. Thickness map
Display the color map of the Full Retina in overlay on the fundus
image of OCT captured range.
For the OCT image capture range, the dividing line in X direction is
displayed in light blue and the dividing line in Y direction is
displayed in pink.
409
Open the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the Fundus

image (outside of Analyze Chart) and each operation of “Stop Auto
Play” or “Save As Bitmap” can be performed.
However, during the Auto Play execution, menus other than “Stop
Auto Play” cannot be selected.
The Analyze Chart can be moved by dragging.

In accordance with the movement of Analyze Chart, the thickness
value displayed in the Analyze Chart is updated.
The moved Analyze chart position is saved.
Selecting “Reset” returns the Analyze Chart size to the initial state.
The data output points “Fovea, 30-2, 24-2, 10-2” can be displayed
overlapped.
Aligning the pointer on the map displays the Data Point button.
Each press of the button toggles the point indication as ON → ON
with number → OFF.
In addition, when the point display is set to ON/ON with number,
the Pattern switching button is displayed above the Data Point
button.
Each time the button is clicked, the point pattern switches in order.
The setting of the point display is applied to all maps (fundus
image). However, the point number is not displayed in the small-
size maps.
Data Point button
Pattern switching button
OFF ON ON with number
410
• The point pattern displayed in the thickness map and the point pattern whose analyzed
value is exported are not linked. Authorize the exported data in the Analyzed data export
tab in the RSViewer setting dialog box.
For details, see “12.2 Setting Viewer Screen” (page 372).
2. OCT image
On the Thickness map, OCT image of dividing line indicating
position is displayed.
For each operation, see “12.4 Image Display Menu (Macula
Line, Macula Cross)” (page 382). For the OCT image composed 12
of captured images, some function may be limited such as layer
display.
3. Analyze chart
Subdivide the macula area to display the
average thickness (µm) and volume (mm3)
with ETDRS Analyze Chart.
The chart size is fixed as 1.0/3.0/6.0mm not
according to Wide/Zoom.
For the thickness chart, comparison with
Normative Database is displayed in color
scale.
4. Comparison map
Comparison and difference compared with
Normative Database is displayed in the color
map.
From the pop-up menu displayed by right-
clicking on the image, “Save As Bitmap” can
be performed.
The display of the fundus image can also be
selected. See “12.4.10 Changing the fundus
image display” (page 394).
This setting is synchronized with the
thickness map setting.
For AngioScan, a color map for comparison

with the Normative Database, and an
Angiography En face image of ORCC are
displayed.
The pop-up menu opened by right-
clicking the Angiography En face image
allows the operator to register the
displayed contents as an image, save
the displayed contents as a bitmap
image, or save the raw image as a
bitmap image.
411
When the color map is not displayed

When the image data is not supported
by Normative Database, the color map is
not displayed as a comparison map. The
error content is displayed along with the
“Condition Error”.
Invalid Age The age of the patient is under 20 when captured.

SLO: Zoom SLO is set to Zoom
Scan point The number of A scan points is 1024 in the map.
Layer selection The combination of the layers that is not supported by Normative Database
is other than “ILM to IPL/INL”, “ILM to IS/OS”, “ILM to RPE/BM”.
5. Surface display
Surface of each layer of ILM, IS/OS, and RPE/BM are displayed in 3D.
Dragging the 3D image rotates the image and dragging to right changes the display position. Scrolling using mouse
wheel magnifies or demagnifies the 3D image.
Open the pop-up menu by right-clicking the image and select Reset to return to the initial state.
412
12.7.4 Glaucoma Tab

A thickness map between ILM and IPL/INL and comparison map of analyze chart and Normative Data-
base are displayed at the same time.
1. Thickness map OCT image 2. Analyze chart 3.Comparison map
12
Glaucoma tab is different from the Macula tab for the following points.
1. Thickness map
Displays the color map in overlay between ILM and IPL/INL on the fundus image of OCT captured range.
The size of the Analyze Chart can be changed with the pop-up
menu displayed by right-clicking.
• Size 0.5/1.5/3.0mm
• Size 1.0/3.0/6.0mm
• Size 1.5/4.5/9.0mm
• Auto Select
“Auto Select” automatically selects a size that fits within the scan
width.
Selecting “Reset” returns the Analyze Chart display position to the
center of capturing.
In accordance with the resizing of Analyze Chart, the thickness
value displayed in the Analyze Chart is updated.
The moved Analyze chart position is saved.
413
2. Analyze chart
Subdivides the macula area and displays the
average thickness (µm) with each analyze
chart of S/I and GChart.
For each analyze chart, comparison with the
Normative Database is displayed in color
scale.
3. Comparison map
Comparison and differential between the
Normative Database is displayed with the
color map.
clicking the image, “Save As Bitmap” can be
performed.
The display of the fundus image can also be
selected. See “12.4.10 Changing the fundus
image display” (page 394).
This setting is synchronized with the
thickness map setting.
For AngioScan, a color map for comparison

with the Normative Database, and an
Angiography En face image of Superficial
are displayed.
The pop-up menu opened by right-
clicking the Angiography En face image
allows the operator to register the
displayed contents as an image, save
the displayed contents as a bitmap
image, or save the raw image as a
bitmap image.
414
12.7.5 Image tab

Displays the fundus image and OCT image at the specified position.
The screen configuration changes depending on the displayed image data (OCT image or AngioScan
image).
 Displaying OCT image
1. Fundus image 2. OCT image

12
1. Fundus image
The same display and function are performed as in the fundus image of 3D tab.
Display and movement of dividing line
Auto play (Automatic movement of dividing line)
Save the display contents as bitmap
Save the raw image as bitmap
The display of the fundus image can be selected. See “12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display” (page 394).
The overlay can be selected from the following in the selection field in the image. For “Layer thickness”,
select LBS and LBE optionally.
No
Layer Thickness
Normative Database ( [NFL + GCL + IPL] )
Normative Database ( IS/OS )
Normative Database ( RPE )
Deviation map ( [NFL + GCL + IPL] )
Deviation map ( IS/OS )
Deviation map ( RPE )
• When selecting the overlay compared with Normative Database, LBE and LBS cannot be
selected.
415
2. OCT image
An OCT image of the position indicated with the dividing line in the fundus image is displayed.
For each operation, see “12.4 Image Display Menu (Macula Line, Macula Cross)” (page 382).
For the OCT image composited from the captured image, functions may be partially limited to those such as layer
display.
Image switching button Direction switching button Image switching buttons
Change the image with the image switching buttons on the image. In addition, switch the OCT image
horizontal (X) / Vertical (Y) direction with the direction switching button.
The overlay setting on the lower part of the image is only reflected on the lower part of the screen.
However, the transparency setting are reflected on all overlays in common.
416
 Displaying AngioScan image

(4) En face slab name (5) En face slab setting
(3) OCT En face image (6) Angiography En face image
12
(7) OCT image (8) OCT-Angiography Overlay image
(3) OCT En face image

An OCT En face image can be overlaid on the fundus image.
The display and function are the same for the funus image on the 3D tab.
Display and moving of dividing line
AutoPlay (automatic movement of dividing line)
Saving the displayed image as a bitmap file
Saving the raw image as a bitmap file
The display of the fundus image can also be selected (see “12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display” (page
394)).
(4) En face slab name

The overlay for the En face image can be selected from the
following options:
Superficial
Deep
Vitreous
Outer retina
ORCC
Choriocapillaris
Choroid
417
(5) En face slab setting

LBE or LBS can be selected as desired.
If the LBS or LBE setting is changed, the [Slab reset] button
is displayed. Clicking the button initializes the display.
The offset value (m) set on the OCT image is displayed on
the right side of the selection field.
(6) Angiography En face image

An Angiography En face image can be overlaid on the fundus image.
The display and function are the same for the funus image on the 3D tab.
The overlay setting and the LBS or LBE setting are synchronized with “(3) OCT En face image”.
(7) OCT image

Displays the OCT image of the position indicated by the dividing line on the fundus image. LBS and LBE are
indicated by dotted lines, and their positions can be moved (offset) up and down.
Offset of LBS and LBE

They can be moved up and down by the mouse operation on the OCT image. The layer indicated by dotted line can
be moved.
The offset value is displayed on the right side of the LBS and LBE selection field.
Selecting only one layer

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer to be moved, then click on it. The
other layer is indicated with a solid line, showing that it is fixed.
418
Cancels fixing of layer

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer indicated by a solid line, then click
on it. The solid line changes to a dotted line.
12
Moving layer up and down (while one

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer to be moved, then drag it.
is fixed)
It can be moved also by rotating the mouse wheel.
Moving layer up and down (both
Move the cursor ( ) to the area between LBS and LBE, and drag it.
layers)
The offset values of LBS and LBE are changed at the same time.
• To enlarge the OCT image, rotate the mouse wheel while pressing and holding the right
mouse button.
• The offset of the layer is changed in synchronization between “(7) OCT image” and “(8)
OCT-Angiography Overlay image”.
(8) OCT-Angiography Overlay image

An image extracted from the OCT-Angiography image is overlaid on the OCT image.
The operation is the same as that for “(7) OCT image”.
The transparency setting at the bottom of the screen functions only for turning on or off the overlay dis-
play. Changing the transparency in between is not available.
419
12.7.6 En face tab

An En face image (sectional image horizontal to retinal surface) of OCT data can be observed.
A fundus image and OCT En face images are displayed.
Four En face images of different depths are displayed for observation.
(1) En face image (2) En face image list
(3) OCT image
(1) En face image

A color map is overlaid on the selected En face image.
The layer used to construct the En face image (LBS/LBE), and the color map to be overlaid on the En face
image need to be selected.
En face slab name LBS (offset) LBE (offset) Color map
420
The following color maps can be selected:

• No Overlay
• Layer Thickness
• Normative Database ([NFL+GCL+IPL])
• Normative Database (IS/OS)
• Normative Database (RPE)
• Deviation Map ([NFL+GCL+IPL])
• Deviation Map (IS/OS)
• Deviation Map (RPE)
When “Layer Thickness” is selected, the display range (LBS and LBE) of the thickness can be changes with “Layer
12
Setting” at the bottom of the screen.
The transparency of the color map is set by the slider at the bottom of the screen.
Slider Thicknesses display setting
The En face image is selected from “(2) En face image list”.

The following operations may be conducted. The movement of dividing lines is synchronized with all En face
image.
Moving the dividing line
AutoPlay (Start and stop automatic movement of the dividing line)
Switching to full size display
Saving the displayed image as a bitmap file
Saving the raw image as a bitmap file
• To magnify the fundus image and En face image, select the image and rotate the mouse
wheel. Rotating the mouse wheel while right-clicking on the image moves the divided line
on the selected side.
Button operation on image
Full size
display
Image intensity
Intensity setting
Showing/hiding of dividing line
Image intensity The image intensity is specified in the range between -10 to +10.
Switching to full size display An image is displayed fully in the display area.
Showing/hiding of dividing line Showing/hiding of dividing line is switched.
421
(2) En face image list

Four preset En face images with different depths are displayed.
The selected En face image is displayed in “(1) En face image”.
The same operation as “(1) En face image” can be performed.
Initial setting of En face image display
Displayed image LBS/Offset LBE/Offset

1) Vitreous interface ILM/+0 µm ILM/+40 µm
2) Inner retina IPL/INL/-20 µm IPL/INL/+20 µm
3) Retinal pigment epithelium RPE/BM/-40 µm RPE/BM/+0 µm
4) Choroid RPE/BM/+60 µm RPE/BM/+120 µm
“-" value of Offset value indicates that the reference position moves toward the inner retina, and "+" value indicates
that the reference position moves toward the outer retina.
• The default display value of the Offset in the table above is just a guide. The value
changes depending on the device.
(3) OCT image

Displays the OCT image of the position indicated by the dividing line on the En face image.
The LBS and LBE settings can be changed.
Offset of LBS and LBE

They can be moved up and down by the mouse operation on the OCT image. The layer indicated by dotted line can
be moved.
The offset value is displayed on the right side of the LBS and LBE selection field.
Selecting only one layer

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer to be moved, then click on it. The
other layer is indicated by a solid line, showing that it is fixed.
422
Cancels fixing of layer

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer indicated by a solid line, then click
on it. The solid line changes to a dotted line.
12
Moving layer up and down (while one

Move the cursor ( ) to the layer to be moved, then drag it.
is fixed)
Moving layer up and down (both
Move the cursor ( ) to the area between LBS and LBE, and drag it.
layers)
The offset values of LBS and LBE are changed at the same time.
• To enlarge the OCT image, rotate the mouse wheel while pressing and holding the right
mouse button.
423
12.7.7 AngioScan tab

En face images and analysis values of OCT-Angiography are displayed.
(4) Projection artifact
(1) En face image (2) En face image list (3) FAZ display removal
(5) OCT image (6) Analysis value
(1) En face image

A color map is overlaid on the selected En face image.
The layer used to construct the En face image (LBS/LBE), and the color map to be overlaid on the En face
image need to be selected.
The En face image is selected from “(2) En face image list”.
The same operation as the En face image under the En face tab can be performed. In addition, the following
functions are added:
Vessel density map

The color map changes to “Vessel Density Map” (“Perfusion Density
Map” depending on the setting).
Selection between “Vessel Density Map” and “Perfusion Density Map” is
performed with “ Image Analyze tab” (page 372) on the Setting dialog.
424
Display of analysis chart

A button for displaying the chart for density analysis
appears on the image.
12
Display of analysis chart
Displays an ETDRS chart.

The chart can be moved by dragging.
The desired chart can be selected from the menu
shown by a right-click.
• Size 0.5/1.5/3.0 mm
• Size 1.0/3.0/6.0 mm
• Size 1.0/4.5/9.0 mm
• Auto Select
Selecting “Reset” initializes the analysis chart.
Displays a grid chart that divides the image capture

range into 3×3 sections.
The analysis chart is not displayed.
• Regardless of the display of analysis chart, the analysis values are displayed.
Registering the displayed contents as an image

“Register displayed contents as Image” is added to the pop-up menu
that appears by right-clicking the image.
Saves the displayed En face image and intensity map to NAVIS-EX as
image data.
The image is saved to NAVIS-EX as “Fundus OCT A”.
The image is registered with the same date as the measurement date
of the measurement data.
425
For the saved image, Image Wizard (Panorama Image Composite, Stereo Viewing), Drawing, Processing, and
Image Measurement can be performed.
The image appears in the tree labeled “Fundus OCT A".
The image name and map name are displayed in the

image information.

Seven preset En face images with different depths are displayed. The En face image selected by clicking is
displayed in “(1) En face image”.
Displayed image LBS/Offset LBE/Offset

1) Superficial ILM / +0 µm IPL/INL / -13 µm
2) Deep IPL/INL / -8 µm OPL/ONL / -13 µm
3) Vitreous ILM / -399 µm ILM / -4 µm
4) Outer retina OPL/ONL / -8 µm RPE/BM / +71 µm
5) ORCC OPL/ONL / -8 µm RPE/BM fit / +21 µm
6) Choriocappilaris RPE/BM fit / +4 µm RPE/BM fit / +21 µm
7) Choroid RPE/BM fit / +25 µm RPE/BM fit / +63 µm
"-" value of Offset value indicates that the reference position moves toward the inner retina, and "+"
value indicates that the reference position moves toward the outer retina.
• The default display value of the Offset in the table above is just a guide. The value
changes depending on the device.
426
(3) FAZ display

Selected to display the foveal avascular zone (FAZ) on the En face
image of “Superficial”.
The FAZ parameter is displayed regardless of whether FAZ is
shown or hidden.
12
Fovea avascular zone (FAZ)
(4) Projection artifact removal

Removes artifacts (projection artifacts) caused by blood vessels that fluctuates the OCT signals for the
tissue under blood vessels.
(5) OCT image

Displays the OCT image of the position indicated by the dividing line on the En face image.
In the same manner as the OCT image under the Image tab, the LBS and LBE settings can be changed.
If the LBS or LBE setting is changed, the [Slab reset] but-
ton is displayed. Clicking the button initializes the display.
(6) Analysis value

Displays the analysis results of the FAZ parameter, grid chart blood
vessel density, and ETDRS 9 sector blood vessel density.
When the density type setting of the OCTA image analysis is
“Perfusion Density”, the analysis results of the grid chart perfusion
density and ETDRS 9 sector perfusion density are displayed.
427
12.7.8 Right and Left eyes in pair are selected

When a macula map in pair is selected, the images are displayed in Viewer screen.
Switch the display between Screening, Macula, and Glaucoma tabs.
• When the image is displayed in right and left, the 3D tab, Image tab, En face tab, or
AngioScan tab are not displayed.
• Moving of the analyze chart does not link between right eye and left eye.
Sample display (Overall tab)
The displaying contents and operations are the same as displayed as single eye. However,
some contents are skipped.
Screening tab Compare map is not displayed.

Macula tab OCT image and Surface display is not displayed.
Glaucoma tab OCT image is not displayed.
428
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Disc Circle)
12.8 Image Display Menu (Disc Circle)

Perform the same operation as with Macula Line and Macula Cross except for the following differ-
ences.
When the thickness display setting is “ILM” to “NFL/GCL”, a color graph displaying the
comparison with Normative Database is displayed.
• The Disc circle cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.

Only” is displayed as a warning. 12
“Over Age 80 (Reference Data)” is displayed and when the patient’s age is younger than
• Only the image that is set to WIDE for SLO Capture mode and captured with Disc Circle at
ø3.45 mm corresponds to Normative Database. However, for image captured at ø3.45
mm, if the scan width correction is performed by inputting the axial length, “Corrected scan
width (Reference Data)” is displayed as a notice for handling of the data.
SET AL button / RESET AL button

Sets refractive power and axial length
For details, see “12.7.1 Overall Tab” (page 401).
TSNIT graph Graph switching button Displays the thickness of whole average,
Normal eye data range for Switches the detail graph and upper average, and under average (µm).
comparison is displayed. the outline graph Color scale is applied also in the value
field.
429
TSNIT graph display change

From the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking on the graph, vertical axis scale and
smoothness of graph can be specified.
For the vertical axis scale, see “12.4.9 Setting the graph display” (page 393).
Detailed display Displays the graph detailed data reflected.

When it is not selected, processing displayed smoothly is performed.
When the Change Graph button is clicked to select the Outline graph, the graph is displayed
as follows.
The average value for each TSNIT is displayed as a bar chart.
430
 Conditions when Normative Database is not displayed

When the thickness display setting is not supported by Normative Database, Normative
Database is not displayed. The error content is displayed in the graph along with the “Condi-
tion Error”.

SLO: Zoom SLO is set to Zoom
Scan width The scan width when the image is captured is other than 3.45 mm in
Disc circle.
Layer selection The layer is other than “ILM to NFL/GCL” that are not supported by
12
Normative Database.
TSNIT graph Displays the thickness of whole average,

upper average, and under average (µm).
For the Outline graph, the graph is displayed in single color bar chart.
431
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Disc Radial)
12.9 Image Display Menu (Disc Radial)
For the Disc Radial 6, Disc Radial 12, select from the radial lines of 6 directions (30° interval) and 12
directions (15° interval) to display the OCT image.
• The Disc Radial cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.
Perform the same operation as with Macula Radial except for the following difference.
The graph to be displayed is only “Select OCT” and “Compare symmetry OCT”.
The layer thickness cannot be displayed with the analyze chart.
432
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Disc Map)
12.10 Image Display Menu (Disc Map)

The Disc Map can be displayed between Overall tab, 3D tab, Image tab, and En face tab.
• For a color map being compared with Normative Database, areas of no Normative 12
• For the Disc Map, the caption display is effective only for the fundus image in full-display.
• As the captured image data is large, image display may require several moments
according to the network setting.
• When the SLO Image capture mode is Zoom, the Normative Database is not supported.
12.10.1 Overall tab

RNFLT map (thickness between ILM and NFL/GCL layer) comparison with Normative Database,
Compare graph, and Analyze chart are displayed.
Perform the same operation as with Macula Map except for the following differences.
3. Comparison map 4. SET AL button 5. RESET AL button 6. RNFLT map Fundus image
1. Analyze chart
2. Analytic table
7. TSNIT graph Overlay setting OCT image (Line)
8. OCT image (Disc circle) Fundus image
433
1. Analyze chart
Analyze chart indicating average thickness of Whole, Sup/Inf (two-
way split), TSNIT (four-way split), and Clock Hour (twelve-way
split) range. The chart is displayed in the color corresponding to
the color scale compared with Normative Database.
2. Analytic table
Displays the analytic value of optic disc.
C/D (Horizontal)
C/D (Vertical)
R/D (Min)
R/D (Angle)
DiscArea (mm2)
CupArea (mm2)
• When the optic disc cannot be analyzed due to the image status, or when “C/D>1.0” or “R/
D<0”, the analytic value is not displayed.
For the parameter that cannot be analyzed, “-” is displayed.
3. Comparison map
Displays the color map compared with Normative Database.
When the color map is not displayed (error display)
If the image data is not supported by Normative Database, the color map is not displayed on the
comparison map. The error content is displayed along with the “Condition Error”.

SLO: Zoom SLO is set to Zoom.
Scan point The number of A scan points during image capture is 1024.
Layer selection The layer combination is other than “ILM to NFL/GCL” that is not supported
by Normative Database.
4. SET AL button
Displays the Eyeinfo Setting dialog box to input the axial length.
5. RESET AL button
Initializes the axial length.
6. RNFLT map
Displays the thickness map between ILM to NFL/GCL layer with a color map.
434
Move the red circle indicating disc circle by dragging. Align the optic disc as necessary. Moving the red circle
updates the TSNIT graph and OCT image of the optic circle.
7. TSNIT graph
Displays the thickness map between ILM to NFL/GCL layer on the disc circle with Normative Database
distribution.
Move the synchronous line that synchronizes with the OCT image by dragging on the graph.
Aligning the cursor to the graph displays the thickness of the cursor position.
As with the Comparison map, when the image data is not supported by Normative Database, the error
content is displayed. 12
8. OCT image (Disc circle)
OCT image corresponding to the Disc Circle displayed with RNFLT map.
From the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the image, each operations of “Layer”, “Color”, “Measure”, “Digital
Smoothing”, “Save As Bitmap”, and “Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap” can be performed.
 For AngioScan image

An RPCP blood vessel density map is displayed instead of a fundus image.
From the pop-up menu that appears by right-clicking the image, “Register displayed contents as
Image” can be executed.
435
12.10.2 3D tab
This is an explanation when the Disc Map data is displayed in 3D.
All items are the same as the Macula map displayed in 3D. For details, see “12.7.2 3D tab”
(page 404).
SLO image
OCT image
3D contents
Texture display
Vitreous body
Clipping
Surface display
setting Fundus image
3D image Visual point change

Volume display
setting
436
12.10.3 Image tab

The fundus image and OCT image at the specified position can be displayed.
The screen configuration changes depending on the displayed image data (OCT image or AngioScan
image).
 Displaying OCT image

For the differences other than as indicated below, the display is the same as when the Mac-
ula map is displayed as image tab. For details, see “12.7.5 Image tab” (page 415).
12
1. Fundus image OCT image
1. Fundus image
The selectable overlay settings are as in the following. For the Layer thickness, select LBE and LBS optionally.
No
Layer Thickness
Normative Database ( NFL )
Deviation map ( NFL )
The display of the fundus image can also be selected. See “12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display” (page 394).
437
 Displaying AngioScan image

For the differences other than as indicated below, the display is the same as when the Mac-
ula map is displayed as image tab. For details, see “12.7.5 Image tab” (page 415).
(2) Fundus image (OCT En face image) (3) Fundus image (Angiography En face image)
OCT image OCT-Angiography Overlay image
(2) Fundus image (OCT En face image)

The overlay setting (En face slab name) for the En face image can be selected from the following options:
Nerve head
RPCP
Choroid
Vitreous
(3) Fundus image (Angiography En face image)

An Angiography En face image can be overlaid in synchronization with “(2) Fundus image (OCT En face
image)”.
438
12.10.4 En face tab

An En face image (sectional image horizontal to retinal surface) of OCT can be observed.
The display is the same as when the Macula map is displayed as En face tab. For details,
see “12.7.6 En face tab” (page 420).
En face image En face image list
12
OCT image
439
12.10.5 AngioScan tab

En face images of fundus image and OCT-Angiography are displayed.
The display is the same as when the Macula map is displayed as En face tab. For details,
see “12.7.7 AngioScan tab” (page 424).
(1) En face image (2) En face image list Projection artifact removal
OCT image (3) Analysis value
(1) En face image

The following color maps can be selected:
• No Overlay
• Vessel Density Map
• Layer Thickness
• Normative Database ( NFL )
• Deviation Map ( NFL )
When “Layer Thickness” is selected, the range of thickness to be displayed can be changed with the layer thickness
control in the lower part of the screen.
The transparency of the color map is set by the slider at the bottom of the screen.
Slider Thicknesses display setting
440
There is only one analysis chart type. Only switching of showing and hiding is available.
Displays a TENSIT chart.

The chart can be moved by dragging.
Selecting “Reset” that appears by right-clicking
initializes the analysis chart.
12
The analysis chart is not displayed.

Four preset En face images with different depths are displayed.
Displayed image LBS / Offset LBE / Offset

1) Nerve head ILM / +0 µm RPE/BM / +0 µm
2) RPCP ILM / +0 µm NFL/GCL / +0 µm
3) Choroid RPE/BM fit / +105 µm RPE/BM fit / +840 µm
4) Vitreous ILM / -389 µm ILM / -4 µm
(3) Analysis value

Displays the analysis results of the S/I blood vessel density and
TESNIT blood vessel density.
When the density type of the OCTA image is “Perfusion Density”, the
analysis results of the S/I perfusion density and the TESNIT perfusion
density are displayed.
441
12.10.6 Editing optic disc shape

Edit the Cup/Disc line of optic disc automatically detected in the Disc shape edit screen. In addition,
when the optic disc cannot be analyzed due to the image status, input Cup/Disc line manually.
 Explanation of the optic disc shape editing screen
Editing tool Exit /Save button
Scope setting tool Analyze table Fundus image OCT image
Editing tool

Initializes the image to the initial status.
Reset The initialization operation that is performed cannot be returned.
Performs automatic detection again (only Cup)
Recalculation (Cup) The recalculation results may be different from the initial calculation.
Performs automatic detection again.
Recalculation (Disc/Cup) The recalculation results may be different from the initial calculation.
Operate Zoom The cursor changes from the cursor indication of Draw mode and Erase mode
to a normal arrow cursor.
Allows the movement and addition of the control point.
Draw Point Dragging the cursor on the set control point moves the control point.
By clicking on the position that has no control point, a control point is added.
442
Allows deletion of control points.

Erase Point Aligning the cursor on the set control point and clicking deletes the control point.
Select the object to be edited from Disc and Cup.

Disc/Cup selection field
Checking this box displays a confirmation message when performing
Show the confirm dialog “Initialization of editing”, “Redetection”, and “Exit of optic disc shape
editing”.
Exit/Save button
Exit without saving Exit without saving the current status. 12

Exit with saving Exit with saving the current status.

Place the pointer over the target image and right-click
to display the pop-up menu.
Disc Select the Disc editing and displays the control point on the Disc line.
Cup Select Cup editing and displays the control point on the Cup line.
Fundus Image Displays the fundus image.
OCT Phase Fundus Image Displays the image generated from the OCT on the fundus image. (RS-
3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330)
Color Fundus Image Displays the color fundus image (Color/FAF) on the fundus image. (RS-
330 only)
En face image Displays the En face image on the fundus image.
Edit Mode Selects the Edit mode. (Draw mode, Delete mode)
Save As Bitmap This function cannot be selected.
Raw Image to Save As Bitmap This function cannot be selected.
443
 OCT image
Aligning cursor on the fundus image moves the synchronising line and OCT image of the cursor posi-
tion is displayed.
clicking on the image, each operation of
“Layer” (only the image in the captured direc-
tion), “Color”, “Digital Smoothing”, “Show
Optic Disc Line” (only the image in the cap-
tured direction), “Save As Bitmap”, and “Raw
OCT to Save As Bitmap” can be performed.
Selecting “Optic Disc Shape Editor” dis-

plays the Cup/Disc line position on the OCT
image.
For the other operation, refer to “12.4 Image Display Menu (Macula Line, Macula Cross)” (page 382).
• For the OCT image composed from the captured images, function may be limited partially
to those such as layer display.
 Editing Optic Disc
1 Select “Optic Disc Shape Editor” from the pop-up

menu displayed by right-clicking the fundus
image.
444
Optic Disc Shape Editor screen is displayed.

Control point (○) is displayed on the Disc line
and indicates that it is in Disc editing status.
By aligning cursor on the fundus image, the cur-
sor is displayed as pencil shape ( ) indicating
that the mode is Draw mode.
12
When editing the Cup line, select “Cup” in the
Disc/Cup selection field.
Control point (○) is displayed on the Cup line, indicat-
ing that the point is in Cup editing status.
“Editing (Disc)” indication on the fundus image
changes to “Editing (Cup)”.
2 Move the control point and edit the line.

When editing operation is performed, the analyzing table value is recalculated.
Aligning the cursor on the control point displays the
hand shape ( ). Drag the cursor to optimize the edit
result screen image. By right-clicking on the image
when the cursor is the hand shape, the control point is
deleted.
When adding the control point, click the image with the
cursor displayed as pencil ( ). The line is overwritten
to the Disc line passing through the added control
points.
When deleting the set control point, click the Erase

Point button to select the Erase mode. By aligning the
cursor on the control point, the cursor is displayed in
Eraser shape ( ) and the control point is deleted by
clicking.
To draw the Disc/Cup line, four or more control points
are necessary.
445
• Maximum of 16 points of control point can be arranged.

• When the control point is moved too much for adjustment, cancel the movement by
pressing the Undo button to Redo the adjustment.
• When performing the adjustment from the first again, delete all control points with the
Reset button .
3 After editing the Disc line, edit the Cup line.

Pressing the ReCalculation (Cup) button displays the Cup line recalculated based on
the new Disc line.
When editing manually, edit as with procedure 2.
• According to the Optic Disc status, the Cup line may not be calculated automatically.
4 Click Exit with Saving button to exit the Optic Disc Shape editing.
Disc Shape editing screen is closed and returns to the Optic Disc Map screen.
• When returning the image to the original Cup/Disc line after saving the Optic Disc Shape
editing, click the ReCalculation button in the optic disc shape editing screen.
• Do not exit the Optic Disc Shape editing with the Return button . Without saving the
Edit contents, Disc Map is closed.
446
12.10.7 Right and Left eyes in pair are selected

When a disc map in pair is selected, the images are displayed in Viewer screen.
Only Overall tab displays the disc map in pair.
• When the image is displayed in right and left, the image is not displayed in the 3D tab,
Image tab, and En face tab.
• Moving of the analyze chart does not link between right eye and left eye.
• When the image is displayed in right and left, En face image cannot be selected for the
fundus image. (See “12.4.10 Changing the fundus image display” (page 394))
12
Both eye TSNIT graph
The displaying contents and operations are the same as the single eye display.
In the center of the screen, TSNIT graph displaying the right and left eyes at the same time
is displayed.
447
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Cornea Line and Cornea Cross)
12.11 Image Display Menu (Cornea Line and Cornea Cross)
For the Cornea Line and Cornea Cross, cornea cross section observation and cornea thickness mea-
surement are performed.
• The Cornea Line and Cornea Cross cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.
Cornea Line
(Used for averaging / total capturing), OCT image intensity (-10 to +10),
OCT sensitivity (RS-3000 Advance / RS-330)
Anterior segment image
OCT image
Cornea Cross
Anterior segment image
OCT image
In the screen, menus same as macula line and macula cross are displayed.
Select from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking on the OCT image and Anterior segment
image.
448
Displays the borderline of ASC and PSC on the OCT image of cross section.
ASC is displayed as red borderline and PSC is displayed as blue borderline.
However, when the color setting is “Color”, all borderlines are displayed in white.
Layer Selecting “Show Layer” displays the layers selected in the pop-up menu. When “Show
Layer” is not selected, no layers are displayed. However, the selection of layers to be
displayed is retained.
The borderline is detected automatically and cannot be edited.
Measures the cornea thickness. Or measures the distance between optional
Measure two points.
For details, see “12.11.2 Measure” (page 453).
Changes the display color of the OCT image. 12
Color
For details, see “12.4.2 Color” (page 385).
Displays the smoothed OCT image.
Digital Smoothing
For details, see “12.4.5 Digital Smoothing” (page 388).
Edits the border of the anterior segment layer.
Layer Editor
For details, see “12.11.1 Editing the border of the anterior segment layer” (page 450).
Displays the OCT image in full size.
Full Size For details, see “12.4.7 Displaying images in full size” (page 391).
The Anterior segment image cannot be displayed in full size.
Save As Bitmap Saves the Anterior segment image or OCT image as a bitmap file.
Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap For details, see “12.4.8 Saving image data” (page 392).
Original OCT to Save As For the OCT image, “Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap” can be performed. Saves only the
Bitmap raw image of the displayed image as the bitmap file.
• For the cornea line and cornea cross, there is no graph display.
449
 Changing image display

As well as the OCT image, “Layer”, “Color”, and “Full Size” of the anterior OCT image can be changed
in the pop-up menu displayed by moving the cursor over the image. The image intensity can also be
specified.
For details of image intensity, see “12.4.3 Intensity” (page 386).
Full Size display
Image intensity
Color setting
Layer display
12.11.1 Editing the border of the anterior segment layer

Displays the editing screen for the border of the automatically detected anterior segment layer auto-
matically detected and edits the border.
• When the right and left eyes are selected and Single display is selected, Layer Editor
cannot be selected.
1 Select “Layer Editor” from the pop-up

menu displayed by right-clicking the OCT
image.
The OCT image is displayed in the Edit-
ing screen.
The Editing toolbar is displayed in the
upper part of the Editing screen.
450
Editing toolbar
The following operations can be performed with the Edit tool.
Redo Cancels the previous undo. 12

Reset Resets the layer to the initial state of the editing.
Recalculates the layer.
ReCalculation The recalculation results may be different from the initial calculation.
Operate Zoom The cursor changes from the cursor indication of Draw Line and Erase Line to
a normal arrow cursor.
Spline Enters the layer Spline mode.
Selects the layer to be edited.

Layer Selection
“Show the confirm dialog” Checking this box displays the confirmation dialog box when editing is
check box performed.
Exit without saving Exits the Editor screen without saving the edit contents.
Exit with saving Exits the Editor screen after saving the edit contents.
Setting Reflects editing with Spline mode.
Clear Clears editing with Spline mode.

[<<], [<], [>], [>>]
Changes displayed OCT images.
Image change
Right click to open the pop-up menu to perform the following operations.
Edit the layer under the

Changes the layer under the cursor to the edit target (pink).
cursor
Edit mode Selects from among “Operate Zoom” and “Spline (Spline mode)”
Select the display color from among Positive (B/W), Negative (B/W), and
Color.
Color
Selecting “Release” returns to the color setting when the image was
captured.
Measure (Cannot be selected in the Layer Editor screen.)

Digital Smoothing Displays a smoothed OCT image.
Saves the OCT image as a bitmap file in the specified folder with the
Save As Bitmap
display status.
Raw OCT to Save As Saves only the raw OCT image of the displayed image as a bitmap file in
Bitmap the specified folder.
451
2 Select the border to be edited with the selection

box.
Or double-click on the image border to select the
line.
The selected border is displayed in pink and the
border not selected is displayed in light-blue.
3 Edit the border.

1) Click the Spline Mode button to enter Spline mode.
In Spline mode, the cursor appears as pencil ( ).
2) Click the points that seem to be border with

the mouse.
Clicking two or more points automatically draws a
line running through those points.
To delete input points, click the Delete button.
• Thirty points at the maximum can be arranged.
3) After drawing, clicking the Set button confirms

the editing.
• If “Display confirmation dialog box” is checked, a confirmation message is displayed when

editing is conducted. Click the OK button to edit the border.
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 in the same manner to continue editing the border.
5 Click the Exit with saving button to save the editing.

When the Exit without saving button is clicked, the editing is canceled and the Editing
screen is closed.
For the OCT images that have had border editing, the Edit icon is displayed on the lower
right in the image.
452
12.11.2 Measure
Measure cornea thickness or measure the distance between optional two points.
CAUTION • An error may generated depending on the eye shape or measurement area. In
addition, the same error may generated by wearing the glasses.
Open the pop-up menu by right clicking on the OCT

image and select “Measure“. Select “Cornea Top
Thickness”, “Cornea Thickness 1”, or “Cornea
Thickness 2” to display the cornea thickness. For
12
“Cornea Thickness 1” and “Cornea Thickness 2”,
measurement position can be changed by dragging
the numeric part.
Select “Measure” then select “Measure1”

and “Measure2” to display both edge
arrow line and display the distance.
Change the edge of the arrow position by
dragging.
Selecting menu again or double-clicking the center part of the scale cancels the measure-
ment value and removes the arrow.
• When “Measure” is selected and then “Reset” is selected, the scale returns to the original
position in the OCT image display.
453
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (Cornea Radial)
12.12 Image Display Menu (Cornea Radial)
For the Cornea Radial 6, Cornea Radial 12, select from the radial lines of 6 directions (30° interval)
and 12 directions (15° interval) to display the OCT image.
Perform the same operation as with Cornea Line and Cornea Cross except for the following differ-
ences.
Any line can be selected from the radial lines.
Cornea thickness map is displayed in color scale.
Cornea Radial 6
Anterior segment image line is displayed in

6 directions (30° interval).
The line is not displayed if the check of
“Markup” is removed.
Click the button to display which line of the

OCT image is displayed.
On the Anterior segment image, the se-
lected line is displayed in red and the
other lines are displayed in green.
Layer thickness map OCT selection

The thickness of the X mark area is displayed on the upper right.
Cornea Radial 12
Anterior segment image lines are dis-

played in 12 directions (15° interval)
• For the Cornea Radial, there is no graph display.

• For the Cornea Radial, the cornea thickness map is not displayed if the cornea detection is
not performed properly.
454
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Image Display Menu (ACA Line)
12.13 Image Display Menu (ACA Line)
Measure each parameters with the ACA observation and ACA measurement mode.
1. OCT image Anterior segment image
12
ACA parameter
Distance between 500µm or 750µm point from scleral spur on the posterior
AOD500, AOD750
surface of cornea and iris. (µm)
Area surrounded by AOD500 (or AOD750), posterior surface of cornea, line in
TISA500, TISA750
parallel with lens from scleral spur to AOD, and iris surface (mm2).
ACA Angles of posterior surface of cornea and iris surface (deg.)
1. OCT image
OCT image of ACA.
From the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the image, each operations of “Color”, “Measure”, “Digital
Smoothing”, “Angle Measure mode”, “Display Angle”, “Full Size”, “Save As Bitmap”, “Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap”,
and “Original OCT to Save As Bitmap” can be performed.
Changes the OCT image display color.

Color
For details, see “12.4.2 Color” (page 385).
Measures the distance between optional two points of OCT image.
Measure
For details, see “12.11.2 Measure” (page 453).
Displays the smoothed OCT image.
Digital Smoothing
For details, see “12.4.5 Digital Smoothing” (page 388).
455
Angle Measure Mode Switches to the ACA measurement mode screen.

Switches between display and non-display of ACA meter (measurement pattern
Display Angle
and parameter).
Displays the OCT image in full size.
Full Size For details, see “12.4.7 Displaying images in full size” (page 391).
The Anterior segment image cannot be displayed in full size.
Save As Bitmap Saves the Anterior segment image or OCT image as a bitmap file.
Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap For details, see “12.4.8 Saving image data” (page 392).
Original OCT to Save As For the OCT image, “Raw OCT to Save As Bitmap” can be performed. Saves only the
Bitmap raw image of the displayed image as the bitmap file.
 ACA measurement mode

Buttons on the lower part of the screen function as follows.
Cancel Cancels the ACA measurement mode and returns to the original screen display.
Back Gets back the proceeded procedure.
Completes the procedure proceeded to the end and finishes the ACA
Finish
measurement mode.
1 From the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the image, click “Angle Measure
Mode” to enter the measurement mode.
The screen switches to “Measuring ACA” screen and procedure message is displayed on
the upper part of the screen.
Set scleral spur

“Click point As Scleral Spur”
456
2 Click the scleral spur point on the OCT image.

Scleral spur point is displayed with the yellow dot and next procedure message is displayed.
Set Length
“Click 500/750um circle”
12
3 Select 500/750µm and click a point of intersection of circle and posterior surface of cornea.
A red line is displayed vertically from the clicked intersection point and the scleral spur point
and next step message is displayed.
Set point on the iris

“Click red line”
4 Click a point of intersection of red line on Step 3 and anterior surface of iris.
A red surface aligning the anterior surface of iris is displayed and the next step message is
displayed.
Set front line of iris

“Drag red line on iris, click “Finish”
button”
457
5 Drag the red line to align the anterior surface of iris and click the Finish button.
6 Complete the ACA measurement mode and display ACA and measured parameters on
the original screen.
458
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Printing / Printing Preview
12.14 Printing / Printing Preview
When the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 OCT image data is displayed, the cur-
rently displayed contents can be printed as the standard format.
Clicking the Print from the file menu performs printing.
• When Fundus/OCT image is displayed in the full-size, when capturing the movie, or when
sample image is displayed, Print/Print preview cannot be used.
• The printer is set by the computer print setting. 12
• For the print setting, see “12.2 Setting Viewer Screen” (page 372).
 Print from the print preview

Clicking the Print preview from the file menu displays the preview screen.
For the operations in the preview screen, see “2.6 Printing Image Data” (page 181).
Click the Print button to print.
459
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Exporting OCT Images
12.15 Exporting OCT Images
Exports the image data to the external devices (convert the file format which can be read with the
other system).
The following exporting modules can be used.
Displays a bitmap format or JPEG format data by starting the specified
application.
Export bitmap file(s) Output the displayed image data as a bitmap format.
Export ClipBoard(s) Saves the displayed image data in the computer clipboard.
Outputs the displayed image data as the original file format saved in the
Export image file(s)
NAVIS-EX.
Export jpeg file(s) Outputs the displayed image data as a JPEG format.
Outputs the image data, patient information, and photographing information
Export Report file(s) as a report format.
A preview is displayed before saving.
To use the Export function, the exporting modules are necessary to be set.
The setting of the Exporting function is standard system setting in the NAVIS-EX. For details,
see “2.7 Export” (page 190).
• The image, graph, and examination information on the screen are output in a file.
• Even if multiple images are selected, only the displayed OCT image data is exported.
 Exporting images in other than report format (Export Report file(s))
1 Select an image to be exported and display in the Viewer screen.
2 Display the image in the status desired to be exported.
3 From the file menu, select “Export” and select an

exporting module to be used.
The image is exported.
460
12
Example of the output data (Macula Cross Horizontal tab)
For the setting of exporting module, when “Display saving dialog box when output” is
checked, the Save As dialog box is displayed before exporting.
Enter the file name and click the Save button executes the exporting.
461
 Exporting images as report format (Export Report file(s))

1 Select an image to be exported and display in the Viewer screen.
3 From the file menu, select “Export” and select

“Report (Export Report file(s))”.
Preview is displayed.
Display and operation of the PDF file depend on the application software installed on the
computer. For details, refer to the manual of the application software.
When displaying the PDF file, use the AcrobatReader accompanied to the installer.
• For the OCT image, comment cannot be entered in the Preview.
4 Clicking the Save button executes the exporting and the Preview window closes.
Clicking the Close button closes the Preview.
462
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Sending OCT Images by E-mail
12.16 Sending OCT Images by E-mail
Send the exporting file (Export Report file(s)) as a report format by e-mail.
The file is sent as a zip-compressed file.
To use the E-mail sending function, set e-mail address, server, and authentication beforehand.
For the setting method, see “2.8.1 Setting e-mail sending” (page 194). The settings are
common to NAVIS-EX. Settings for each types of images are not necessary. 12
1 Select the image to be exported and display in the Viewer screen.
3 From the file menu, select “Export” and click “Report (Export Report file(s))”.
Preview is displayed. Instead of the Save button displayed when exporting, Mail Send button
is displayed.
4 The following operations are the same for the AFC-330/230/210, F-10, and DS-10/20
images.
However, comment cannot be entered.
For details, see “2.8.1 Setting e-mail sending” (page 194).
463
VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE: Error Messages and Remedies
12.17 Error Messages and Remedies
If any of the following error codes is displayed on the screen, follow the suggestions in the cause and
remedy column.
When contacting NIDEK or your authorized distributor, notify of the error code and the symptom along
with the program version of NAVIS-EX for appropriate service.
Error
Message Cause and remedy
Code
10000 Unknown error occurs. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10001 Unable to load the captured images from the data The image data is corrupted.
folder. If the same error code is displayed again even
The examination data may be damaged. after a retry, contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
10002 Unable to load the capture information from the data The image capture setting file is corrupted.
folder. If the same error code is displayed again even
The examination data may be damaged. after a retry, contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
10003 It is invalid release pattern. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10004 It failed to analyze the OCT image. Analysis of the OCT image failed.
If the same error code is displayed again even
after a retry, contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
10005 There is no exam data to show on RSViewer. Return to the list of examination data, and select
an examination data set that can be displayed.
10006 It was amount to the max release folder. Opening of more than 32 examination data sets
was attempted.
Select examination data again so that the number
of the selected data sets becomes less than 32.
10007 The max count of the Map data that can be opened at Opening of 3 or more Macula Map / Disc Map
the same time is two. examination data was attempted.
Select examination data again so that the number
of the selected Macula Map / Disc Map data sets
becomes less than 3.
10008 Unable to analyze the optic disc. Analysis of the optic disc failed.
Perform image capture again. If the same error code is displayed again even
distributor.
10009 Unable to save the optic disc analysis result. If the same error code is displayed again even
The settings of the examination data folder may be after opening the examination data again or a
improper. retry, contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10010 Unable to create the image to be printed or exported. If the same error code is displayed again even
Confirm that the examination data is displayed after retrying printing, contact NIDEK or your
properly. When it is displayed properly, the folder authorized distributor.
settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper.
464
Error
Code
10011 It failed to create the report PDF file. If the same error code is displayed again even
after retrying export, contact NIDEK or your
10012 The path of the file used to create an image to be If the same error code is displayed again even
exported is improper. after retrying export, contact NIDEK or your
The NAVIS-EX settings may be improper. authorized distributor.
10013 Unable to create the image for Screen Capture. If the same error code is displayed again even
The folder settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper. after retrying screen capture, contact NIDEK or 12
your authorized distributor.
10014 Unable to create the image for link to the host system. If the same error code is displayed again even
The folder settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper. after retrying communication, contact NIDEK or
your authorized distributor.
10015 Unable to print/preview. Confirm that the printer is set correctly.
Confirm that the printer is properly set. If the same error code is displayed again even
though the printer is set, contact NIDEK or your
10016 Unable to register the screen settings. If the same error code is displayed again even
The folder settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper. after retrying saving the screen setting, contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10017 It failed to show 3D. Check the computer specifications.
though the computer satisfies the requirements of
this application, contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
10018 Failed to load Normative Database. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10019 It can't use Normative Database. Confirm that the requirements to use the
Normative Database are satisfied. If the same
error code is displayed again even though the
requirements are satisfied, contact NIDEK or your
10020 There is no View that can display the data. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10021 Please check Display color setting. The color setting of the display may not be 32 bit.
Change the color setting of the display to 32 bit.
though the color setting of the display is 32 bit,
contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10022 Unable to initialize the data setting dialog box. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
The NAVIS-EX settings may be improper.
10023 Unable to write the file to the data folder. If the same error code is displayed every time,
The NAVIS-EX settings may be improper. contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
10024 File name is invalid. Change the file name and retry.
If the same error code is displayed every time,
465
Error
Code
10025 The specified file is read only. Please specify another The specified file may be read-only. Check the
file. attribute of the specified file.
10026 Unable to write to specified file. Insufficient access Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
rights to write, or it is used by another person or
program. Set access rights correctly, and close any
programs that might be using the file and try again.
10027 Unable to load Normative Database. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
Confirm that the Normative Database file is properly
installed.
10028 Unable to load the DLL necessary to activate RS If the same error code is displayed every time,
Viewer. contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
466
13. OCT IMAGE Follow-Up
Follows up the examination by performing comparative display and differential display of the Baseline
image and later images.
Fundus image
For the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330, the fundus image may be displayed with
the OCT image. Since the image acquisition principles are different between the RS-3000/RS-3000
Advance and the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 (image generation from SLO image/OCT image) the image
appearance differs.
13
Fundus image of the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance Fundus image of the RS-3000 Lite/RS-330
In this manual, the RS-3000 image is used.
467
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Displaying Follow-Up Screen
13.1 Displaying Follow-Up Screen
Displays the saved image on the Follow-Up screen for following up the examination.
• The patient data which is being used on the other computer (locked) cannot be followed up.
• Cornea line, Cornea Cross, Cornea Radial, and ACA Line images cannot be displayed on
the Follow-Up screen.
• For image capturing, set the Baseline image from the captured images and perform Follow-
Up capturing.
Refer to the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance operator's manual for the procedure of the Follow-Up
capturing.
The RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 has no Follow-Up function. However, when the captured position is the
same, comparison display and differential display can be performed.
1 Select the image to be followed up on the Image List screen and register the Baseline
image.
If the Baseline image is not registered, images cannot be displayed in the Follow-Up screen.
For the registration procedure, see “13.2 Registering and Clearing Images” (page 470).
2 Click the Follow-Up button .
When multiple types of images are selected, a dia-

log box for selecting the type of image is displayed.
Select the type of image from the list and click the OK
button.
The types of selected images are displayed in the list.
• Select the data to be displayed initially on the Follow-Up screen. The image displayed in
the list can be selected and displayed after switching to the Follow-Up screen.
468
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Displaying Follow-Up Screen
3 The Baseline image, Follow-Up images, and selected images are displayed in the Fol-
low-Up screen.
13
4 Change each setting and perform Follow-Up.

To record the displayed image, print the image.
• In the Follow-Up screen, the screen shot cannot be saved.
Clicking the Return button on the Follow-Up screen returns to the previously displayed screen.
469
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Registering and Clearing Images
13.2 Registering and Clearing Images
The images are followed up by classifying and registering as Baseline, Follow-Up, and Others.
Image as a base of Follow-Up.

Baseline
Register the already captured image as a Baseline.
Reference image used for Follow-Up.

Follow-Up When the Follow-Up screen is displayed, the Follow-Up image is called automatically.
Registration of the Follow-Up image is performed in the Follow-Up screen.
 Baseline registration
1) Select the image to be registered as
Baseline in the Image List screen and
open the pop-up menu by right-clicking.
Select “Follow-Up” then “Register to Base-
line”.
The “Follow-Up Exam Register (Set as new
Baseline)” dialog box is displayed.
2) Confirm the data. Change the title as neces-

sary and click the Set button.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels the Baseline
image registration and closes the “Follow-Up
Exam Register (Set as new Baseline)” dialog box.
3) The image is registered as the Baseline

image and the Baseline icon is added to
the thumbnail.
Baseline image icon
470
The Baseline image is displayed as a thumbnail in a folder icon at the top of the Image List
screen. (When sample images are displayed, thumbnails of the Baseline images are
displayed below the sample images.)
13
The Baseline image can be registered by dragging a thumbnail image to the Baseline image
area.
When multiple thumbnail images are dropped,
the different buttons are displayed.
Select a button from Set All, Set, Not Set, or
Cancel.
Selecting the Set All button registers the title as
MM/DD/YYYY_R (or L) (the default setting).
Changing the title of the Baseline image
1) Right click the Baseline image icon and select “Follow-Up” then “Edit Follow-Up title”
from the pop-up menu.
The “Follow-Up Exam Register (Edit the title)” dialog box is displayed.
471
2) Edit the title in the “Follow-Up Exam Register (Edit the title)” dialog box and click the
Change button.
The title of the Baseline image is changed.
The title is displayed in the caption by moving the cur-

sor over the thumbnail image.
 Clearing of Baseline registration

Select the image registered as Baseline on the Image List
screen and open the pop-up menu by right-clicking. Select
“Follow-Up” then select “Remove from Baseline”.
A confirmation message is displayed. Click the Yes
button to cancel the Baseline setting.
When the removed Baseline image has Follow-Up
images registered to it, the Follow-Up registrations are cleared and any settings performed
on the Follow-Up screen are deleted. (This operation cannot be undone.)
• The Baseline registration can also be cleared in the Follow-Up screen.

Unchecking the box of the current Baseline image in the image registry field on the left of the Fol-
low-Up screen clears the Baseline registration. The oldest data of all the remaining selected
images automatically becomes the Baseline image. However, at least one box must be selected.
 Follow-Up registration
Select images to be registered as the Follow-Up image on the
Image List screen and click the Follow-Up button to display
the Follow-Up screen. Checking the box in the image registry
field registers the data as the Follow-Up image.
Clicking the “Check all data” button checks all boxes.
472
The Follow-Up image icon is added to the Follow-

Up image in the Image List screen.
The Follow-Up image icon is also displayed on the
images captured by the Follow-Up image capture in
the Image List screen.
Follow-Up image icon
 Clearing Follow-Up registration

Select a Follow-Up image from the Image List screen and 13
select “Follow-Up” then “Remove from Follow-Up” from the
pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the image.
• The Follow-Up registration can also be cleared in the Follow-Up screen.

Unchecking the box of the Follow-Up image in the image registry field clears the Follow-Up regis-
tration.
 Change of Baseline image for compatibility with earlier versions

Specify the Follow-Up group to be used in the earlier versions of the RS series. Earlier versions of the
RS series can perform Follow-Up image capture on OCT images for only one Follow-Up group of
each type. When there are multiple Follow-Up groups for any type on NAVIS-EX, the Follow-Up group
to be used in the earlier versions of the RS series must be specified.
When no Follow-Up group is specified, the oldest Baseline image is used as the old version compati-
ble image.
The old version compatible icon ( ) is displayed on the
thumbnail images that belong to the Follow-Up group of the
Baseline image specified as old version compatible.
Old version compatible icon
Change of old version compatible Baseline image
473
1) Right-click the thumbnail of the Baseline image

that is not specified as old version compatible.
Select “Follow-Up” from the menu and click “Set
old version compatible”.
2) The confirmation message dialog box is dis-

played. Click the Yes button to change the set-
ting.
The old version compatible icon is displayed on the
thumbnail images of the specified Follow-Up group.
474
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Follow-Up Screen
13.3 Follow-Up Screen
Select images on the Image List screen and click the Follow-Up button to display the Follow-Up
screen.
13.3.1 Progression display

The analysis charts, OCT images or such as well as the layer thickness graph are displayed in
chronological order for all the Follow-Up images.
* The following image is the Progression RNFL display of Disc Map.
1 2 13
12
8
3 9
4 10
11
15 16
6
13 14
1. Menu bar
Menu bar has File menu and Setting menu.
Clicking the menus displays the drop-down list.
Update This menu is disabled on the Follow-Up screen.

Displays the print preview.
Preview
This menu is enabled when the printer is set.
File Performs printing.
Print
This menu is enabled when the printer is set.
Export Exports the screen currently displayed with the specified file format.
Link Sends data to the host system.
Configures the captured images into video image and presents them as
Time Lapse
video. Or saves them as an AVI format video file.
475
Closes the Follow-Up screen and returns to the previously displayed

Return
screen.
Setting This menu is disabled on the Follow-Up screen.
RSFollowUp
Displays the Setting Dialog box.
Property
Setting
Displays the Customize dialog box for setting the button display in the
Customize Toolbar toolbar.
For the setting procedure, see “1.7.2 Toolbar” (page 32).
2. Toolbar
Displays the shortcut button of the functions frequently used.
The buttons to be displayed can be changed with the Customize dialog box in the file menu.
Update This function is disabled on the Follow-Up screen.
Displays the print preview.

Preview This menu is enabled when the printer is set.
Performs printing.
Print This menu is enabled when the printer is set.
Export Exports the screen currently displayed with the specified file format.
Link Sends data to the host system.
Configures the captured images into video image and presents them as video.
Time Lapse Or saves them as an AVI format video file.
Return Closes the Follow-Up screen and returns to the previously displayed screen.
Setting This function is disabled on the Follow-Up screen.
3. Right eye / Left eye selection

Check the right eye or left eye of the data to be displayed to select. The selected right eye or left eye data is
displayed in the data display area and image selection field.
Clicking the SET AL button displays the Eyeinfo Setting dialog box and the refraction power and axial length can be
input. The values are used for comparison with Normative Database. The setting of the axial length is applied to all
the registered Follow-Up data.
Clicking the RESET AL button initializes the refraction and axial length input values of all the selected examination
data.
4. Follow-Up selection field

The types and titles of the images (Baseline images) registered to Follow-Up are displayed in the tree view.
The title of the image currently displayed in the Follow-Up screen is highlighted. Clicking the title in the tree view
changes the displayed image type.
5. Image registry field

Images of the same type registered to Follow-Up and images selected in the Image List screen are
displayed in the chronological order of their examination date.
The selected image with the oldest examination date is set as the Baseline image. The selected images other than
the Baseline image are registered as the Follow-Up image and displayed in the data display area.
Clicking the “Check all data” button selects all images.
The examination date of the image displayed in the data display area is highlighted.
476
6. Display selection field

The displays of fundus image / thickness map, analysis chart, and OCT image can be changed.
The selectable options differ depending on the displayed image type.
Analyze Chart Selects the values displayed on the chart between Thickness and Difference.
LBS Selects LBS of the overlay image.
LBE Selects LBE of the overlay image.
Overlay Sets the transparency of the overlay displayed on the fundus image.
Select the display color of the OCT image from Positive (B/W), Negative (B/W), Color,
OCT color
and Release.
7. Scope setting tool

Brightness, contrast, and magnification of the selected OCT image can be changed.
The tools enabled on the Follow-Up screen vary depending on the image.
Checking the “Sync Zoom” box applies the changes to all the displayed OCT images. 13
8. Screen change
The Follow-Up screen display can be selected.
Displays all the Follow-Up images in chronological order and the thickness variation
Progression
graph.
Comparison Displays two examination dates for comparison of image data.
The Progression and Comparison displays differ depending on the image type.
In Progression Custom, the desired items to be displayed in the Follow-Up screen can be selected from fundus
image/ Map, chart, and OCT image.
9. Display information
The examination date (age), SQI, SSI, and time passed since the Baseline image
capture are displayed.
Grades the quality of the SLO image on a scale of 0 to 5 based on the brightness and
sharpness of the image.
SQI A higher value indicates a better SLO image.
“SQI ---” is displayed for devices other than the software version of the RS-3000 Advance that
is compatible with SQI.
Grades the quality of OCT image on a scale of 1 to 10.

SSI
A higher value indicates a better OCT image.
Checking the Follow-Up image box hides any unselected Follow-Up images
captured earlier than the selected images. The number of unchecked boxes
indicates how many previous Follow-Up images that are hidden.
The picture to the right indicates that one Follow-Up image is hidden before the
selected image.
477
When any Follow-Up images are hidden, the data points on

the graph are indicated as clear squares.
When some images cannot be displayed because there is not
enough screen space, the data points on the graph are
displayed in the same manner.
When the captured image is from a different portion of the

eye, “Scan position is different” is displayed.
10. Displayed image selection

Image and color map to be displayed can be selected.
The anterior segment image from image capture. Whether or not there is any alignment
deviation at the time of image capture can be checked.
Anterior
“No Image” is displayed for the RS-3000 data, since it does not contain anterior segment
images.
Fundus Fundus image
Image with the scan position and scan area of the Baseline image capture indicated in
ScanPos
light blue
Thickness Fundus image + thickness map of full retina
NDB Fundus image + Comparison map with Normative Database
Deviation Fundus image + Difference map with Normative Database
Fundus image + Difference map of retinal thickness between Baseline image and other
Difference
images
The overlay image density of the color map can be adjusted in the display selection field.
For images captured by the RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330, “Fundus Image” or “OCT Phase Fundus
Image” can be selected by right-clicking the fundus image.
For the RS-330, “Color Fundus Image” can also be selected.
478
11. Analysis chart selection

The analysis chart to be displayed can be selected.
Display the drop-down menu and click the desired item.
This analysis chart selection displays only the selectable options, if any, for the image type.
12. Display switching button
The following operations can be performed with the display switching button. 13
Reset Resets the image to the initial status.
Original size Displays the image in the original size.

Ends the image display in full size and returns to the Normal view.
Return
This button is enabled in the full size display.
Save config Saves the current screen settings as the default settings.
When this box is checked, the settings of the scope setting tool (Brightness,
□ Sync Zoom
Contrast, Zoom) and image intensity are applied to all images.
13. Graph display

The thickness or ratio variations are displayed in the graph.
Clicking a sector of the chart types selects the sector to be displayed in graph.
1
A maximum of six sectors can be selected.
Click the unit for the vertical axis to switch the indication between thickness and ratio.
2
The graph unit can also be changed from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the graph.
Moving the cursor over the data point (■) displays the examination date and values.
3
The number in front of each value corresponds with the number in the thickness variation table.
Clicking the [<<] or [>>] button below [Age] narrows or expands the scale of the horizontal [Age]
4
axis.
• The scale of the horizontal [Age] axis is displayed up to 120.
479
Option menu displayed by right-clicking on graph
Changes horizontal and vertical axis scales.

Maximum values of 1 to 4 In the thickness graph, each maximum value of 1 to 4 can be specified in the
Max Auto Select Thickness Setting tab in the Setting Dialog box.
Max Auto Select by LBS-LBE In the ratio graph, each maximum value of 1 to 4 is fixed to 125/250/500/1000 (%).
“Max Auto Select by LBS-LBE” is displayed only in Thickness View.
Thickness View/Ratio View Switches the graph between Thickness View and Ratio View.
Save Graph Data Outputs values on the graph using a CSV file (or TSV file).
14. Thickness variation table

The thickness variation (slope) for one year and p value are
displayed.
The inclination of the regression line on the graph and p value
(probability) are indicated in the table.
The p value is “< 0.01”, “< 0.05”, or “-”.
Selecting “Select” or “Event” in the graph selection drop-down menu

divides the table into “Before (Dash)” and “After (Solid)” columns.
15. Graph selection

“All”, “Select”, or “Event” can be selected to change the graph and variation values.
Displays the entire graph from the Baseline image to the most recent Follow-Up image
All
data.
Divides the graph at the selected examination date.

Select
Click the examination date (■) on the graph to set the dividing point.
Divides the graph at the registered event.

Event When multiple events are registered, click the desired event mark (♦). The variation (slope) is
calculated for examination date prior to the selected mark as well as to the next event.
Clicking the Event button displays the Event Setting Dialog box.
16. Custom graph

The custom graph can be displayed. The horizontal axis of the custom graph synchronizes with that of the
thickness graph.
Clicking the Custom button displays the CustomGraph Setting Dialog box to create a new custom graph.
480
 Operations in the data display area

Depending on the image type and screen display, the fundus image, OCT image, analysis chart, com-
parison map, TSNIT graph, thickness graph, analysis table of optical disc, or such can be displayed in
the data display area.
Operations available in the data display area are the same as that of the Viewer screen.
The different function from the Viewer screen is the registration editing function. For details, see
“13.11 Registration editing” (page 516).
13.3.2 Comparison display

The image data of two examination dates is compared. 13
* The following image is the Comparison RNFL display of Disc Map.
1. Display information
The examination date (age), SQI, SSI, and time passed since the Baseline image capture are displayed.
Checking the box sets the selected image as the reference image for comparison which becomes fixed to
the left.The image on the right can be changed using the scroll bar at the bottom.
Even when a Follow-Up image is specified as the reference image, the Baseline image is still used as the reference
to calculated the values on the analysis chart.
2. OCT image
481
Selecting “Full Size” from the pop-up menu

displayed by right-clicking the OCT image enlarges
the displayed fundus and OCT images in full size.
To display the images in their original sizes, select
“Return to Normal Size” from the pop-up menu.
The OCT image in Comparison RNFL cannot be
displayed in full size.
Double-clicking the OCT image enlarges only the

image. The enlarged OCT image can only be
observed. Changing the settings of the image on
the Comparison screen also changes the enlarged
OCT image.
The enlarged OCT image can be moved by
dragging.
Right-clicking the enlarged OCT image, clicking the
[x] button in the top right, or enlarging an other OCT
image closes the window.
13.3.3 Inputting data to a custom graph

The variations of a desired factor can be displayed in a graph along with the thickness graph (or ratio
graph) to check for correlation between the two graphs.
A custom graph is created by inputting the individual data point (examination date and value).
1 Click the Custom button.

The Custom Graph Setting Dialog box is dis-
played.
482
2 Select an item from the drop-down menu of the

Item field.
For creating a new item name, refer to “13.3.4
Registering a new custom graph” (page 484).
3 Input Date, Value, and Eye (R / L / None) of the 13

graph to be displayed and click the Add button.
The data is added to the list.
4 Repeat Step 3 to input all the data point of the

graph.
5 Click the OK button to complete.

The Custom Graph Setting Dialog box is closed.
6 Select a custom graph to be displayed from the drop-down menu of the Custom field.
The custom graph is displayed under the graph.
All the registered custom graphs are displayed in the drop-down menu. Selecting the custom
graph with no data displays the graph frame only.
483
Editing the custom graph data
1) Select the item on the list and click the

Change button.
Date, Value, and Eye of the selected item are dis-
played in the Custom Graph Edit field.
2) After changing the Date, Value or Eye, click

the Change button.
The data list is updated.
13.3.4 Registering a new custom graph

Specify the item name and unit of a new custom graph.
1 Click the Custom button.

The Custom Graph Setting Dialog box is dis-
played.
484
2 Click the Item Setting button.

The Item Setting Dialog box is displayed.
3 Input Item Name and Unit in the Item Edit field. 13

All the custom graph item registered to NAVIS-
EX are displayed on the list.
4 Click the Add button.

The item is added to the list.
5 Click the OK button to close the Item Setting Dialog box.
6 Input the data of the new custom graph in the Custom Graph Setting Dialog box.
 Other operations in the Item Setting Dialog box

Editing the custom graph item
1) Select an item on the list and click the

Change button.
The item name and unit are displayed in the Item
Edit field.
2) Change the item name or unit and click the

Change button.
The list is updated.
485
Deleting the custom graph item
1) Select an item on the list and click the Delete button.

The confirmation message is displayed.
Deleting the item erases the custom graph data of all patients related to the deleted item. Be aware
that the deletion of the custom graph data cannot be undone.
2) Click the OK button to delete the item.
13.3.5 Inputting an event

The thickness graph (or ratio graph) are divided into two parts before and after the event (eye drops,
oral medication, surgery, or such). The variation trends can be compared between before and after the
event.
1 Click the Event button.

The Event Setting Dialog box is displayed.
2 Input Date and Event Name, then click the Add

button.
486
The event is added to the list.
3 Click the OK button to close the Event Setting Dialog box. 13

The event mark (♦) is displayed on the thickness graph.
4 Select Event from the drop-down menu of the Event field.

The graph is divided into a dashed line before the event and a solid line after the event. The
variation table is also divided into Before (Dash) and After (Solid) columns.
487
When the custom graph is displayed, it is also divided in the same manner as the thickness
graph.
Slope and p value are displayed for both Before

and After.
• When multiple events are registered, the selected event can be changed by clicking the
event mark (♦).
13.3.6 Time Lapse Video Display

The Time Lapse function automatically configures the captured images into video image and presents
them as video. The video image is saved in the specified folder as an AVI format video file.
The video is displayed by activating the video player software (Windows Media Player etc.) set as AVI
format file.
Display example (Displayed with Windows Media Player)
The displayed image is displayed as video image.

When a map is displayed, color scale is displayed accord-
ingly.
For the playback speed (Default setting: 2 seconds / image),
set with the video player software function.
The captured date and patient's age when captured are dis-
played.
This information is updated when the image is changed.
Playback control
Changes according to the video player software in use and its version.
488
 Displaying video
1 Display the image to be displayed as video in the Follow-Up screen.

• The video image can be started to play in both Progression display and Comparison
display.
• The image displayed in the screen is displayed as video image.
For the images in the Follow-Up group, the image not displayed in the screen is not played as
video.
• When "Difference" is selected for the image, a video is displayed from the different map
image in Baseline image and Follow-Up image.
2 From the File menu, select “Time Lapse Video” and then
“Preview”.
13
Or click the Time Lapse button on the tool bar and
then select Preview.
The video player software is activated and the Time Lapse
video image starts to play.
As necessary, change the display size and playback
speed settings with the video player software function.
3 Click the close “×” button to exit from video player software.
• Depending on the video player software used, multiple video players cannot be activated.
When selecting the menu "TimeLapse" and then "Preview" (or Save video image), an error
message is displayed.
 Saving video image

Saves the Time Lapse video image as AVI format video file.
• The video file cannot be saved in NAVIS-EX database.
1 Display the image saved as video in the Follow-Up screen.
2 From the File menu, select "Time Lapse Video" and then
"Save video image".
Or click the Time Lapse button on the tool bar and
then select "Save video image".
489
3 Specify the file name and location and click the Save button.
The file name is initially displayed as "Patient ID_Capture pattern_Group name_Right or Left
eye_Type of fundus image_Current date.avi"
13.3.7 Follow-Up screen setting

The Follow-Up screen display can be set on the Setting Dialog box.
The Setting Dialog box is displayed by selecting “RSFollowup Property” from the Setup menu in the
Follow-Up screen.
The settings other than Registration on the Image Analyze tab is synchronized with the setting per-
formed on the Viewer screen.
For the settings other than Registration on the Image Analyze tab, see “12.2 Setting Viewer
Screen” (page 372).
 Image Analyze tab

Sets the conditions of Registration, which
is the function to automatically align
images for analysis.
If “ReAnalyze when Analyze Engine is dif-
ferent” is checked, the data whose analy-
sis engine is different is reanalyzed.
In addition, if “ReAnalyze when it was
edited” is checked, the edited data is also
reanalyzed.
• When reanalysis is performed, display of the message “Scan position is different” may
change.
490
 Thickness Setting tab

Sets the retinal thickness display color
scale. Difference is set as a dedicated set-
ting for the Follow-Up screen.
In the Difference, set the retinal thickness

differential color scale. Set the upper and
lower limit range from ±5 to ±100µm. The
default setting is ±50µm and clicking the Reset
button reset the value to default.
13
491
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Macula Line, Macula Cross Display
13.4 Macula Line, Macula Cross Display
Comparative display of the OCT image and thickness graph can be viewed using the Macula Line
data and Macula Cross data.
• Operations of fundus image, OCT image, and Scope Setting tool are the same for the
operation when images are displayed in Viewer.
However, all the displayed OCT images are displayed in full size.
 Display example of Progression (Macula Line)

The graph line color changes according to the setting of the image.
Baseline Orange
Blue and such (the date is displayed in the same color with the corresponding
Follow-Up
graph.)
Fundus image OCT image
The variation graph of the synchronous line position and variation value.
Set the graph display. The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to display a custom
graph can be selected.
Thickness graph
Move the cursor on the graph to display thicknesses of that point for each image.
Click anywhere on the graph to move the synchronous line that position or click and hold to drag the line.
Place the cursor on the synchronous line to display the two headed arrow and drag the cursor to change
the range.
492
 Display example of Comparison (Macula Line)
Checking the box sets the selected image as the reference image for compar-
ison which becomes fixed to the left.
13
Change the displayed image by using the scroll bar.
493
 Display example of Progression (Macula Cross)
Horizontal OCT image

Vertical OCT image
Horizontal thickness graph Vertical thickness graph
The variation graph of the synchronous line position and variation value.
Horizontal: Pink
Vertical: Light blue
The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to display a custom graph
can be selected.
The graph display setting is applied to both the horizontal or vertical images.
494
 Display example of Comparison (Macula Cross)
Checking the box sets the selected image as the reference image for compar-
ison which becomes fixed to the left.
13
495
 When the range is specified

Place the cursor on the synchronous line to display the two headed arrow and drag the cursor to
change the range (0 μm to any values within the scanned width). The corresponding range is dis-
played in yellow on the scan position mark of the fundus image.
The average value of the specified range is displayed on the Follow-Up graph.
Specified width (μm) and position on the x axis are displayed.
496
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Macula Multi Display
13.5 Macula Multi Display
For the Macula Multi Horizontal, Macula Multi Vertical and Macula Multi Cross, perform the same
operation as Macula Line and Macula Cross except for selecting from the five lines in each directions
to displays the OCT image.
• The Macula Multi Horizontal and the Macula Multi Vertical cannot be captured with the RS-
3000 Lite.
 Macula Multi Horizontal / Vertical

* The following image is the Macula Multi Horizontal. Operations of the Macula Multi Vertical are the
same.
Progression 13
Click the change button displayed by

pointing the fundus image, or click the
line directly, to select which OCT im-
age is displayed.
The selected line is displayed in red
the other lines are displayed in green.
All images are changed accordingly.
The variation graph of the synchronous line position and varia-
tion value.
The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to display a
custom graph can be selected.
Comparison
497
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Macula Multi Display
 Macula Multi Cross

Horizontal OCT image
Vertical OCT image
Progression
Click the change button displayed by

pointing the fundus image, or click the
line directly, to select which OCT im-
age is displayed.
The selected line is displayed in red
the other lines are displayed in green.
The variation graph of the synchronous line position

Horizontal thickness graph and variation value.
Horizontal: Pink
Vertical thickness graph Vertical: Light blue
The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to
display a custom graph can be selected.
Comparison
Horizontal OCT image Horizontal thickness graph
Vertical OCT image Vertical thickness graph
498
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Macula Map Display
13.6 Macula Map Display
The follow-up display (Progression) and comparison display (Comparison) of fundus images and
thickness value or macula analysis value can be viewed using the Macula Map Data.

selected for the Race. When an other option is selected for the Race, “For Use Demo Only”
is displayed as a warning.
• Normative Database corresponds to ages 20 to 79. When the patient’s age is 80 or older,
20, “Invalid Age” is displayed to indicate the need for special handling of the data.
13
 Progression Macula
The thickness between LBS and LBE specified in the “Full Retina” field in the Retina Layer tab of the
Setting Dialog box is displayed.
The Reset and Original Size buttons are enabled.
4
5
• When the image capture settings are different, the image cannot be registered to Follow-
Up.
499
1. Fundus image
The dividing line of X direction is displayed in light blue and the dividing line of Y direction is displayed in pink
on the fundus image of the OCT image capture range.
Click and hold the triangle to drag the dividing line to the desired position.
Select a color map for the overlay displayed on the fundus image from the displayed image selection field.
Instead of the fundus images, the anterior segment images or scan position images can be displayed.
2. Analysis chart
Either Thickness or Difference can be selected from the display selection field. The comparison with
Normative Database is displayed in the color chart.
Under the color chart, “Fovea Min.”, “Avg. Thickness”, and “Total Volume” are displayed.
3. OCT image
The image located at the dividing line is the OCT image.
Various operations can be performed from the pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking the OCT image.
When selecting “Full Size”, the screen shown to
the right is displayed.
4. Sector selection
Up to six items can be selected from sectors of analysis chart or values of “Fovea Min.”, “Avg. Thickness”,
and “Total Volume”.
5.Graph
The thickness graph or ratio graph is displayed. The variation values (slope and p value) are also displayed.
The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to display a custom graph can be selected.
500
 Progression Glaucoma
The thickness between LBS and LBE specified in the “Glaucoma For Macula” field in the Retina Layer
tab of the Setting Dialog box is displayed.
The thickness is compared with Normative Database and displayed in a color scale.
13
6
6. Analysis chart
Two chart types (GChart and S/I) are displayed.
Selecting either Thickness or Difference from the display selection field displays a comparison with
Normative Database in a color chart.
The graph type (All, Select, Event) and whether to display a custom graph can be selected.
501
 Progression Custom
Display the data in the desired layout.
7. Data display
The selected analysis charts and OCT images are displayed.
The items to be displayed can be selected from OCT image or several analysis chart types: S/I, GChart, ETDRS, or
Volume. The selected sectors of S/I, GChart, or ETDRS chart can be displayed in the graph.
8. Analysis chart selection field

The analysis chart or OCT image to be displayed in the middle and bottom rows can be selected from the
drop-down menu.
Change the Analysis Chart (Thickness or Difference), LBS, and LBE settings in the display selection field as
necessary.
9. Save screen setting button

The displayed screen can be saved.
To set the analysis chart or OCT image displayed in the middle and bottom rows as default, save the screen setting.
When the screen setting is saved, the Progression Custom screen for any same type images will default to the
current setting.
1) Clicking the Save screen setting button dis-
plays the confirmation message.
2) Click the Yes button and the message

informs that the screen setting is saved
successfully.
3) Click the OK button to close the message
dialog box.
502
 Comparison Macula
The fundus images, ETDRS and Volume analysis charts, and OCT images of two items are com-
pared.
13
 Comparison Glaucoma
The fundus images, GChart and S/I analysis charts, and NDB and Deviation color maps of two items
are compared.
503
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Disc Circle Display
13.7 Disc Circle Display
For the Disc Circle data, the follow-up display (Progression) and comparison display (Comparison) of
the OCT image and thickness graph around the Disc Circle can be viewed.
Perform the same operation as the Macula Line other than the differences in the following.
When “Comparison” is selected and the thickness display setting is ILM to NFL/GCL, a color
graph showing the comparison with Normative Database is displayed.
The image must be set to WIDE for SLO Capture mode and captured with Disc Circle at
ø3.45mm.
• The Disc Circle cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.

• Each operation of the fundus image, OCT image, and Scope Setting tool can be performed
in the same manner as when displayed in Viewer screen.
However, full display of the fundus image cannot be performed.
“Over Age 80(Reference Data)” is displayed and when the patient’s age is younger than
 Progression
The fundus images and Whole, S/I, and TSNIT analysis charts are displayed.
Change the Analysis Chart (Thickness or Difference), LBS, and LBE settings in the display
selection field as necessary.
504
The Progression Custom screen is different from the Progression screen in that the middle and bottom
rows can be selected from either “Chart” (Whole, S/I, and TSNIT analysis charts) or “OCT + Graph”
(OCT image and TSNIT graph).
Select either “Chart” or “OCT+Graph”.
13
When the LBS and LBE fields on the left are set to other than ILM or NFL/GCL, the comparison with
Normative Database is not displayed and “Condition Error” appears on the TSNIT graph.
“Condition Error” indicates that Normative Database supporting the selected display
conditions does not exist.
505
 Comparison
The fundus images, analysis charts (Whole, S/I, and TSNIT), and TSNIT graph are displayed for com-
parison.
When the LBS and LBE fields on the left are set to other than ILM or NFL/GCL, the comparison with
Normative Database is not displayed and “Condition Error” appears on the TSNIT graph.
“Condition Error” indicates that Normative Database supporting the selected display
conditions does not exist.
506
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Disc Map Display
13.8 Disc Map Display
The follow-up display (Progression) and comparison display (Comparison) of fundus images, thick-
ness value, TSNIT graph, and Disc analysis value can be viewed using the Disc Map Data.
Operations are the same as those of Macula Map.

selected for the Race. When an other option is selected for the Race, “For Use Demo Only”
is displayed as a warning.
13
 Progression RNFL
The fundus images, analysis charts, and TSNIT graphs are displayed.
The analysis chart can be selected from Whole, S/I, TSNIT, and ClockHour. The sectors of
all charts can still be selected for the graph regardless of the displayed chart.
Change the Analysis Chart (Thickness or Difference) in the display selection field as
necessary.
Select from Whole, S/I, TSNIT, and ClockHour.
507
 Progression ONH
The fundus images, analysis charts, and analysis tables are displayed.
The analysis chart can be selected from either GChart or ETDRS. The sectors of both charts
can still be selected for the graph regardless of the displayed chart.
necessary.
Select either GChart or ETDRS. Analysis table
Analysis table
Displays the analytic value of the optic disc.
C/D rate (Horizontal)
C/D rate (Vertical)
R/D rate (Minimum)
R/D rate (Angle)
Disc area (mm2)
Cup area (mm2)
• If the optic disc cannot be analyzed due to image quality, or when “C/D ratio>1.0”,
“R/D ratio<0”, the analytic value is not displayed.
For the parameters that cannot be analyzed, “-” is displayed.
The fundus images are displayed. The selected analysis charts, TSNIT graph, or OCT images can
also be displayed.
Select the displayed item from the analysis chart (Whole, S/I, TSNIT, or ClockHour), TSNIT
graph, analysis chart (GChart or ETDRS), ONH analysis table, or OCT image. The sectors
for the graph can only be selected for the displayed analysis chart.
508
13
 Comparison RNFL
The fundus images, analysis charts (Whole, S/I, TSNIT, and ClockHour), OCT images, and TSNIT
graph are displayed for comparison.
necessary.
509
 Comparison ONH
The fundus images, analysis charts (GChart and ETDRS), and OCT images are displayed for compar-
ison.
necessary.
510
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Macula Radial Display
13.9 Macula Radial Display
For Macula Radial 6 and 12 data, the follow-up display (Progression) and comparison display (Com-
parison) of OCT images and thickness value can be viewed.
• The Macula Radial cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.
The operations are the same as when Macula Radial data is displayed in the Viewer screen
except for the Analyze chart display. Additionally, a graph can be displayed for the selected
OCT image only.
 Progression
13
The fundus images, OCT image, and analysis chart (ETDRS) are displayed.
Click the change button displayed by pointing the fundus image, or click the line directly, to select which
The selected line is displayed in red the other lines are displayed in green.
511
The fundus images are displayed. The selected analysis chart (GChart, ETDRS, or S/I) or OCT
images can also be displayed.
512
 Comparison
The fundus images, analysis charts (GChart, ETDRS, and S/I), OCT images, and thickness graph is
displayed.
13
Comparison graph
Placing a cursor over the graph displays thickness values.
513
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Disc Radial Display
13.10 Disc Radial Display
For Disc Radial 6 and 12 data, the follow-up display (Progression) and comparison display (Compari-
son) of OCT images and thickness value can be viewed.
• The Disc Radial cannot be captured with the RS-3000 Lite.
The operations are the same as when Disc Radial data is displayed in the Viewer screen
except for the Analyze chart display. Additionally, a graph can be displayed for the selected
OCT image only.
 Progression
The fundus images, OCT images, and analysis charts (ETDRS) are displayed.
Click the change button displayed by pointing the fundus image, or click the line directly, to select which
The selected line is displayed in red the other lines are displayed in green.
514
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Disc Radial Display
The fundus images are displayed. The selected analysis chart (GChart or ETDRS) or OCT images
can also be displayed.
13
 Comparison
The fundus images, analysis charts (GChart and ETDRS), OCT images, and thickness graph is dis-
played.
515
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Registration editing
13.11 Registration editing
If shift, tilt, or distortion that cannot be corrected automatically is seen when the fundus image is com-
pared with Follow-Up, perform alignment correction manually.
516
13.11.1 Registration editing screen
Edit tool Exit/Save button
13
Baseline image Set control point Follow-Up image

Scope setting tool
Edit result screen
Effective for Baseline/Follow-Up/
StandAlone images (chessboard)
Edit tool

Initializes the image.
Reset The initialization operation cannot be returned.
(Unused) (This button does not function.)

Magnifies the image. The magnified image can be panned.
Zoom
This image is moved by dragging.
Enters the mode setting the control point in the image.
In the position where the image is clicked, a maximum of five control points are set.
Draw Point By aligning and dragging the cursor on the set control point, the control point is
moved.
Enters the mode for deleting the set control point.
Erase Point Aligning the cursor on the set control point and clicking the cursor deletes the control
point.
Select the image to be displayed on the Edit result screen from the Chessboard
and Overlay.
517
Sets the image composite condition to be displayed in the Edit Result screen.
For Chessboard, the image chessboard display is inverted.
For Overlay, as the slider goes left, the Baseline image is seen more clearly and as
the slider goes right, the Follow-Up image is seen more clearly.
Show the confirm Checking this box displays a confirmation message when performing “Reset”
dialog and “Exit of Registration”.
Exit/Save button
Exit without saving Exit without saving the current status.
Exit with saving Exit with saving the current status.

Align the pointer on the image targeted and select from the
pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking on the image.
Fundus Image Displays the fundus image.

OCT Phase Fundus Image Displays the image generated from the OCT in the fundus image. (Macula
map and Disc map only) (RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite)
Color Fundus Image→[Color] Color fundus image (RS-330 only)
Additionally, Color/ Red Free / Emboss+ / Emboss- images can be selected.
captured.
Color Fundus Image→[FAF] FAF image (fundus autofluorescence image) (RS-330 only)
Additionally, Color/ Red Free / Emboss+ / Emboss- images can be selected.
captured.
Edit mode Selects the Edit mode. (Zoom, Draw Point, Erase Point)
Save As Bitmap Saves the image to the specified folder with the displayed status as
bitmap file.
Raw Image to Save As Bitmap Only the original image of the displayed image is saved in the specified
folder as a bitmap file.
518
13.11.2 Editing registration

1 Display the Baseline data together with the Follow-Up data for the image data to be cor-
rected in the Follow-Up screen.
2 Right-click the fundus image of the Follow-

Up data to be corrected and select “Regis-
tration Editor” from the menu displayed.
13
Registration Edit screen is displayed.
3 Set the display method of the Edit result screen.

The display of Edit Result Screen can be selected from Chessboard and Overlay in the
selection field of display mode. In addition, change the image appearance with the slider
operation to make the image deviation clear.
Display the two images in an alternate 5 x 5 chessboard design.

Chessboard
When the slider is switched from side to side, the chessboard image is inverted.
Overlaps the two images displayed transparently.
Overlay As the slider goes left, the Baseline image is seen more clearly and as the slider
goes right, the Follow-Up image/Stand-Alone image is seen more clearly.
4 Click the Draw Point button to select the Draw mode.

In the Draw mode, the cursor is displayed as the pencil shape ( ).
5 Click the point of interest on the fundus image to set three or more control points.
519
Clicking either image displays the control points

in both images.
Inputting three control points sets image correc-
tion to update the edit result screen.
A maximum of five control points can be set.
When the image is zoomed in, clicking the Zoom

button allows dragging and moving the
image.
When deleting a set control point, click the Erase

Point button to enter Delete mode. Aligning the
cursor on the control point displays the cursor as
an Eraser icon ( ) and clicking the control
point deletes the control point.
6 Check the image of Edit result screen and check that further correction is necessary.
When three or more points are set and confirmation can be performed, the edit result screen
image becomes brighter.
7 To perform further correction, move the control point in Draw mode.

When the cursor is aligned on the control point,
the cursor is displayed in hand shape ( ).
Drag this cursor to optimize the edit result screen
image. Right-clicking on the image with the cur-
sor displayed as hand shape, the control point is
deleted.
The Base-Line image is fixed and Follow-Up
image is corrected.
520
• When the control point is moved too much for adjustment, cancel the movement by
pressing the Undo button to Redo the adjustment.
• When performing the adjustment from the first again, delete all control point with the Reset
button .
8 Click “Exit with saving” to exit the registration editing.

Registration Edit screen is closed and returns to the Follow-Up screen. The comparison
result is updated to be displayed.
• When the registration editing is saved, the image cannot be returned to the original setting.
However, if the Baseline is changed, the registration editing is cleared.
• Do not exit the registration editing with the Return button . Without saving the Edit
contents, Follow-Up screen is closed. 13
521
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Printing / Printing Preview
13.12 Printing / Printing Preview
When the RS-3000/RS-3000 Advance/RS-3000 Lite/RS-330 Follow-Up screen is displayed, the cur-
rently displayed contents can be printed in the standard format.
To perform printing, click Print button in the toolbar.
• The printer can be set in the computer print setting.

• The contents set in “12.2 Setting Viewer Screen” (page 372) is not reflected on the printing
in the Follow-Up screen.
 Print from the Print preview

Clicking the Preview button in the toolbar displays the preview screen.
For the operations in the preview screen, see “2.6 Printing Image Data” (page 181).
Click the Print button to print.
522
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Exporting Follow-Up screen
13.13 Exporting Follow-Up screen
Export the Follow-Up screen during display with the specified format.
Perform exporting as with the same procedure of OCT image. With the status that desires exporting,
display the screen to perform export operation.
For details, refer to “12.15 Exporting OCT Images” (page 460).
Example of export in Bitmap format (Export bitmap file(s))
13
Example of the data to be output (Disc circle)
Example of export in Report format (Export bitmap file(s))
Preview Example displayed before saving (Disc circle)
523
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Sending Follow-Up screen by e-mail
13.14 Sending Follow-Up screen by e-mail
The Follow-Up screen during display is sent via e-mail with the report format exporting file (Export
Report file(s)).
The file is sent compressed in Zip format.
Perform Follow-Up using the same procedure as for sending the OCT image by e-mail. After display-
ing the screen in the manner desired to be sent by e-mail, perform the e-mail sending operation.
For details, refer to “2.8.2 Sending e-mails” (page 196).
To use the e-mail sending function, set the e-mail address, server, and certification beforehand.
For the setting method, refer to “2.8.1 Setting e-mail sending” (page 194). For the NAIS-EX
common setting, settings for each images are unnecessary.
Example of preview displayed before sending by e-mail

Instead of Save button that appears at the time of exporting, the Send Mail button is dis-
played.
524
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Error Messages and Remedies
13.15 Error Messages and Remedies
If any of the following error codes is displayed on the screen, follow the suggestions in the cause and
remedy column.
When contacting NIDEK or your authorized distributor, notify of the error code and the symptom along
with the program version of NAVIS-EX for appropriate service.
Error
Code
20000 Unknown Exception Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
20001 There is no exam data as RSFollowUp. There may be no registered examination data for
follow-up. Check whether examination data has 13
been registered for follow-up.
20002 Unable to create the image to be printed or exported. If the same error code is displayed again even
Confirm that the examination data is displayed after retrying printing, contact NIDEK or your
properly. When it is displayed properly, the folder authorized distributor.
settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper.
20003 Unable to print/preview. Confirm that the printer is Confirm that the printer is set correctly.
properly set. If the same error code is displayed again even
though the printer is set, contact NIDEK or your
20004 Unable to register the screen settings. The folder If the same error code is displayed again even
settings of NAVIS-EX may be improper. after retrying saving the screen setting, contact
NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
20005 It failed to show 3D. Check the computer specifications.
though the computer satisfies the requirements of
this application, contact NIDEK or your authorized
distributor.
20006 Fail to load Normative Database. Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
20007 It can't use Normative Database. Confirm that the requirements to use the
Normative Database are satisfied. If the same
20008 Please check Display color setting. The color setting of the display may not be 32 bit.
Change the color setting of the display to 32 bit.
though the color setting of the display is 32 bit,
20009 Unable to initialize the data setting dialog box. The Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
NAVIS-EX settings may be improper.
20010 Unable to write the file to the data folder. The NAVIS- If the same error code is displayed every time,
EX settings may be improper. contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
525
OCT IMAGE Follow-Up: Error Messages and Remedies
Error
Code
20011 Unable to save the optic disc analysis result. The If the same error code is displayed again even
settings of the examination data folder may be after opening the examination data again or a
improper. retry, contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
20012 File name is invalid. Change the file name and retry.
20013 The specified file is read only. Please specify another The specified file may be read-only. Check the
file. attribute of the specified file.
20014 Unable to write to specified file. Insufficient access Contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
rights to write, or it is used by another person or
program.
Set access rights correctly, and close any programs
that might be using the file and try again.
20015 Unable to analyze the optic disc. Perform image Analysis of the optic disc failed.
capture again. If the same error code is displayed again even
distributor.
20016 Unable to load Normative Database. Confirm that the Confirm that the requirements to use the
Normative Database file is properly installed. Normative Database are satisfied. If the same
20017 Unable to load the DLL necessary to activate RS If the same error code is displayed every time,
FollowUp. contact NIDEK or your authorized distributor.
20018 Unable to create a time lapse video image. Confirm The video image may not be created if the video
that no video images are replayed. image is already being accessed by a video player
software. Confirm that no video player software is
accessing the image file.
though the video image is not being accessed,
20019 Unable to activate the video image playback software. Confirm that the video player software is installed.
Confirm that the video image playback software is If the same error code is displayed again even
installed. though the video player software is installed,
526
14. EMC (ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY)
All devices that configure an electrical medical system must be comply with EMC standards (electro-
magnetic compatibility).
Confirm that the computer on which NAVIS-EX is to be installed (hereinafter, NAVIS-EX terminal)
complies with EMC standards.
When using a medical electronic device in an electromagnetic environment, refer to the guidance in
the table.
CAUTION • Medical electronic devices configuring electrical medical system need special
precautions regarding EMC.
The NAVIS-EX terminal needs to be installed and used in accordance with the EMC
information provided in this manual.
• Use of accessories, cables other than those specified or provided by the

manufacturer of this equipment could result in increased electromagnetic emissions 14
or decreased electromagnetic immunity of this equipment and result improper
operation.
• Do not use the NAVIS-EX-installed computer near, on, or under other electronic
equipment.
Otherwise, it could result in improper operation. If such use is necessary, the device
and the other equipment should be observed to verify that they are operating
normally.
• Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna

cables and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any
part of the device, including the specified or provided cables.
Otherwise, degradation of the performance of this equipment could result.
527
EMC (ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY):
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device should assure
that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 The device uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class B The device is suitable for use in all establishments, including domesticࠉ
Harmonic emissions *1 establishments and those directly connected to the public low-voltage powerࠉ
IEC 61000-3-2 supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/ Flicker *2
emissions IEC 61000-3-3
*1 For the regions where the rated voltage is 220 V or greater, this device complies with class A. For the regions where the
rated voltage is 127 V or less, this standard is not applicable.
*2 For the regions where the rated voltage is 220 V or greater, this device complies with this standard. For the regions where
the rated voltage is 127 V or less, this standard is not applicable.
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device should
assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact Floor should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If
Discharge (ESD) IEC ±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV, ±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV, floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative
61000-4-2 ±15 kV air ±15 kV air humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst lines lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines
100 kHz repetition 100 kHz repetition
frequency frequency
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode commercial or hospital environment.
Voltage, dips, short Dips: Dips: Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the
voltage variations on 0% UT in 0.5 cycle at 0°, 0% UT in 0.5 cycle at 0°, device requires continued operation during power
power supply input 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, mains interruptions, it is recommended that the device
lines IEC 61000-4-11 225°, 270°, and 315° 225°, 270°, and 315° be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a
battery.
0% UT in 1 cycle and 70% 0% UT in 1 cycle and 70%
UT in 25/30 cycles in UT in 25/30 cycles in
single phase (at 0°) single phase (at 0°)
Short interruptions: Short interruptions:
0% UT in 250/300 cycle 0% UT in 250/300 cycle

Power frequency (50/ 30 A/m 30 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels
60 Hz) magnetic field 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz characteristic of a typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial or hospital environment.
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
528
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device should assure
that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted RF 3V 3V Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used
IEC 61000-4-6 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz no closer than 30 cm to any part of the device, including cables.a
6 V in ISM and 6 V in ISM and

amateur radio amateur radio
bands between 0.15 bands between 0.15
MHz and 80 MHz MHz and 80 MHz
80% AM at 1 kHz 80% AM at 1 kHz
Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz
80% AM at 1 kHz 80% AM at 1 kHz
Proximity field from See “Test See “Test
RF wireless specifications specifications
communications for enclosure port for enclosure port
equipment immunity to RF immunity to RF
IEC 61000-4-3 wireless wireless
communications communications
equipment”. equipment”.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
14
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur
radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the
location in which the device is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the device should be observed to verify
normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the
device.
Test specifications for enclosure port immunity to RF wireless communications equipment

Test
Banda Maximum power Distance Immunity test level
frequency Servicea (W) (m) (V/m)
(MHz) (MHz)
385 380 - 390 TETRA 400 1.8 0.3 27

450 430 - 470 GMRS 460, FRS 460 2 0.3 28
710
745 704 - 787 LTE Band 13, 17 0.2 0.3 9
780
810
GSM 800/900, TETRA 800,
870 800 - 960 2 0.3 28
iDEN 820, CDMA 850, LTE Band 5
930
1,720
GSM 1800, CDMA 1900, GSM 1900,
1,845 1,700 - 1,990 2 0.3 28
DECT; LTE Band 1, 3, 4, 25: UMTS
1,970
Bluetooth, WLAN, 802.11: b/g/n,
2,450 2,400 - 2,570 2 0.3 28
RFID 2450, LTE Band 7
5,240
WLAN 802.11
5,500 5,100 - 5,800 0.2 0.3 9
a/n
5,785
NOTE: If necessary to achieve the immunity test level, the distance between the transmitting antenna and the ME equipment or ME
system may be reduced to 1 m. The 1 m test distance is permitted by IEC 61000-4-3.
a
For some services, only the uplink frequencies are included.
529
530
15. MAINTENANCE
15.1 Troubleshooting
In the event that the software does not work correctly, attempt to correct the problem according to the
following table. If the suggestions below do not eliminate the problem, contact NIDEK or your autho-
rized distributor.
Symptom Reason Remedy

The computer performance may not
Prepare a computer that satisfies the
satisfy the operating environment
operating environment conditions.
condition.
The computer may be logged in with a
Log into the computer as a user who has
user who has no administrator
Installation/update administrator authority.
authority.
cannot be performed.
The NAVIS-EX USB license key may Insert the NAVIS-EX USB license key in
not be inserted in the computer. the computer.
The installation disc read surface may
have deteriorated due to scratches and Clean the installation disc read surface. 15
dust.
The save location of the data folder Check that the data folder is properly set
may not be set properly. with the server control tool.
The external storage where the data
folder to be saved may not be turned Turn on the external storage.
on.
NAVIS-EX does not
activate. The computer and the external storage
Check that the computer and external
where the data folder is saved may not
storage are connected properly with the
be connected properly with the
connection cable.
connection cable.
Properly set the network with the network
The network may not be set properly.
administrator.
The computer and the external storage
Check that the computer and external
where the data folder is saved may not
storage are connected properly with the
The captured fundus be connected properly with the
connection cable.
image cannot be connection cable.
displayed. The external storage where the data
Refer to the external storage manual to
folder is saved may not be functioning
check / remedy the failure status.
properly.
The volume of data saved to the
Check the free space of external storage.
external storage where the data folder
Image display and/or If space is insufficient, prepare new
is saved may be too great resulting in
measurement value external storage.
insufficient free space.
display are slow
Due to the other applications running,
compared to just after
RAM is insufficient, the CPU is running
installation. Close unnecessary applications.
high, or the network is overloaded
resulting in the slowdown.
531
MAINTENANCE: Software Specifications
15.2 Software Specifications
Filing Network function

Image display function
Search function (patient information, date, period)
Zoom function
3D display function (OCT image)
Printing function (single printing, multiple random layout printing, template)
External I/F E-mail function (sending image by e-mail)

Report function (report data output)
External application activation function (view the selected images from an external appli-
cation)
Link function (patient information acquisition and data output)
Patient specification function (specify the patient from an external system)
DICOM
Image acquisition Link function (afcCapture, F-10 capture, RS-3000, RS-3000 Lite, RS-3000 Advance, RS-
330)
Import function
DCIM import function
Patient import/export function
Multiple patient import/export function
Patient export function specifying examination data
Image processing Effect function

Color correction function
Rotate/Mirror function
Resize function
Measurement function
Filter processing
Simple image processing
Stereo function
Panorama function
Composite function
Drawing function
3D display (OCT image)
Retina layer border reference position display (OCT image)
Retina layer border editing function (OCT image)
Anterior segment layer border reference position display (OCT image)
Optic disc shape edit function (OCT image)
3D display video image saving function (OCT image)
Blood vessel density analysis (OCT image)
Foveal avascular zone (OCT image)
Follow-up function
Video image acquisition Video image recording, saving

Video image viewing
Others Unit per package: 1 unit
Standard accessories Installation disc, license key, Operator's Manual (this book), Installation Manual,
Video image license (only when the F-10 is connected)
532
Optional accessories Long Axial Length Normative Database

Viewer software plug-in for NAVIS-EX
AL-Scan Viewer
CEM Viewer
MP Viewer
15
533
534
2.1. NIDEK, or an owner of the Third-Party-Software, retains
IMPORTANT—READ CAREFULLY any and all legal rights, title and interests in and to the
THIS AGREEMENT APPLIES TO THE NIDEK SOFT- Software or the Third-Party-Software. Any and all rights
WARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS. PLEASE under copyright law, patent law, design law and other
READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY AND THOR- intellectual property laws not expressly granted herein
OUGHLY BEFORE USING SOFTWARE. are reserved by NIDEK or the owner of the Third-Party-
Software. The license granted herein will not be intended
as, or construed to be, any assignment of the rights of
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT NIDEK or the owner of the Third-Party-Software. The
This SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("Agreement") is Software and the Third-Party-Software are protected by
an agreement between you, whether person or legal entity, copyright and other intellectual property laws and inter-
and NIDEK CO., LTD., a Japanese corporation, ("NIDEK") national treaties.
for software supplied by NIDEK or its designee pursuant to 3. LIMITATIONS
this Agreement, whether software alone or embedded soft-
3.1. You may not use the Software for any products without a
ware in a NIDEK hardware product, whether on disk or in
license of the Software.
read only memory, or on other media, or through an autho-
rized website or network, and any accompanying documents 3.2. You may not analyze, reverse-engineer, decompile, disas-
or materials (including, but not limited to, operation manuals semble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code
and electronic documents for the software) (collectively, of the Software.
"Software"). 3.3. You may not alter, reproduce, modify, translate, adapt, or
divert the Software.
Our product may include a third party’s software which is
linked, whether dynamically or statically, with the Software 3.4. You may not remove, delete or change the copyright
(the "Third-Party-Software"). The Third-Party-Software shall notice or other legends of the Software.
not be included in the definition of the "Software" in this 3.5. You may not sell, distribute, rent, license, sublicense,
Agreement. The rights and title of the Third-Party-Software lease, assign or otherwise transfer the Software to third
belong to the third party, and the terms of use of the Third- parties, or operate the Software for the benefit of third
Party-Software are set forth separately from this Agreement. parties without prior written consent of NIDEK.
The terms in this Agreement will not apply to the use of the 3.6. You may not create derivative works or cause or permit
Third-Party-Software except as expressly stipulated herein. others to create derivative works based upon the Soft-
ware without prior written consent of NIDEK.
By using or installing the Software, you agree to be bound to
the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you do not 3.7. You may not disclose operation manuals for the Soft-
agree with this Agreement, please do not use or install the ware to any third party without prior written consent of
Software and return the Software to the company from which NIDEK; provided, however, for the avoidance of doubt,
you obtained the Software. the "third party" in this section will not include doctors,
examiners, nurses, employees, patients and other per-
1. GRANT OF LICENSE sons who need to know the Software.
1.1. Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this 3.8. You may not use NIDEK’s trademarks or trade names
Agreement, NIDEK grants to you, and you accept, a lim- without prior written consent of NIDEK.
ited, non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use
the Software. 4. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
1.2. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by NIDEK or its des- 4.1. If you export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the Soft-
ignee, the license is limited to using the Software on a ware, you must comply with applicable export laws and
single computer or a single NIDEK hardware product. regulations of Japan and other countries, and obtain any
licenses or approvals required by governmental authori-
1.3. Notwithstanding the foregoing provision 1.2., you may
ties.
use the Software by a plurality of client computers con-
nected to a single server computer that installs said Soft- 5. UPDATES
ware; provided that the upper limit of the number of said 5.1. The Software and/or the Third-Party-Software may be, at
client computers will be determined by NIDEK in writing NIDEK’s own discretion, changed, updated or modified
separately and individually from this Agreement. from time to time without any prior notice to you. If such
1.4. The Software is only to be used for its intended purpose changes, updates, and modifications are applied to the
provided in the specifications, operation manual or Software licensed to you under this Agreement, such
related documents in accordance with applicable laws changes, updates, and modifications will be deemed a
and regulations. If the Software is embedded software in constituent part of the Software, and the terms and con-
a NIDEK hardware product, you will use such Software ditions of this Agreement will apply to such changes,
only as embedded software for the use of such NIDEK updates, and modifications.
hardware product. 5.2. NIDEK may, at its own discretion, make amendments to
1.5. For the license of the Software granted in this Agree- any provisions of this Agreement ("Amendments"), if
ment, unless the license is granted by NIDEK or its des- NIDEK deems (a) that such Amendments are appropri-
ignee explicitly free of charge, you will pay to NIDEK or ate in terms of interests for customers of this Software, or
its designee the price for the Software, or if the Software (b) that such Amendments are commercially reasonable
is embedded software in a NIDEK hardware product, the and not contrary to the objective of this Agreement. Prior
price for the NIDEK hardware product in which the Soft- to the Amendments, NIDEK will notify you of the terms
ware is embedded. and the effective date of such Amendments on the web-
2. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS site or by any other means.
I
6. TERMINATION that provision will be severed from this Agreement and
6.1. This Agreement is effective until terminated. If you such invalidity or unenforceability will not affect the
breach any term or condition of this Agreement, NIDEK remaining provisions of this Agreement. The remaining
may, without giving any prior notice to you, terminate this provisions of this Agreement will continue in full force
Agreement with immediate effect. Upon termination of and effect.
this Agreement due to the breach of this Agreement, 11. SURVIVAL
NIDEK reserves all the rights to claim damages resulting
11.1.The provisions of 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15,
from such breach.
16, 17 and this provision will survive the termination of
6.2. If this Agreement is terminated for any cause, you must this Agreement and will be binding after the termination
immediately cease the use of the Software, and delete, of the Agreement.
destroy and erase all the Software. Any fees paid by you
for the license of the Software will not be refund for any 12. ASSIGNMENT
reasons. 12.1.This Agreement or any part of this Agreement may not
be assigned or transferred without prior written consent
7. NO WARRANTIES
of NIDEK. The permitted assignee or transferee must
7.1. NIDEK MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WAR- agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement
RANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, prior to the assignment or transfer.
CONCERNING THE SOFTWARE AND THE THIRD-
12.2.This Agreement will be binding upon the permitted
PARTY-SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITA-
assignee or transferee and be enforceable by NIDEK.
TION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON- 13. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INCLUD- 13.1.This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement
ING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THIRD PARTY INTEL- between you and NIDEK concerning the Software and
LECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, ACCURACY, supersedes any prior written or oral agreement between
RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ABSENCE OF OR you and NIDEK except as otherwise provided in this
RECOVERY FROM ANY INTERRUPTION, ERROR- Agreement. No modification of this Agreement will be
FREE OPERATION OR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS. binding unless otherwise agreed in writing.
8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 14. NO WAIVER
8.1. IN NO EVENT WILL NIDEK BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCI- 14.1.The failure of NIDEK to enforce at any time or for any
DENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CON- period the provisions hereof in accordance with its terms
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS, CLAIMS OR COSTS will not be construed to be a waiver of such provisions or
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, of the rights thereafter to enforce each and every provi-
ANY LOST DATA, PROFITS, REVENUES, BUSINESS sion.
OPPORTUNITIES OR INFORMATION, LOSS OF USE
OF ANY PRODUCT, PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT, 15. NO THIRD PARTY RIGHTS
DOWNTIME COST , COST OF PROCUREMENT OF 15.1.This Agreement is intended to be solely for the benefit of
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES, OR ANY you and NIDEK and is not intended to confer any bene-
CLAIMS BY A THIRD PARTY, ARISING OUT OF OR fits upon or create any rights in favor of any person other
RELATED TO THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE than you and NIDEK.
SOFTWWARE AND/OR THE THIRD-PARTY-SOFT-
WARE, CHANGES, UPDATES OR MODIFICATIONS 16. HEADINGS
OF THE SOFTWARE AND/OR THE THIRD-PARTY- 16.1.All headings are for convenience only and will not affect
SOFTWARE, OR MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR SER- the meaning of any provision of this Agreement.
VICE OF THE SOFTWARE IF ANY. THE ABOVE LIM-
17. LANGUAGE
ITATIONS WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF ACTION, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, 17.1.The license agreement for the Software may be pro-
STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE, vided in multiple languages. In such event, unless other-
EVEN IF NIDEK IS NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY wise agreed in writing, the following shall apply:
OF SUCH DAMAGES, LOSS, CLAIMS OR COSTS. (i) If you use the Software in any countries outside Japan,
9. GOVERNING LAW AND ARBITRATION the license agreement for the Software shall be executed
and delivered in a text using the English language. The
9.1. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in
text using the English language shall prevail and control;
accordance with the laws of Japan.
and
9.2. All disputes arising between you and NIDEK relating to
this Agreement or the interpretation or performance (ii) If you use the Software in Japan, the license agreement
thereof will be finally settled by binding arbitration in for the Software shall be executed and delivered in a text
Tokyo in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration using Japanese language. The text using the Japanese
Rules of The Japan Commercial Arbitration Association. language shall prevail and control.
Judgment upon the award rendered by arbitration will be
* If you have any questions about this Agreement, contact
final and may be entered in any court having jurisdiction
NIDEK.
thereof.
10. SEVERABILITY
10.1.If any provision or any portion of any provision of this
Agreement will be held to be invalid or unenforceable,
II

Navis Ex - Ome - 19702 P902 N9

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Navis Ex - Ome - 19702 P902 N9

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

IMAGE FILING SOFTWARE

Use this device properly and safely.

BEFORE USE, READ THIS MANUAL.

Keep this manual handy to verify use whenever necessary.

• The following environment conditions must be maintained during use.

• For connection, configuration, and installation of NAVIS-EX, see the NAVIS-EX

• If no communication or communication failure occurs on a network, check the

• The measurement function of this software offers reference information of the

• Be aware that some operating procedures differ from those of Windows.

• Change patients with a device other than the capture terminal.

• Do not disconnect communication cables while the device is turned on.

• Do not change the set language.

• Equipment connected to the analog or digital interfaces must be certified according to

• Be sure to back up data to an external memory such as a USB hard disk.

• Operators should be responsible for managing their data.

• Store the installation disc in the disc case in a secure place.

Maintenance and Check

• If no communication or impeded communication occurs, check the network

• If the medical system is configured with a network, insert or connect an isolation

2. DISPLAYING IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

3. CUSTOM REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

4. COMMUNICATION WITH DICOM STANDARD . . . . . . . 235

5. DRAWING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

6. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

7. IMAGE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

8. PANORAMA IMAGE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

9. STEREO VIEWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

10.AF COMPOSITE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

11.COLOR COMPOSITE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.VIEWER DISPLAY OF OCT IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

13.OCT IMAGE Follow-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

14.EMC (ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY) . . . . . . 527

1.1 Software Outline

NON-MYDRIATIC AUTO FUNDUS CAMERA AFC-230, AFC-210, AFC-330

Acquires (Captures) the data by connecting the fundus capturing devices.

NAVIS-EX runs on computers using the following Windows *1 OS.

Drive CD/DVD drive

USB 2.0 port x 3 or more (except that for a mouse/keyboard/external HDD)

• Operate NAVIS-EX by pressing the button.

Note for date setting

Note for date format

Usable format Unusable format

Usable format Unusable format

Note for decimal point

Note for font size

: Only still images can be captured

1.3 Intended Use

1.5 Starting and Exiting NAVIS-EX

1.5.1 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-230/AFC-210)

2 Turn on power to the computer.

4 Turn on the digital camera power.

5 When the AutoPlay dialog box is displayed, click the

6 Turn on the AFC-230/210 power.

8 On the Windows desktop, double-click the

9 Enter a user name and a password.

10 Click the Login button to start NAVIS-EX.

1.5.2 Starting NAVIS-EX (AFC-330)

• When connecting multiple computers, start the computer to be a server at first.

2 On the Windows desktop, double-click the

3 Enter a user name and a password.

4 Click the Login button to start NAVIS-EX.

1.5.3 Starting NAVIS-EX (F-10)

2 Turn on the power of peripheral devices.